James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:16:44 GMT
Thirty–Four – Playing Politics
March 21st 1990 The Middle East
The Iranian hold over the southern part of Iraq was near complete.
From Basra down in the south near the entrance to the Persian Gulf and up through the valleys of the Euphrates & Tigris rivers, Iraqi resistance was nearly at an end. There was still some ongoing fighting inside Najaf and near to Nasiriyah but those cut-off, isolated Iraqi forces around those cities in the Euphrates Valley would soon be at the end. Iranian forces had reached the Iraqi-Kuwaiti border down its entire length and the Iraqi-Saudi border up the way up from Kuwait as far as the border crossing point at Judaiat al Hamir. Iranian armour was now moving towards Hillah and Karbala as well: attacking towards Baghdad from the south.
Through central parts of Iraq, Iranian forces hadn’t reached as deep and coming straight towards Baghdad, they were sill far away to the east of the Iraqi capital. Yet by coming up the Euphrates, as well as the Tigris too, they were threatening to envelope the city and get behind its defenders who were facing the wrong way. Iranian forces had already found gaps far to the north of the city too and armoured units had been pushed forward to Al Khalis in the Tigris Valley. If the Iranians could get across the river there, Baghdad would be doomed even before the troops coming up from the south could get anywhere near the city.
The Iraqi Army showed no sign of stopping the Iranians in the face of determined attack to advance, just the same as it had been throughout the short war. They had fallen back every time or been defeated in-place. Munities had taken place and mass surrenders had occurred. Generals had fled or defected to the invaders. There was no air cover and supplies had dried up. There still was – even with the country on the verge of collapse – arrests and shootings of senior officers by agents of the regime too as well as punishments ordered from above for conscript soldiers judged to have failed on the battlefield.
Yes, it was almost as if Qusay Hussein wanted his country to be defeated and swallowed up by Iran.
Qusay himself had tried everything that he could think of to avert the disaster which he didn’t believe was occurring. He couldn’t see that everything he did made it all worse and was now wholly convinced that the only way to fight the war was his way. No one dared challenge him any more (apart from in his own imagination that was) and he had slipped into insanity when it came to his beliefs on how the war was going. Every day he saw the latest maps of how much more of the country was in enemy hands yet he was convinced that the tide of war was about to turn because of his own genius.
Saddam’s younger son was running out of time though because the Iranians were making advances on more than just the battlefield.
The Iranians had used mustard gas, hydrogen cyanide and weaponized chlorine in select engagements with the Iraqis where the chemical weapons were employed to break strong defensive positions. The Iraqis hadn’t been able to retaliate due to the defection to Kuwait of Chemical Ali and then Qusay murdering most of the man’s former staff on suspicion of disloyalty. The Iranians had found that those attacks had been effective on the battlefield but had done them no good in the wider battle afterwards for their efforts to secure what they were taking by force of arms in Iraq. Rumors spread among the people whom Iran was trying to woo with their religious & ethnic motivation for the war about the chemical attacks; Iranian agents killed the rumor-mongers and stopped the use once Iraqi resistance had crumbled.
Iranian propaganda had been directed against the Iraqi people since the beginning of the war. They had sought to convince Iraqis that they were there to liberate them, Shia and Sunni as well. Saddam had been an apostate, the people had been told, and his surviving son was no different.
The propaganda wasn’t wildly successful, but it didn’t have to be. Iran wanted to weaken Iraqi resistance behind the frontlines with anything they could and when their propaganda helped in that even in a small way it was successful enough. Once inside Iraq, if the people didn’t get behind the new regime which Iran was setting up and chose to resist later then Iran would deal with them afterwards. For the time being though, Iran was spreading the measure that it was a benevolent invader.
Food and medicines were being distributed throughout occupied regions. Doctors came behind the advancing troops to treat the Iraqi people for any and all ailments. Iraqis were asked to help Iran start repairing mosques and more of them would be built too.
Was there anyone who wanted to fight to help deaf the younger Hussein? Those who would enlist in an Iraqi militia to do so would be welcome and their families provided for should the worst happen to them. Iraq captives taken in battle were also welcome to work with the Iranians in defeating their former oppressors and brining the Iranian and Iraqi people together.
The Iranians were playing politics in Iraq and playing the game rather well.
*
The actions of the Iranians continued to cause panic among Iraq’s neighbours.
Across the Gulf Arab Monarchies – the Saudis and the smaller nations along the southern shores of the Persian Gulf – they carried on watching with horror as the Iranians got further into Iraq and there came no sign that anything was going to stop them. Meetings between leaders and their representatives continued to take place in a panicked fashion as each new Iranian advance brought about concern over their closeness to fully subsuming Iraq. The military forces of the six nations of the Gulf Cooperation Council were now fully-formed under the Peninsula Shield Force (PSF) high command with troops inside Kuwait, a short distance back from the Iraqi-Saudi border and also in several locations throughout the Persian Gulf in case of Iranian action there.
The firm belief was that as soon as Iraq fell, maybe even after Baghdad was taken and before the rest of the country was conquered, Iran would move south. The expectation was that the Iranians would play politics in their countries too, whipping up the public to support them as they were doing in Iraq.
Kuwait, Bahrain, Qatar, the United Arab Emirates and Oman joined Saudi Arabia in a determination not to make this happen, yet neither smaller nation was taking the same sort of drastic measures as the Saudis were in preparing to meet that threat with an even greater one than the Iranians had with their all-conquering army.
There were Pakistani technicians inside Saudi Arabia outfitting Saudi missiles with nuclear warheads and also modifying bombs to be carried on Saudi aircraft. These were Pakistani weapons from a program long ago financed with Saudi money on the secret condition that if one day the worst happened – whatever that was – Pakistan would provide access to Saudi Arabia to them. There were conditions attached by the Pakistanis, draconian controls imposed by themselves on the weapons when in Saudi Arabia, but the nuclear weapons were ready to be used if necessary to defend the country.
The missiles were DF-3A intermediate-range ballistic missiles (IRBMs) supplied in recent years by China. The IRBMs – known to NATO as the CSS-2 – were meant to only armed with conventional warheads… with questions asked by many as to what kind of high-explosive would justify the need for a weapon like an IRBM. The aircraft were British-built Tornado-IDS strike-bombers: the same type used by the RAF, the Luftwaffe and the Aeronautica Militare in combat over Europe. Unlike those supplied to the British, West German and Italian air forces, the Saudi Tornados weren’t fitted with the capability to drop nuclear-armed bombs.
CIA intelligence activities as well of those of Mossad had found out what the Saudis were up to with the IRBMs while MI-6 became aware of what was happening with the aircraft as well. Furthermore, the KGB were also starting to become aware. Saudi Arabia was not at war with anyone at the minute though was supporting the West with its massive oil deliveries being made due to a large increase in output to supply the NATO armies fighting in Europe. If the nuclear weapons delivered by the Pakistanis were going to be used – a big ‘if’ – then they would be deployed against the Iranians.
However, there were thoughts about the future too though for the missiles and the aircraft could reach targets in Israel and the Soviet Union as well as American and British interests across the Middle East. None of these outside powers wanted the Saudis to have these weapons yet they had been fast acquiring them from the Pakistanis. Several countries would start to think about what to do if the situation for Saudi Arabia became one where they saw the need to use them.
*
Egypt was today starting to move their military forces across the Red Sea and into Saudi Arabia.
Assisted by the Americans with their amphibious ships still remaining in the region as the Suez Canal stayed partially-closed, yet relying mainly on hired shipping, the Egyptian Third Army begun to be transferred across the Red Sea. Tanks, armoured vehicles, trucks, supplies and men were moved out from Suez and Hurghada. Their main destination was Jeddah, the large port facility far to the south, though several smaller sites further along the Saudi coast and thus geographically closer to where the Egyptians would end up were where the ships were to go too.
It was to be a herculean effort with many voyages across the Red Sea to get the Egyptians into Saudi Arabia and then keep them supplied there afterwards. There would be the addition of some flights made to move more men and lighter equipment though the sea route was the only option for the deployment made by the Egyptians. There was a land route from Egypt to Saudi Arabia, one which would shorten the logistics effort considerably, but while that went across Jordan it also would mean crossing the Sinai and Israel too.
The Sinai was demilitarized at Israeli insistence and the Israelis were never going to allow Egyptian troops to move through their country, no matter what. Some overflights would be allowed, but only unarmed civilian airliners carrying troops nothing more. The movement of the Egyptians to support the Saudis was in the geo-strategic interests of Israel yet that didn’t mean that they would help out in that manner by making the transport route shorter!
Egypt was making this move of a significant part of their military power – many aircraft would be joining the Third Army – to Saudi Arabia for several reasons.
Mubarak was still wary of a second uprising against his regime to follow the initial Soviet-inspired one that had been defeated yet he considered the loss of Saudi Arabia (less so the other Gulf Arab Monarchies) to a potential Iranian invasion to be a serious threat to him too. With Iran taking over Iraq and clashing with the Americans in naval air engagements, Mubarak feared that Iran had plans to conqueror the whole of the Middle East. They were exporting their revolution and that would eventually threaten Egypt close to its borders should it go unchecked. The Saudis needed help to defend their own nation – he wasn’t aware yet of the nuclear weapons – and without any major American assistance forthcoming, Egypt was the only one able to provide that.
Another reason for the military deployment by Egypt was to stop further warfare in the region away from a possible Saudi-Iranian conflict. Israel’s short war with Iraq and Syria last month, including the outrageous invasion of Jordan by Iraq, had almost set the whole of the Middle East alight. The Soviets may have been behind the attempted coup d’état in Egypt in the sense of inspiring it, but that had only been able to happen due to the ongoing war then being fought between Israel and the two Soviet-aligned countries which the former soon defeated. Egyptian troops were going to Saudi Arabia to forestall further warfare which would come from an Iranian invasion: Mubarak wanted the Iranians to see the danger they faced in fighting very capable Egyptian forces and back off by staying in Iraq rather than moving further ahead.
The recent visit made to Cairo by the US Vice President had allowed the Egyptians to see that their biggest ally was severely wounded by the worldwide war which it was fighting with the Soviets. The Americans claimed they were winning and all evidence pointed to that, but Mubarak had been concerned that the tide of war might turn again in Europe. Either way, Webb had made it clear that the only thing that his country could provide was assistance not active defence of its allies like Egypt in the region. Mubarak had been briefed that back in the United States some were playing politics when it came to the Middle East and were eager for Iran to be attacked. However, that was impossible and he received that message even when told in very diplomatic terms by Webb that the US wanted to see its Middle Eastern allies defend themselves as they were all in this together.
So Egypt was forced to act to stop a wider war across the whole of the region, one which would threaten Egypt itself, by preparing to fight a war that it didn’t want.
Mubarak was hoping that his bluff would work.
March 21st 1990 Marienborn & Bebertal, Saxony–Anhalt, East Germany
Those who were engaged in playing politics back in the United States were having their unwanted influence on the war here in Europe starting to be felt more so than before.
Powell had been working hard, Schwarzkopf knew, in keeping that from happening as best as possible but there were some events just out of the control of the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. SACEUR had received a call from the CJCS last night explaining what had happened with a press conference at the Pentagon. There had been regret expressed when Powell had been in contact from Raven Rock and Schwarzkopf had listened carefully and reacted better than he might have done to the news. It really was rather frustrating for both men yet they couldn’t change what had happened.
The story relayed from the CJCS had been that Deputy Defence Secretary Rumsfeld had attended a media event at the Defence Department headquarters just outside Washington. Many of the important and high-level activities which usually occurred there had been transferred across to Raven Rock – along with the offices of Cheney and Powell – but the Pentagon had remained in use throughout the war. Rumsfeld had gone there late yesterday to talk to assembled journalists in an open environment as part of the strategic interests in keeping them on-side with the war: they could hardly have been taken across to Raven Rock. The press event was meant to have been done by the Defence Secretary himself yet with Cheney not available (he was making a secretive trip with a destination not given to Schwarzkopf), Rumsfeld had gone in his place. A disaster had occurred. Rumsfeld had been ambushed by certain hostile journalists and goaded by them into talking too much.
They had wanted to know where Cheney was: he had refused point-blank to give them an answer citing national security concerns. There had been a question from a determined journalist from the New York Times who was working around the edges of a story not yet run about American POWs held by the Soviets: Rumsfeld had refused to confirm or deny the journalist’s understanding that finding them wasn’t the top priority of ongoing NATO war efforts in Europe. Cheney’s deputy, the man he had pushed for the inclusion of in the wartime US government over President Bush’s doubts, had then taken a question from someone working for CNN who asked about the criticism from some that Schwarzkopf was a ‘château general’: Rumsfeld had denied that and blurted out that SACEUR was due to visit the frontlines inside occupied parts of East Germany soon enough.
In Schwarzkopf’s considered opinion, with the first question Rumsfeld could have given a better reply saying that Cheney was somewhere that wouldn’t have raised an eyebrow (at a military base elsewhere) rather than refusing to say where he was. With the second question, the Deputy Defence Secretary could have elaborated on what was the number one concern of the war effort in fighting the enemy where he was to found but stated that the locating of missing service personnel was second or third. As to where SACEUR spent his time, that was the question which shouldn’t have been answered. There had been plans for Schwarzkopf to visit East Germany in the next few days – not today – and for afterwards coverage from select media people who went with him would be used to show that it had happened.
It wasn’t something which was supposed to be announced beforehand!
The CJCS had told Schwarzkopf that the attitude of the media towards Rumsfeld had been unexpected by him but not others. It was becoming known that he was behind the now-ceased nuclear strikes against Cuba and the thinking was that they had failed to bring the Cubans to the peace table while at the same time increasing the danger of global thermonuclear war. Rumsfeld had his own enemies within the Bush Administration, gained in the extraordinary short time he’d been in-place, and they were out to see him damaged in public rather than Cheney or Bush. There was massive self-censorship which the American media was undertaking where the CEOs of the big companies were working (through the Federal Communication Commission) with representatives from the Defence Department and the CIA. In Europe, SACEUR had members of the press pool assigned to his headquarters and they behaved themselves… generally. Others back home, freelancers or those with an independent streak, plus also those who were really stretching the meaning of the First Amendment, weren’t so well behaved. They believed in getting to the truth, even if they ended up not publishing or broadcasting what they found out through their own decision to abide by censorship guidelines and not endanger American lives.
These factors had combined to bring a clash between Rumsfeld and the media yesterday at the Pentagon. Powell had spoken with Cheney and Bush afterwards and agreed that Schwarzkopf should go as soon as possible on his planned visit into East Germany rather than delay: the media side of that was one thing, but of more importance was the danger of enemy intelligence getting wind of it even if the press conference hadn’t been shown live and was being edited first. SACEUR would make his flying visit to occupied territory to show that American military commanders didn’t fight wars by hiding in fear in the distant rear and also soon after the disaster which had occurred with that media event to stop SACEUR possibly suffering the same fate as General Galvin had. No one could be one hundred per cent certain, even after all of this time, that the shooting down of his helicopter hadn’t been luck on the part of the enemy as all evidence seemed to point to.
Therefore, Schwarzkopf made his trip into East Germany this afternoon earlier than planned and still pretty annoyed, even after a night’s sleep, at the political games far away from the war here in Central Europe.
There had been distant fighter cover from high-flying F-15s in addition to a pair of Apache gunships which closely escorted his Black Hawk and a second one carrying select members of the press pool from Husterhoeh Kaserne. The helicopters came over the IGB border staying low and on a carefully-plotted path which went past Helmstedt before arrival at the eastern side of the Helmstedt-Marienborn border crossing site better known as ‘Checkpoint Alpha’.
Schwarzkopf came out of his helicopter alongside his aide Major Kelly with a trio of Green Berets assigned as bodyguards behind. Four more staff members of his were with the reporters which departed from the other Black Hawk. The whole party was met by the commander of the 13th Corps Support Command, Brigadier-General Billy Solomon. The quartermaster officer was a busy man as his duty was to provide logistics support for the US III Corps across lines of communication both sides of the IGB badly damaged by warfare. Still, he took the time to greet everyone properly and give a short tour of the Marienborn facility where US Army control over the crossing point was firmly established. His own public affairs people aided those with Schwarzkopf’s party in showing the reporters around the East German site before there was a ‘photo op’. There was then a look at the highway laden with trucks moving eastwards down one side of the road and more heading back west. The latter – the open supply links – was far more important than the propaganda of the Marienborn border controls, even if the reporters didn’t understand that.
A short speech was given by Schwarzkopf and he answered what were arguably soft questions from journalists who knew him well enough to know what kind of responses he would give and what he wouldn’t… they kept in mind that they’d come to Marienborn when others in their profession hadn’t.
Afterwards, another officer staff officer with a III Corps component command turned up for the trip deeper into East Germany: Colonel Tommy Franks from the 1st Cavalry Division.
III Corps was part of the US Third Army, which had a forward headquarters inside East Germany at Bebertal; their main HQ was back across in West Germany near to Gifhorn. The 1st Cavalry Division was one of four combat divisions assigned (the others being the 2nd Armored and 5th & 24th Mechanized Infantry Divisions) to the corps and all of them had been involved in a series of engagements all across the North German Plain and now inside East Germany. Franks led the ground escort for Schwarzkopf’s group which travelled in HMMWVs rather than helicopters up to Bebertal due to his division being pulled off the frontlines as a temporary measure waiting for the breakthrough at the front to occur. Other soldiers from both the III Corps and the Third Army would have wanted to duty for prestige purposes, but it had been Franks’ to lead SACEUR safely to Bebertal.
General Yeosock was waiting for Schwarzkopf when he arrived at the command post and there was another photo op where care was taken to not reveal the exact location. The media were then excluded from the briefing inside the command tent as they were given a tour of the village next to where the command post was under the watchful eye of Franks’ soldiers that included many military police who had an eye on the locals. The briefing covered generally what Schwarzkopf knew already through he heard it from the Third Army commander rather than his own briefers back at Husterhoeh Kaserne.
Each of the four corps commands under Yeosock’s command – US I & II & III Corps plus the recent addition of the Allied I Airborne Corps – were deep inside enemy territory. The I Corps had linked up with the US Marines and their II MEF along the Baltic coastline, the II Corps were moving down through already-occupied Altmark, the III Corps was fighting against dug-in opposition on the western banks of the Elbe north of Magdeburg and the I Airborne Corps was on the left flank through which the II Corps was moving into combat to hit the Elbe defenders in the rear. SACEUR saw the maps showing the positions of the Third Army plus the projected lines of advance to be made. Everything was as it was supposed to be with this apart from the timescale of the Third Army getting this far forward was ahead of schedule… a good thing indeed even if that had external influence with other plans made for Eastern Storm.
Yeosock was certain that by tomorrow morning, he would be across the Elbe with the II & III Corps operating side-by-side. He’d then send those two corps charging eastwards with the ultimate destination being Berlin. The activities of the other pair of corps, plus the US Marines not under his command, were certain to keep what enemy forces were nearby out of the way and unable to interfere. He did point out that while there had been an ease of liaison with British troops with their UK I Corps in getting them through the Helmstedt crossing point and down towards the Elbe south of Magdeburg (the city was being surrounded rather than assaulted), there still remained the problem with them assigned to NORTHAG. When Schwarzkopf questioned if he was asking for the British to be put under his command, Yeosock told him that for operational purposes that might be the best idea; moreover, it might be a good idea to also detach the US I Corps to the II MEF’s higher command. He explained this all to SACEUR as a desire to strengthen the attack plus also help with administrative issues when it came to supplies in the rear. The wide Hannover Salient, which other NORTHAG forces were still engaging, put a strain on his supply links into East Germany with his main supply route now being shared with the British I Corps. That highway from Helmstedt which ran to Berlin eventually was not up to the same standards here in East Germany as it was in West Germany (part of it back there over the IGB was still in enemy hands). The width of the road and the generally surfacing condition provided restrictions, then too there was the damage done to every bridge along the road along with all of the explosions made to tear parts of it up. Engineers were all over the road, but an advance by three corps commands eastwards, one under a separate higher command than the other two, couldn’t all be supported down that one highway when the lack of nearby useable roads was a major factor.
Schwarzkopf fully understood what Yeosock was saying. He’d seen many reports on the transport links inside East Germany with regard to the state they were in during peacetime before war damage from both sides had hit them. Eastern Storm’s success would rely upon main supply routes and so there were support units of engineers and security forces marshalled ready before the invasion commenced to get those roads in operation. Now, local circumstances here near Magdeburg made that situation worse with the arrival into East Germany of British heavy troops coming forward from their previous fighting back over in West Germany. He as SACEUR had ordered that once the fighting in the Netherlands had ended as lighter British forces from the fighting there replaced heavier ones and there had also been a delay at the border regions in getting the Third Army forward initially. The chickens had come home to roost on that matter, now there were too many forces crammed into a small area from separate higher commands all needing supplies coming down one route. Schwarzkopf looked at Yeosock’s maps of East Germany from a wider perspective than just the Third Army’s operational area and saw the Hamburg-Berlin highway: he could imagine an armchair general sometime postwar saying that that should have been used too for an invasion route and supply link afterwards. The situation hadn’t developed like that though with the forces not being in-place for an operation like that and enemy resistance being stronger in more places than others. He didn’t regret his decisions made when it came to Eastern Storm as he had to fight a war with an enemy doing their own thing and his limited number of troops. Naturally, if the war had been different, the Hamburg-Berlin route would have been important but he had a war to fight not a perfect situation to dream up.
Yeosock was told that at the moment it would be politically unacceptable to attach the British I Corps to the Third Army. There were things even as SACEUR he couldn’t interfere in. Still, there would be a localised situation over those supply routes where they merged at the IGB and cooperation extended into East Germany south of Magdeburg so someone was in overall command on the ground rather than several people far away. The advance of the French III Corps – also under NORTHAG – as they carried on advancing on the other side of the Harz Mountains would eventually become the main axis of advance for NORTHAG as they would use the highway from the Leipzig–Halle area (both cities to be avoided for the time being) to move up towards Berlin from and as their main supply route. He decided here and now, without telling Yeosock this latter part, that he would issue orders through NORTHAG to have the British move on the Schönebeck–Zerbst–Rosslau–Coswig axis, the exact details to be worked out lower down the command chain, to reach that highway and future main supply route for them. There was a desire already expressed to him through Manfred Wörner (NATO Secretary-General) to have NATO forces from many countries make the approach to Berlin engaging in the fighting – and being seen to share the burden – in addition to the long ago agreed plan for a final attack to liberate West Berlin and also seize East Berlin to include contingents, even small ones, from almost all NATO nations. The Allied I Corps had several country’s troops within (British, American, West Germans, Belgians as well as smaller numbers of Italians and Luxembourgish) and the British I Corps had many West Germans among their numbers too.
There was something else raised by Yeosock to Schwarzkopf after he’d been looking at the maps and asked for no one but Kelly to assist him. The Third Army commander’s questions concerned the several field armies which the Soviets had been keeping back as a strategic reserve to counter Eastern Storm. Where were they and why hadn’t they yet come into action? SACEUR told him what he had been told, though leaving out some details for security reasons: US intelligence believed that someone high up outside of East Germany had ordered those three here and the two in northwestern Czechoslovakia as well to not move forward with no explanation available yet. There were plans afoot to hit them with air power once they exposed themselves and afterwards operational moves on the ground would be made in reaction, but for now Eastern Storm was to continue without the interference of them. It was doubtful that overall they could have done much apart from slow things down and increase the body count – on both sides – but, naturally, Schwarzkopf was happier to have them not coming to battle despite concerns which he knew more senior people were having about what that all meant on a geo-political level.
Schwarzkopf left the command post and met with the press again for another photo op with him in Bebertal (the village’s identity would be revealed only after the Third Army HQ had moved on) and a few more questions about how the occupation was going. He was ‘truthful’ with them on that matter: it was brutal at times and the locals were fighting because the regime here, plus the KGB, were making them do so. Soon enough though, victory would come and everyone here would welcome the liberation brought by NATO.
Yes, Schwarzkopf was playing politics too, even if he might not have wanted to.
March 21st 1990 Montego Bay, St.–James, Jamaica
The Cubans were supposed to show up sometime within the next fifteen minutes on an aircraft coming down from their country into Sangster International Airport which would be unmolested in its flight. Someone high up in Raúl Castro’s government, not El Jefe himself, was expected to arrive in Jamaica to meet with Dick Cheney and those with him from the United States including Dick Armitage too.
There was no sign of the incoming flight though.
Armitage was briefed by one of the US Air Force officers who was ashore with the diplomatic party and providing military communications that there had been no radar track shown by USAF or the US Navy of an aircraft heading towards Jamaica as there was meant to be. Safe passage had been guaranteed for a flight to come to Sangster Airport despite the presence of American military forces all around Cuba. The destroyer sitting offshore in Montego Bay, USS Luce, here to provide evacuation support for the diplomatic party if everything went to hell was under firm orders like other warships as well as aircraft that there had been a wide no-shoot corridor left open for the Cubans to come down to Jamaica.
No plane had left Cuba though.
Armitage was inside the hotel suite near to the airport along with the Defence Secretary and others and he spoke with Cheney about the Cubans. Was it possible, he asked him, that their aircraft had deviated from that flight corridor and been engaged on the way here? No, Cheney responded, outside of that temporary air corridor there were massive restrictions today on what could be engaged and word would have come now if there had been an accident? Armitage asked if possibly the Cubans might be avoiding radar coverage and were arriving undetected? Again, the Defence Secretary told him that that wasn’t possible.
Either the Cubans were late or they weren’t coming at all.
Cheney was connected by a satellite phone to SOUTHCOM headquarters in Florida and had a conversation with General Thurman there. ‘Mad Max’ and the Defence Secretary talked about if there were any signs at all of the Cubans showing up though Armitage only heard one side of the conversation. Cheney asked what he had asked him about the chances of an accidental shoot-down by US forces or the possibility that the Cubans might be flying very low over the water with radar jamming equipment being used. Refusal came from Florida of both of those things and Cheney moved on to asking about other ‘strategic indicators’ concerning Montego Bay.
It took Armitage a few seconds to understand what he meant… he fought the urge to sit down after that realization came due to the implications. The Defence Secretary was enquiring of SOUTHCOM’s commander whether there were any hints that his presence in Montego Bay meant that a possible nuclear attack was coming this way. He was in a known location and there had been worries expressed about the possibility that Soviet forces in Cuba had nuclear weapons with them. That was an unknown factor and now Cheney was worried about it. Having already been underneath (well… almost) a nuclear warhead before, Armitage didn’t fancy his chances a second time, especially since the heavily-guarded suite they were in of this hotel was high up on the top floor. There was roof access and a helicopter flying from the USS Pensacola – another US Navy ship nearby, this one an amphibious support ship – ready to take them to meet with the Cubans at the airport, but in the face of a nuclear attack that escape route didn’t seem viable to him.
When Cheney finished the call to Mad Max in Florida, he didn’t look that concerned. Armitage believed he was annoyed at what appeared to have been a case of him being given the run around. The trip here for the Defence Secretary, Armitage and the others had been a long one – flying through Puerto Rico first and then around the southern side of Hispaniola to avoid combat zones north and east of Cuba – made on the promise of a meeting agreed with the Cubans via Swiss intermediaries. He could only assume that SOUTHCOMs commander had eased any concerns over that worry about a nuclear attack. Armitage was about to speak to him on that though had to wait because Cheney took the head of the Secret Service detachment here aside and had a whispered conversation with him. There was quite a force of them, almost two dozen agents, who’d come down to Jamaica. Beforehand, Armitage had been briefed about a worry over a KGB assault on Cheney’s party, especially since there had been ‘activity’ in Jamaica throughout the war from foreign agents active here plus several Cuban regime figures who’d abandoned Cuba and fled to the island.
Armitage feared that less than a nuclear attack, and he also had the pistol with him which he had taken to Yugoslavia on that failed diplomatic mission.
Answers to his questions soon came when Cheney finished with the agent in-charge and came over to speak with Armitage and the most-senior of the State Department people who were on this assignment. The Defence Secretary relayed part of his talk with SOUTHCOM and said that there was no sign of the Cubans showing up: monitoring of Cuban airbases showed no activity where an aircraft, military or civilian, had been readied to come down to Jamaica. None were in the air either and there had come no shoot-downs of any aircraft over Cuba or flying out of Cuba in the last twelve hours. He didn’t think that the Cubans were coming.
There was still a few minutes left before the scheduled arrival at 18:00 hours local time and, naturally, they would wait until then and maybe for an hour or even two longer, just in-case. Afterwards, Cheney believed that it would be a good idea if they transferred across to the Pensacola for the night. Communications from there were far more secure than from here on the ground in Jamaica and any worries over security would be eased by being aboard that ship. The State Department diplomat – handpicked by Secretary of State Dole to come here – asked if there had been any other indication given by SOUTHCOM as to what was going on with the missing Cubans. Was there any military activity inside Cuba to suggest that something was going on which would have stopped the attempt at meeting with the Cubans and coming to some sort of agreement with them?
Cheney told him that no there hadn’t been. He explained that his belief was that whatever was going on might not be clear for some time. There would be someone in Cuba playing politics or another so far unnoticed military development had occurred. Either way, at the moment that wasn’t something which could be found out. Armitage had nothing really to add to this though he did ask Cheney if whether the agreed upon strategy when it came to dealing with the Cubans still remained in-place. Yes, the Defence Secretary told him, that was still the case… and with a sly grin he added that he planned to screw them over too with whatever ‘deal’ was agreed.
An hour and a half later, the first of the two CH-46E Sea Knights wearing US Navy colours arrived. The rooftop was for emergency use and a transfer there to these big helicopters of the diplomatic party plus security would mean the helicopters hovering rather than landing due to building weight restrictions. So, without the worry of incoming missiles or attacking commandos, the helicopters landed one at a time within the hotel grounds. Cheney and most of the Secret Service agents plus several military officers went aboard the first Sea Knight while Armitage and others were to get aboard the second. There were Jamaican soldiers nearby though they stayed out of the way, looking outwards with rifles at the ready.
The first helicopter lifted-off and once it was clear the second one started to come in. Armitage had turned away rather than looking upwards at the second Sea Knight due to the downwind from the tandem rotor helicopter. His attention went back to the sky though when he heard what could only be described as a ‘Whoosh’ and then an almighty blast. One of the Secret Service agents still on the ground shouted ‘MISSILE!’ but he spoke only after the event.
Armitage watched in horror, open-mouthed and frozen in-place, as Cheney’s helicopter spun uncontrollably towards the ground with smoke pouring from it.
The Sea Knight disappeared from view and then there was an enormous blast.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:18:40 GMT
Thirty–Five – Sabotage
March 22nd 1990 Kraków, Kraków Voivodeship, People’s Republic of Poland
The war came to Kraków this morning in a series of explosions, murders and deliberate acts of sabotage.
The city in the south of Poland, far away from the frontlines or the immediate rear behind those, had been previously untouched ever since the conflict which Poland remained playing a major role in had started at the beginning of last month. Areas of the country away to the west near to East Germany and along the Baltic coast in the north had been bombed by NATO aircraft in selective attacks; so too had Warsaw one night in late February when ‘regime targets’ in the capital were hit by bombs from a radar-invisible aircraft. Eastern, central and southern parts of the country had been unmolested by enemy attacks though despite World War Three raging like it was. There had been an eerie quiet which had come across most of Poland with Polish soldiers, sailors and airmen all deployed to the fighting abroad in Germany and the Baltic Exits and any other young men not in uniform abroad working double shifts in Polish urban factories or dawn-to-dusk in the countryside. Protests had been non-existent and there was a government-directed effort to have the whole country behind the war. Events late last year with the Soviets installing a new government and ridding Poland of what it regarded as counterrevolutionaries rather than letting the Poles do it themselves had worked to keep the country clear of trouble. The lines of communications through the country, which the Soviets valued so highly, had remained opened with only NATO air power to threaten them, not rebellious Poles.
The war had been going terribly for the Poles since the very start. Their naval and naval air forces had taken crippling losses in the fighting in the Danish Straits and the Polish Army’s marine brigade had been defeated in trying to assist the Soviets in taking Zealand before having to finally surrender when cut off. Three Polish field armies, two of regular soldiers and one of reservists, had entered the fighting in West Germany with almost all of them now either dead, prisoner or cut off ready to soon be in either the first or second categories; Polish paratroopers had been used piecemeal in the fighting in West Germany too and been wasted in that. Polish aircraft had been shot out of the sky despite the bravery of pilots when their technology was shown to be lacking in the face of NATO’s. The whole of the Polish military deployed outside of the country had been wholly subservient to higher commands from Soviet officers who had overseen their destruction.
Almost everyone inside Poland, including the families of those men in uniform who’d gone off to war, had absolutely no idea of the military disaster which had taken place where Polish forces had been lost as they had. The Warsaw Pact was winning the war and defeating German-led Western aggression; there was no concept that NATO had managed to successfully counter-invade East Germany as well as fully controlling the western parts of the Baltic and being inside Czechoslovakia too. This lack of an understanding of the true military situation which would soon start to mean that Poland itself would be threatened if it carried on wasn’t even fully grasped by the Polish government. Even the Politburo was in the dark with co-leaders Czeslaw Kiszczak and Florian Siwicki not having met with them since the last day of January; they knew some of the issues of how the war had turned but only in a general sense.
The KGB had done a very good job of keeping Poland and its people in the dark so as to stop any trouble in the country occurring. They feared rebellion: not just for the short-term effects upon the ongoing war but in the long-term though with a hostile Poland being a threat to the territorial security of the Rodina.
While the KGB had been directing efforts to maintain the silence over the truth and stop Poland rebelling, they couldn’t do everything themselves. Starting before the war and increasing once it had started, the KGB had thoroughly co-opted the Polish military intelligence service (Wojskowa Służba Wewnętrzna – WSW) to assist them. The WSW was trusted by the Soviets far more than other elements of the Polish security services such as the KGB-lite which was the Służba Bezpieczeństwa (SB). The SB hadn’t had the stomach to stop Poland nearly falling into revolution last year before events in East Germany had changed everything and then couldn’t effectively act against Polish counter-revolutionaries: the WSW had been the Soviet’s on-hand help with that and everything which came afterwards. Small but effective, this trusted Polish organisation had been used extensively beyond its peacetime scope and away from military-related tasks.
Naturally, they knew everything that was going on, the truth behind the lies yet the KGB had believed that the WSW was fully under their control…
Crossing over the Vistula River inside Kraków were two major railway bridges. These were part of the extensive rail network which ran across southern Poland connecting East Germany with the Soviet Union. NATO had attacked the rail links further west but freight trains had been running day and night over the bridges here in Kraków. At dawn this morning, there were a series of small explosions which brought down both bridges. Demolition charges placed in perfect positions by experts in their field were set off after being recently placed inside the bridge supports. The controlled blasts did their job and down came the bridges.
Moments later, the KGB office in Kraków – a nondescript location where any Pole who set foot inside wasn’t seen again – went up in flames in a carefully-designed act of arson. The KGB commander himself, already on his way there to start work early as was his routine, was killed when his staff car was blown up by a bomb just after it started moving. Several other KGB staff, including those who worked with the WSW in intimidating the local authorities, were butchered in their beds using garrotes and knives.
An armaments factory established on the edge of the city, where Polish workers were present for sixteen hours a day making shells and bullets to fuel the war in East Germany, had a KGB guard posting during the night alongside so-called volunteers who were Poles themselves. That KGB man was found supposedly drunk and passed out by his relief just before the workers showed up: the second KGB man lifted his comrade up and away from the bottle of spilt vodka to expose a live grenade. The small blast took his life and ruined the evidence of how the first man had been killed. This odd occurrence was quickly realized for what it was when it was discovered that during the night someone had sent the Polish paramilitary guards away and there had been extensive sabotage undertaken all across the factory making any work there impossible. No one was making weaponry here for some time.
The destruction of the vital railway bridges, the attack on the KGB headquarters & their top people and the sabotage at the armaments factory were the main attacks. Smaller actions took place too though. There were killings of other low-level Soviet military personnel involved in transport support for the railways. When a westbound train was halted due to the bridges over the Vistula being blown, the freight aboard – armoured vehicles mainly as well as food supplies for Soviet soldiers fighting on the frontlines – was damaged and lost as a fire spread down the train from multiple sources. Telecommunications across the city were knocked out, those used by both KGB and Polish forces, as relay towers for radios and switchboards for landlines wouldn’t work: they had been expertly wrecked. The Soviets were unable to order Polish reaction troops from local semi-paramilitary forces to respond to incidents and couldn’t talk to each other either… plus their commander was dead too in that car bomb attack.
When it all stopped, when the sudden violence came to an end, those left tried to take stock of what had happened.
KGB personnel from outside of Kraków came into the city to investigate the deaths of so many of their people and the wider events too where the military uses of Kraków had been attacked. They wanted to know what had gone on exactly and who was behind it.
What was the objective of these localised attacks and who had allowed them to happen?
Was this the sign of things to come here and elsewhere or was this just a one-off?
Where were the people who had done this and who had helped them?
The KGB turned to the WSW for assistance. They were not stupid and wouldn’t blindly act on everything the Poles told them, for they were Poles after all, but they needed their help and the WSW was believed to be fully under control as an organisation even if there was a suspicion that some members of it would be sympathetic to the aims of their countrymen. The WSW was quick to aid the KGB and their speedy work identified those who might have been involved for interrogation, some weapons were found too along with plans for further attacks.
Questions remained to be answered though and there remained work to be done. The KGB would dig deeper and deeper, rooting out the conspiracy to act against it and its interests all the while aided by the WSW full of Poles which they didn’t fully trust but needed help from. That lack of complete confidence in the Poles went alongside a belief that those spooks might only be covering up some of what had happened due to the actions of individuals within – who the KGB would get around to dealing with in time – the organisation in protecting their fellow countrymen out of misguided nationalism.
As said, the KGB wasn’t stupid. However, they weren’t seeing the full picture. As the cliché went: they couldn’t see the forest for the trees. It wasn’t individuals acting on their own and looking the other way who they should have doubted, but the whole organisation. The WSW had conducted the whole operation in Kraków. They had done what they had as a test and also gotten rid of domestic enemies afterwards when identifying suspects for the KGB to arrest. These were people who knew the truth of how the war was going and how Poland was being treated by foreign occupiers. They were patient and determined. They were cunning and were regarded by the KGB as being harmless overall.
The WSW was now to bide its time. A waiting game was underway where when they were ready, they would strike again. When that occurred, Kraków would be nothing in comparison.
March 22nd 1990 Aurach am Hongar, Oberösterreich, Austria
Austrian home guard soldiers were brave freedom fighters who were fighting for the liberation of their country from a harsh foreign occupation. They were battling against the odds and using every advantage they could find to fight the enemy on their soil. Their heroic and valiant efforts were assisting the NATO and Austrian regular forces moving forward through the country and liberating territory which the militia had made impossible for the Soviets and Hungarians to hold. These were patriots and they should be held in awe.
Major Petraeus had heard the propaganda lines repeated often enough. He had seen the militia in action and knew that they were very capable. They were brave, they were patriotic and they were doing a very good job. The advances being made north and east through central parts of Austria and defeating the occupier would have been far costlier to have done without the actions of the home guard. They attacked the enemy in the rear but also performed reconnaissance and sabotage missions too; the latter included hitting fuel pipelines laid across Austria aboveground bringing in supplies for the occupiers from Czechoslovakia and Hungary. These were men who volunteered for the home guard in peacetime and when Austrian military forces had been mobilised right on the eve of war – which hadn’t done most of them very good apart from those in the western part of the country – these men had answered the call. The militia kept their personal weapons at home and reported to local stations when their country was invaded; they had fought on after being cut off and not surrendered like a large portion of Austria’s regular military units (those in the east especially) had in averse strategic situations.
He had full respect for the militia as a whole and almost all of those who served within Austria’s home guard. Almost all of them…
There was the sad truth though that not all of them were good people. The organisation appeared to have attracted far too many people of dubious personal character. Even then, many of those had done their duty for their country. Some hadn’t though and Petraeus had nothing but scorn for them. There were some who were Neo-Nazis and others criminals who acted during this war as if they had been given free rein to terrorize their own people. Murder, rape and organised thievery had occurred. There had been a couple of recent instances too which had gotten Petraeus’ attention as they had become known to the 173d Airborne Brigade whose operations staff he remained serving on. One of those militiamen had sexually assaulted an already abused teenage girl (Soviet troops had been doing what they had done in 1945 again in 1990) and been caught by a soldier with 3/325 INF: he’d been given a beating by that airborne trooper plus his squad mates. The civilian was a volunteer in military service and was subject to the rules of law so regular Austrian units attached to the Spanish I Corps (like the 173d Brigade was) had taken him into custody with their military police. Then there had been another militiaman who’d shouted a racial insult at one of the African-American soldiers serving with the brigade’s assigned logistics unit: once again, the offending man was mobbed by US servicemen and given a beating for his big mouth before being rescued by national guardsmen from Missouri’s 1138th Military Police Company who were here in Austria and took him away.
These had been rare events and had been dealt with effectively but had left a sour taste in the mouths of many including Petraeus. For far too long, the home guard troops had been doing their own thing with no higher supervision and had no discipline. The true colours of some of them were shown and they let down all those who served with them with distinction. Overnight and through this morning, Austrian militia had been instrumental in opening the way for the 173d Brigade and the Spanish 3rd Mechanised Infantry Division to move up Autobahn-1 through the enemy. Austrians had been all over the Soviet’s rear and helped to collapse the flank of their Fourteenth Guards Army. They were going to be surrounded as this supporting attack and the main attack (towards Vöcklabruck) with the rest of the corps involved would push them against the Inn River to the northwest which the border with West Germany ran, where the French IV Alpine Corps had moved to after coming up from western Austria. The whole of the rear was about to be opened up as NATO troops drove towards the Danube Valley and Linz in the distance. American, Spanish, Portuguese and Austrian troops were all fighting with the Spanish I Corps and taking part in this with success being gained.
Here at brigade headquarters, Petraeus was serving as the assistant operations officer on a staff of men like him who had been plucked from various pre-war and early war roles to join this wartime formation. All of them were keen and eager to get on with the job while there was also the unspoken knowledge that the postings here would do their careers good in the long run. The 173d Brigade was soon to be joined by more arriving national guardsmen, these with the 116th Cavalry Brigade, though the Spanish I Corps along with the higher command which was the South–Western Army Group (SOUWESTAG) was in the main a European-NATO force with few Americans present. A forward advance was being maintained despite enemy efforts to slow them up and now the breakthrough had come: they were moving down off the high ground and towards lower ground. The Spanish had plenty of tanks and tracked armoured vehicles with them and so did the incoming national guardsmen from Idaho, Oregon and Washington. Getting out of the Alps and onto more open ground, behind the Soviets, was the ultimate objective.
Petraeus had seen the same maps as those above him in the chain of command had: after Linz there was Vienna and Bratislava too if the advance in the coming weeks went the way he (admittedly lower down) believed it would.
In the command post this afternoon, he heard the reports come in that the crossroads at Neudorf had been taken and the Spanish were rolling forwards. They’d gone through a Soviet blocking position established and didn’t need the assistance which the 173d Brigade had been ready to provide in pursuing the beaten enemy afterwards to stop them setting up new positions on the flank. The Fourteenth Guards Army was collapsing everywhere and their men were running in panic at many times rather than falling back in order to defend somewhere else. His superior was working with the brigade commander now in making sure that the brigade followed closely behind the Spanish though for there would come a time that eventually they would need to see action.
Petraeus spoke with his colleague who served as the assistant intelligence officer and asked about how the liaisons were going with local Austrian militia: the ones who behaved themselves, not the very few bad apples. He was told that their intelligence was spot on when it came to where the Soviets could be found. It had been just the case when near Salzburg where the 173d Brigade had been involved in the investing of that occupied city before handing it over to be besieged with occupiers within by Austrian forces: what information gained locally on the ground was always top notch in the tactical sense. There had come air reconnaissance, signals intelligence and information coming from Hungarian deserters who didn’t want to join the rest of the defenders (Salzburg had been ‘leaky’ before final investiture) yet what those on the ground with local knowledge had to say had been of great significance.
Those few unfortunate incidents which Petraeus had heard about weren’t widespread and thankfully hadn’t coloured the whole of the Austrian home guard in a negative light. The US Marines in the south had been using the term ‘Adolf-land’ to describe the country but when Austria was thought about pre-war the image of Arnold Schwarzenegger came to mind. This was seen as a brave little country still fighting even when previously nearly overwhelmed in an unprovoked invasion. Petraeus knew that the propaganda war was still being won with those here to fight having high morale. As to their opponents and theirs, he had seen and heard some of the reports from prisoners and deserters. The Hungarians certainly didn’t want to fight any more and even many of the Soviets, indoctrinated as they were when told they were fighting ‘German-Austrians, captured hadn’t been as hardened in their outlook as expected. There had been some talk of how those who were not ethnic Russians were rather displeased about the pro-Russian propaganda being imposed from above recently through the entire Soviet military deployed abroad… when many weren’t Russian at all but Ukrainian, from the Baltic Republics, from across the Caucasus and Central Asia.
His mind had wandered to what that all meant. It was far above his pay grade and he only knew what he did from observations at a lower level yet it had occurred to Petraeus that while NATO was doing everything possible to broadcast the right message to its personnel and having that get through, someone on the other side was doing the opposite and failing in their attempt. It was in an odd way a seeming sabotage of the war effort from above.
Which was all very odd indeed.
March 22nd 1990 Sirbis, Thüringen, East Germany
E Troop, 2–2 Cav’ had set up a temporary laager outside of the village of Sirbis. Captain McMaster had arranged his company-sized armoured reconnaissance formation in a defensive position tonight while the time was taken to refuel and rearm while waiting to move forward again. The wagons had been circled, literally, and sentries posted to watch for danger which could come from any direction.
With the gun barrels of the Abrams’ and the Bradleys pointed outwards along with the rifles of several dismounts, it might have seemed to outsiders like this was all over the top. McMaster’s parent squadron and the 2d Cavalry Regiment too were all over the wider area along with the US VII Corps: tens of thousands of US soldiers were spread throughout eastern Thüringen. The enemy had been defeated in open battle and what Soviet troops had managed to escape pushed far away. Where the US Army had fought on the battlefields of the German countryside they hadn’t lost an engagement in clashes between mechanised armies.
However, there remained dangers everywhere with enemy forces still active.
Only part of the Soviet Fifth Guards Army – which McMaster had been told was a reserve formation created from mobilised units from across the southern Ukraine – had been defeated with two of its combat divisions eliminated in open battles. Another two divisions had made a desperate retreat over the White Elster River and running fast for the edges of Saxony to the east with air power harassing them and McMaster soon to join others in chasing after them. Those defeated elements of that field army had had their divisions, regiments, battalions and companies broken apart with frontlines smashed and their rears ripped open. This had been a fantastic achievement and a clear victory. Yet, many small detachments, even individual men, remained with access to weapons and were spread over the wider area which the US Army held here. Many were quite content to avoid capture or death but others weren’t. Uncoordinated enemy forces were everywhere with standing orders to attack the Americans wherever possible being followed by those who remembered their duty and weren’t running. Tanks and armoured vehicles were involved in this yet they had been easier to spot coming, and thus engage first, than men on foot with man-portable heavy weapons along with their rifles.
E Troop had fought in several major engagements during the day as they had cut a path through the enemy’s flank and led the way for a brigade of the 1st Armored Division to charge forward to reach the river south of the town of Gera. McMaster’s command had taken the loss of five men when their Bradley had been hit by fire from a T-55 tank – an opponent which had been hidden and effectively sniped at E Troop with its cannon – but elsewhere been lucky in taking no more casualties when fighting organised resistance. Apaches supporting the Cav’ from above and the long range of their own cannons which the M-1A1 version of the Abrams mounted had made sure that no fair fights had occurred where losses could be taken. In contrast, after active combat had taken place one of the Abrams had been hit from behind by an anti-tank missile fired by dismounted attackers and damaged beyond repair: thankfully all four crewmen were okay even though a bit shaken up. Worse had happened though with one of the M-106 self-propelled mortar carriers when it was hit by two, maybe even three RPG rounds and it blew up (ammunition too) killing four crewmen and badly wounding the other pair.
Those attacks had come earlier today when McMaster had halted his command at a necessary time to wait for the gunships up ahead to do their work. He had had men watching all about ready for an ambush because he had listened when back in Bavaria to the regimental briefings as to what was to be expected here in East Germany. The unfriendly population (to put it mildly: the East Germans weren’t eager to be ‘freed from oppression’) ready to fight for their country was one thing, more had been the intelligence pointing to the enemy ready to lay in wait and let the fighting pass them by before attacking from behind. This had occurred before today and McMaster’s men had defeated earlier attempts. The successful strikes today that hurt E Troop had got through though. Maybe his men had been too confident, maybe they had been tired. Maybe the Soviets had just been lucky. Either way, McMaster was doing all that he could to stop that happening again.
The laager position where a rectangle-shaped position was held with the armoured vehicles and guns pointing outwards manned by men who had their attention focused was something out of the Wild West: circling the wagons had been done then and was being done with the modern-day steel wagons he commanded. Everyone had got the message now that they couldn’t take their eye off the ball especially since they had seen the deadly effects for themselves of one of those enemy attacks.
Anyone thinking that E Troop was again an opportune target for another attack would be sorely wrong…
McMaster had orders from the squadron S-3 to stage here near Sirbis and to wait here. The river south of Gera was being crossed by the 1st Armored Division with other Cav’ units ready to plunge forward once the White Elster was no longer a defensive position. When the front was broken open and avenues of advance started, then new orders would come for E Troop to get moving and scouting the way for follow-on units which would be from the 1st & 3rd Mechanised Infantry Divisions. A resupply column from the regiment’s support squadron would be sent and whatever rest could be gained was allowed though there would be a requirement to be ready to move at short notice.
The 2d lieutenant who turned up with the small convoy of trucks was someone unknown to McMaster. It turned out that he was a reservist mobilised since the start of the war and sent to the war in Europe. He told McMaster of how he had had difficulty getting here and then finding McMaster’s command hidden off-road on the edge of woodland outside of the village. There were questions asked of the logistics officer about how things were at home yet McMaster was disappointed to find that the younger man had left the United States just before the ceasefire in mid-February and even before that had been at Fort Polk in Louisiana the entire time where he had reported to the morning before the war had started. They spoke more of what the lieutenant had seen recently in East Germany when behind the frontlines which McMaster had helped to tear open. There had come enemy action everywhere with far more strikes made than McMaster was aware of. It wasn’t just stragglers from beaten units making those but special forces as well: Soviets and East Germans making commando attacks to kill American soldiers where possible and also commit acts of sabotage in previously cleared areas to slow down the advance from behind. Gunshots, rockets & missiles and explosive blasts had been used all over the place to cause many incidents of chaos. Military police units, even beefed up before Eastern Storm had started, had been run all over the place and elements of the beat-up 29th Light Infantry Division had been called in to assist them. The lieutenant had been escorted by those national guardsmen from Maryland and Virginia several times and the escort who came with him now was a Virginia-manned unit.
The resupply consisted of more than just ammunition and fuel. Bottled water, food rations and supplies for E Troop’s medics came. There were a few spare parts needed to fix issues with the tanks, armored scout vehicles and the few support vehicles which McMaster had. Those of his men not on watch were working to aid those with the resupply convoy in getting the supplies unloaded and do a little maintenance work too.
When done, the trucks set off again. The lieutenant and his supply-men departed escorted by their well-armed guards who moved in HMMWVs mounting machine guns and grenade-launchers. McMaster watched them go and went back to his command track. His own Bradley – the M-3A1 variant outfitted with Troop-level radios – was in the centre of the laager and he checked with his first sergeant on whether there had been incoming messages while he was out overseeing the resupply. There had been nothing important which had come in over the squadron radio net he was told apart from a warning over enemy air activity in the form of helicopters off to the north which the regimental air defence battery had been aiming to engage but who had escaped the attention of their Vulcan anti-aircraft guns. McMaster confirmed that E Troop had men with Stingers ready and then afterwards got ready to start his rounds talking with his platoon commanders. Whilst they were all waiting here for new orders, he had some issues to address with them and now there was time to do that. Before he left, he was told by his senior enlisted man that some of the Abrams’ crews had been decorating their tanks again with new comments painted on the barrels of the 120mm cannons.
‘Berlin or Bust’
‘Hello Poland’
‘Moscow, Motherf****r’
McMaster was a troop commander far down the chain-of-command. He had no idea of war objectives beyond his squadron’s task of working with the rest of the regiment to support the VII Corps operating in the southern part of East Germany. He therefore couldn’t be sure that maybe the tanks crews were foretelling the future. Moscow might be too much, Poland possibly not and Berlin probably if the corps axis of advance changed to the north instead of the east. Either way, that was for the future.
He was sure that soon enough they would be moving again, on the advance once more, and probably in the early hours where the night-fighting capabilities of McMaster’s men would be best put to use, and then he’d find out what lay in the future. Yet before then he was to wait for those instructions. Hyped up and eager to go like everyone else, he couldn’t relax and do nothing so kept himself busy. Soon enough he was sure that the word would come to start moving forward again.
Soon.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:27:00 GMT
Thirty–Six – Risk Versus Reward
March 23rd 1990 Pendock, Worcestershire, western England, Great Britain
General-Major Alexander Ivanovich Lebed was brought in for another interrogation.
The English spooks – ‘British’ they had corrected him before – had their questions again. They wanted to tell them all of the secrets which they believed that he knew. They asked him about this person, that event and certain places. They wanted him to confirm some things and tell him that others weren’t true. They asked about the shootings of freedom fighters – terrorists – in the Netherlands and who had ordered that above him. They made him promises on one hand and issued threats on the other.
They kept telling him to cooperate with them.
As before, Lebed would tell them nothing. He stated after the first question that he was a prisoner of war and had the right to not cooperate with them. After that he said no more to them. Many of his men had been foolish and believed that they had to talk or face death at the hands of their captors, but he understood that the English wouldn’t do that to him. They had their rules and their moral obligations; they wouldn’t even hand him over to the Americans as they had alluded to with the unspoken dire hints of what that would mean for him.
This morning, the interrogation went differently from usual though past the first question – one concerning who were those KGB people in the Netherlands who he had had dealings with – in a rather unexpected manner.
The English spook in-charge laid out a pair of photographs as well as a piece of paper. He turned the photos around after briefly looking at them so that Lebed could see them and told them that they were of his brother Colonel Aleksey Ivanovich Lebed, another Airborne Troops officer. That was his corpse there in the two images and he had been shot by the KGB. The piece of paper was a typed official report on his arrest and execution written by the KGB: it said when and where he had died as well as why and who had ordered him to be shot.
The pictures could easily have been fake. The report could have been a fake. All of them could have been true too.
For a moment, the barest of moments, Lebed had a shortness of breath followed by a feeling of bile rising up in his throat. He breathed in and swallowed hard. His fists tightened and then he relaxed them. His eyes watered but no tears fell.
The English spook had stepped back and Lebed got the feeling that the man had been momentarily alarmed at his reaction. The spook had been worried about violence coming his way and Lebed gained more than a small amount of satisfaction at that. This fool had thought that he would break him with what he had shown him but all he had done was inflame him as Lebed had nearly lost control for a moment.
Lebed looked right at the man before turning over the photographs and the report. He had no interest in studying them. His focus instead was on the man who had brought them here to him so as to cause Lebed grief and personally gain from them. Lebed locked eyes with the man as to show him that he wouldn’t give in.
Yet… behind the front he showed Lebed was scared he was about to do just that.
They sent him out for a late breakfast and then Lebed was taken to see a doctor again. The doctor was supposed to be a non-military volunteer with the Red Cross: another spy as far as Lebed was concerned. He was told that the flu he was suffering from was still non-responsive to medication and asked if he had any idea what it was. Lebed thought that as a doctor surely he should know that rather than asking him! There came the usual comment from the English military officer who was always in the room when the doctor was treating Lebed that it was either a side-effect of inoculations given pre-war to Soviet forces or an unidentified biological weapon as seen in others. Lebed chose not to give his usual response that if it was a biological weapon it would have been one used by NATO.
He hadn’t wanted to converse with the doctor/spy.
When he came back into the interrogation, they waited until he sat down before the pictures and the KGB report were removed from the desk, one which was placed in the middle of the classroom with one chair either side. The second English spook, the young woman, removed them and then went back to her own chair in the corner of the room while slipping them into a file folder. Lebed watched as she handed the first spook another cream-coloured folder and then from that out came more photographs.
Lebed told himself that they weren’t going to show him more pictures of his family members. No, no, they were safe and well…
These were colour photographs and of men standing with a plane behind them. Eight pictures were laid out in front of him and at once he recognised two of the faces. The English spook asked him if he knew who they were and what could Lebed tell him about them. They were KGB men who had been in the Netherlands like he had been, he was told, but had managed to escape to Zagreb in Yugoslavia. They had run away while he and his men had been taken prisoner.
Who were they, the question came again, and why would Lebed protect them when the KGB had murdered his brother like they had?
Lebed didn’t respond. He took his eyes off the photographs and stared at the wall behind the spook ahead of him. On that wall of the classroom were drawings done by the children who would usually be here in this school somewhere in the English countryside. There were hand-drawn pictures of families and houses and trees and animals. There was a chart too of numbers and writing in the Latin Alphabet which Lebed didn’t understand. Of the children, they were long gone and Lebed could only assume that they hadn’t been at school since the start of the war. They weren’t coming back anytime soon due to their school and its grounds being used for what it was now: a prisoner of war camp. The school itself had rooms for questioning and others for offices. In the playgrounds and the playing field there were the wooden huts where men like him were kept; there was too a steel fence all around with razor wire atop. Lebed had seen the armed guards and heard the barking of the dogs. There were twenty to thirty men here, all senior officers like him. He had spoken to only a few in whispered conversations when the guards relaxed their watch – or had they? – and learnt their names. One of them, General-Lieutenant Anatoly Vasilyevich Kvashnin, who’d been the deputy commander of the Netherlands Front, had reminded him that the KGB had been serious with their threats about surrendering: Kvashnin had feared for his wife and children, just as Lebed did.
He’d had been captured in Dordrecht. He hadn’t surrendered. Lebed had begged his captors then to not lie and say in their propaganda that he had surrendered. They had asked why and he had told them: he had been far too talkative when first in custody which he didn’t blame on any personal weakness but due the effects of the knock on the head he had taken there when his command post was overrun. Afterwards, he’d witnessed what the KGB were also capable of more than shooting anyone they wished to: the nuclear blast there in the Netherlands had been their handiwork. Those here with him in England had shared brief stories of the KGB and how they were the enemy more than the English or the Americans, even the Germans.
The English were now saying that they had killed his brother for questioning orders when it came to shooting partisans – women and teenagers – in West Germany. These were the people whom the English spook was asking him to identify for them from pictures taken when they had escaped from the fighting in which he had been captured in and men under his command had died horrible deaths.
Grief was making him think of doing as they wished. The English spook had gotten to him. Lebed knew their game and knew that it was winning him over. He tried to stop himself from thinking that he could gain a measure of revenge on the KGB by telling them what they wanted. But that wasn’t working.
He opened his mouth to speak names even though he had serious worries over the outcome. He couldn’t help himself. Lebed wanted to see them pay for what they had done.
After Lebed had pointed out General-Lieutenant Lebedev and Colonel Putin, the English spook first asked him about the ranks of both men. They were not the pre-war ranks, no? Correct, Lebed replied, they and many others in the KGB all received a promotion before the end came in the Netherlands. Was that an encouragement for them to not surrender? Maybe, Lebed speculated. He was then asked about the others in the pictures. Surely Lebed knew them too?
He repeated what he said: he only knew the KGB commander in the Netherlands and the lieutenant-colonel promoted to colonel who had been acting as a sort-of trouble-shooter for the senior man. Of the others, Lebed didn’t recognise them. If there were more pictures, Lebed might know more names, but not of the others from this aircraft.
Lebed was asked if he was telling the truth. If he was going to cooperate, he should fully cooperate, not pick and choose what he wanted to reveal. The combative, accusational attitude of the English spook was back and Lebed glared at him first before giving him a response. He told him that he was telling the truth about the men he knew and the men he didn’t. How was Lebed every going to see his family again and return home to his country if he kept lying came the reply. Again, Lebed told him that he wasn’t lying: this was all that he knew. Moreover, he added that he didn’t believe he ever would see him family or the Rodina again. What did he mean? Lebed told him that the KGB would never allow the war to be lost in a manner which NATO wanted that would bring about the chance of Lebed going home and not being killed on the suspicion of being a traitor just for being held prisoner. Hadn’t the English spook learnt anything? That wouldn’t happen, not while the KGB had any influence anywhere. Then why was Lebed cooperating? Because, Lebed told the fool, you have made me mad and wanting to get even with the KGB so I have told you all that I know about the men in the photographs.
He added too that it was only the KGB he was turning on, not the rest of the Rodina either. The retort came that if what he was saying about the KGB was true than the KGB was the Rodina now. This time, Lebed had nothing to reply with.
The argument ceased at that point between Lebed and the first spook but the second one spoke up. The young woman got up out of her seat and came over to him. She smiled while Lebed averted his gaze from her ample cleavage… clearly an English trap there! The question was spoken in a classical form of Russian showing a different education in Lebed’s native tongue than that of the first spook with his rather rougher Russian. She asked what was his thinking when it came to risk versus reward in helping them? What did he hope to achieve in comparison to his previously expressed fears? How had he made this judgement? Moreover, what did he mean about the KGB never giving in – could he explain further on this and tell of the KGB’s thinking behind the war? Could Lebed explain why the war had been started because it really didn’t make sense to anyone here in the West?
Lebed opted not to repeat himself on why he had done what he had: he’d already told them that they had made him want revenge and he had given up hope too. As to her question about why the war had started he was a bit thunderstruck at that. The West had fermenting all of the unrest throughout Eastern Europe with the aim of occupying East Germany, Poland, Czechoslovakia, Hungary and the Balkans to further surround the Rodina like they did with their ring of military bases. When that didn’t work, they had killed Gorbachev and marshalled their troops ready to invade Eastern Europe. That was the truth, he knew that was case despite despising the KGB. When explaining, like one would explain something simple to a child, the pair of English spooks gave him incredulous stares.
March 23rd 1990 Hohenschönhausen, East Berlin & Waldsiedlung, Brandenburg, East Germany and Nörvenich Airbase, North Rhine–Westphalia, West Germany
The Stasi facility at Hohenschönhausen lay to the northeast of East Berlin. It was a secretive prison and not somewhere the ordinary East Germans knew anything about. Those who had previously been held there and managed afterwards to leave alive had no idea of where they had been held. There had never been allowed visitors to those imprisoned here. Hohenschönhausen wasn’t on any official maps and there was hardly a big sign outside announcing what was behind the walls.
Intelligence agencies in the West knew about it and there were now NATO helicopters above depositing armed men to seize those inside – prisoners and guards alike – and take them out of here.
It had just gotten dark when the helicopters had come in from the north, this deep inside East Germany though a path cleared of anti-air threats, and launched their assault. There were a few firings of machine guns mounted to some of the helicopters to knock out guard towers, but after from some guards on the ground who had rifles, there was no real defence put up by those here at Hohenschönhausen. The surprise of the attack was paramount. Who would have ever thought that NATO would strike here?
British soldiers (who’d used some of their own but also American helicopters) swarmed all over the place. They had rappelled from hovering helicopters to land atop buildings and also into inner courtyards. Special forces men from 22 SAS and paratroopers from 3 PARA – the latter who’d recently fought in the Netherlands – shot down anyone who wanted to put up a fight and nabbed anyone who didn’t. They smashed through the prison using violence and above all speed. There were Soviet troops in East Berlin they had been told, a brigade of them with tanks and heavy weapons who’d earlier in the war overrun West Berlin, and apparently they were meant to come nowhere near Hohenschönhausen this evening. The East Germans themselves were a different matter and they would have trained men. That assurance on the Soviets might or might not have been true and they didn’t fear East German paramilitary men, yet still they moved as fast as possible to complete their mission. If the enemy reacted fast enough they all knew that they were doomed being this far behind the frontlines.
There were some rather unpleasant sights which the British troops saw and there were a few cases of captives being shot while resisting. Take your own prisoners for intelligence the troops had been told, but don’t let others slow you down: the assault force remembered their rules of engagement and interpreted them as they saw fit.
Prisoners held here were removed from cells and German-speaking SAS men shouted questions at them to get their identities and who were the top Stasi people. There was a lot of confusion and in the darkness not everything was done perfectly with the operation. No former captives were left behind in their cells alive nor in the hospital wing either but some of them had been killed in the crossfire in-places where more than a few Stasi people stood their ground and died surrounded by captives rather than be taken alive.
Pre-mission intelligence had said that only fifty prisoners in cells and the hospital could be expected here. When the shooting stopped and they were to be loaded into the helicopters, thirty-five were brought out along with captives taken numbering eighteen. There were at least a hundred, one hundred and twenty dead bodies left behind including prisoners and prison staff. The British also took out their own dead: nine of them had lost their lives.
The flotilla of helicopters now had to get out of East Berlin and back to the occupied territory away to the west.
The first part of Operation Black Ghost had been a success.
*
The second part of Operation Black Ghost was conducted by the Americans at the exclusive Waldsiedlung residential complex outside of Berlin. Again, it was helicopters that made the assault with Green Berets and Rangers used here.
KGB security troops from their 105th Independent Motorised Rifle Regiment (wholly separate from the Soviet Army’s 6th Independent Guards Motorised Rifle Brigade) which had been stationed at Waldsiedlung had departed only an hour beforehand: pathfinders on the ground had watched them leave and observed the confusion on the part of the very few and under-armed East Germans left behind at that. Still, several helicopters acting as strike escort fired their machine guns and rockets at what little resistance came their way in a bit of an overkill. They had come expecting the worst and had rather liberal free-fire rules for this mission.
The Americans assaulted multiple houses throughout the area. The helicopters dropped off teams of men atop and around several buildings which were the homes of the East German’s political elite. There came some gunfire from East German bodyguards… men who only one magazine of eight rounds for their Makarov-PM pistols. The Green Berets and Rangers used assault rifles and outgunned the surprised East Germans who couldn’t match their firepower. Afterwards, the Americans would learn about the standing orders allowing the bodyguards to have such a shortage of rounds – it had been a Stasi bodyguard who had done the killings here last October – but for now that didn’t matter. They shot their way into certain homes where they were told they could find certain people.
Just as the British found at Hohenschönhausen, cross-fire killed some of those they were here to take out. Some targets were missing too with no one inside the homes they burst into. Still, many of their targets were in place and those were nabbed. Soon they were hooded and bound while escorted to helicopters taking them and the assault force out of here.
Casualties for the Americans had been remarkably light – three dead and four injured – yet on the way out one of the helicopter was downed. The MH-47D was hit by an anti-aircraft gun which poured 57mm high-explosive rounds into it: it crashed in a fireball taking the lives of all five aircrew, eighteen Rangers and three captives with it.
*
Black Ghost was commanded from Nörvenich Airbase in the Rhineland, the big NATO special operations there and far back from the frontlines. The raiding forces used against the Stasi prison on the edges of East Berlin and the homes of the East German leadership had staged from and would return to air-strips inside occupied territory though many prisoners released and captives taken would eventually end up here.
Lt.-General de la Billière (DLB) and Maj.-General Garrison started receiving news of how the raids were going the moment they crossed the frontlines and were kept abreast of the ongoing situation. It was the two of them who had had their staffs plan the raid and whose assets were taking place. Both senior officers from the British Army and the US Army had serious reservations about Black Ghost on many levels, which they had expressed up the chain-of-command as was the right and their duty. Still, it had gone ahead as the wishes of the politicians and intelligence figures came out on top.
One of the latter was here with DLB and Garrison as the news came in that the assault forces were on the way out, including that of the downed American helicopter. US Deputy National Security Adviser Robert Gates was back in Europe again. He had come up to Nörvenich after being with SACEUR earlier in the day done in the Saarland. Gates had listened to Schwarzkopf’s complaints about Black Ghost and then told DLB and Garrison to tell him their concerns too. It had been explained that there was a severe risk of failure with the whole mission where a major loss of lives could occur with the plan to assault targets so deep in enemy territory. Moreover, the assurances come through intelligence means that Gates had refused to reveal that there would be no active Soviet interference had worried them… along with his hints to them that the Soviets themselves had provided all of the intelligence on the places, the defences and who could be found at each site. Gates had explained the judgement when it came to risk versus reward to them though they hadn’t been happy at all when he had explained that the prizes were judged to be worth it at the risk of losing several special forces teams and their associated helicopters plus aircrews.
Yet the mission was a success, a stunning success.
Helicopters arrived back in NATO-held East German territory laden with captives taken and rescued prisoners. Names started coming to Nörvenich as to who they had taken out of enemy control.
From Hohenschönhausen, the British had rescued West German political figures Walter Momper (the mayor of West Berlin) and Bjorn Engholm (the Minister-President of Schleswig-Holstein). Inexplicably, the Stasi had had in their captivity too the Danish politician Anders Fogh Rasmussen: he was junior minister thought dead – alongside Engholm – when Flensburg was atomised in that Soviet nuclear attack breaking the mid-war ceasefire. Some of the East Germans held there by their countrymen included politicians such as Manfred Gerlach, Hans Morrow and Alexander Schalck-Golodkowski – all of whom had appeared to upset the regime – while there were others like the lawyer Wolfgang Vogel known for links with West Germany in exchanges of defectors and the Lutheran pastor Rainer Eppelmann who had bravely led domestic opposition in the churches. No NATO senior military officers or spooks who’d been in West Berlin when the city fell were found there as had been the hope though.
Neither General Secretary Friedrich Dickel, Defence Minister Heinz Kessler nor Minister of State Security (Stasi) Werner Grossmann were at Waldsiedlung: intelligence said that they were at the far more secure Prenden bunker. However, at the residences raided there were others from the East German leadership who hadn’t been in East Berlin for some time now but retained their positions either as ministers or behind the scenes. Chairman of the Council of Ministers (effectively the Prime Minister) Willi Stoph was there and so too was Foreign Minister Oskar Fischer and Interior Minister Lothar Ahrendt. Also present in homes raided were high-level figures such as Peter Florin, Gerald Götting, Kurt Hager, Erhard Krack, Hannelore Mensch, Günter Mittag, Horst Sindermann and the big prize of Günter Schabowski. Many were old men while Mensch was a woman and Mittag was a recent amputee (both legs). East Berlin Mayor Krack was killed in the cross-fire, Hager dropped dead from a heart attack and Ahrendt shot himself rather than be taken prisoner. The Americans wanted Stoph, Fischer and SED party boss Schabowski especially while the rest were regarded as second-tier but taken regardless. Florin – once the President of the UN General Assembly and a big figure in East Germany’s diplomatic relations pre-war – pleaded with the Americans to be left behind so he could lead a coup to topple the regime: one of the Green Berets had shut him up with an accidental whack and he’d been hooded like the rest.
On the crashed helicopter, Mittag in his wheelchair along with a male nurse assigned to him (the Americans had taken him prisoner too for he’d know who Mittag had met with recently) were killed as well as former prime minister and current head of the East German parliament Sindermann. These losses were not regarded as of great importance; the NATO casualties were what would be mourned.
Once the operation was over with an initial debriefs were going on, Gates spoke with DLB and Garrison again. He expressed sorrow for the loss of men under their command but told them that he regarded Black Ghost as a success. The intelligence came from a source called ‘Replay’, nothing more about it than that he could tell them. President Bush and both the leaders of Britain and France had agreed to it despite some objections made along the way. If the bunker at Prenden could have been targeted for a similar raid then it would have been too for there was no need to leave someone in charge in East Germany for war termination negotiations: anything like that would be done with the Soviets not the East Germans.
East Germany was being overrun. Eastern Storm called for a stop-line on the Oder-Neisse. He reminded them that East Germany had already been heavily-targeted with regime targets in East Berlin hit – the Stasi headquarters at Lichtenberg along with the buildings housing the State Council, the Foreign Ministry, the Parliament and the SED headquarters; plus Soviet targets in East Berlin with their embassy and the KGB’s Karlshorst facility – and there was no concern about leaving any institution there left to settle and end to the conflict inside East Germany with. From now on, it was people targets instead of buildings.
There was much more about Black Ghost which Gates didn’t say to the two special forces commanders. He didn’t tell them the whole details of the package of goodies which Replay – Rainbow, Redbeard, Reunite etc., all the same source – had recently arranged to have transferred to the CIA when it came to matters of strategic national intelligence. In relation to Black Ghost he had said who could be found and where plus that the defending Soviet forces at both the prison and the residential complex would leave at a certain time so that only weak East German forces would be left behind.
But Replay wanted something in exchange this time. It wasn’t directly related to these two raids but far bigger. Gates hadn’t gone any further forward than the Rhineland because of the knowledge in his head concerning that and other matters due to the danger that maybe he could accidently end up in enemy hands and be forced to reveal that. What the CIA’s intelligence source wanted was something under discussion so far only among the highest reaches of the US Government back home. The Europeans had no idea and they damn well would be rather mad if they knew it was even being considered. The risk versus reward there was again tilted a favourable way and it would end the war…
…but the cost would be immeasurably expensive.
March 23rd 1990 Meiningen, Thüringen, East Germany
The best thing would have been to only fight in daytime where there was enough light to not just see the enemy to be engaged but also to have a clear view of the terrain.
Oh, how Brigadier-General Roméo Dallaire would have been pleased if that had been the case!
Unfortunately, this was war and wishes like that were for another time and another place. There were still enemy forces all across the area around the occupied town of Meiningen and through the nearby Thüringenwald. They weren’t being kept back in their defensive positions at night by their own commanders and were sent out of their hiding spots to engage the Canadian troops under Dallaire’s command. Soviet regulars and reservists along with East German reservists and paramilitaries took the opportunity to make attacks in the darkness and also try to escape from where they were. These men were all cut off at the operational level as most of the US Seventh Army had struck deep into Thüringen behind the Thüringenwald but on a tactical level there was still plenty of room for them to operate in. Dallaire’s 5th Mechanised Brigade–Group and the rest of the 1st Infantry Division was spread far too thin over a large area to control. The areas already under occupation were expanding daily but even then, with so few troops, there were gaps which the enemy were making use of. Dallaire had explained all this to his divisional commander who had passed that up the chain-of-command to the US VII Corps (which the Canadians still reported to despite the growing geographical gap and a different mission for those American units) but for now there wasn’t much else available.
Keep the enemy pinned down, the word came back down, and unable to escape any deeper into East Germany.
Dallaire could have stamped his feet and whined, but he got on with the job instead. Everyone else – the 3rd Infantry & 4th Mechanised Brigade–Group’s plus divisional-level assets – were having a tough time too. The enemy was being crushed slowly and they were going to be defeated in the end: for now there were orders to follow as everyone did their bit.
The town of Meiningen had fallen yesterday after a bitter fight. There had been a false surrender which had taken place, something which Dallaire had been warned about before coming into East Germany but it had still been pulled off by the bad guys. A supposed East German reserve officer with what remained of their 10th Motorised Rifle Division (a regiment from that formation had been around the town) had been in contact with his brigade headquarters and offered an unconditional ceasefire. Dallaire had been weary over such an easy victory when evidence pointed to the enemy been well-positioned in the town yet he was pushed by his divisional headquarters and his own eagerness to get on with it. The mistake had been costly: there had been an ambush with Soviet forces ready and waiting. They hadn’t been as clever as they thought though and Dallaire’s soldiers had been fighting long enough now to not be as foolish as he was when seeing things with their own eyes. The ambush had been turned on the ambushers and a fierce fight had erupted. Dallaire had considered withdrawing but the enemy had been on the run and caught unawares for such a fightback. Meiningen had been taken though with far more casualties than Dallaire would have liked to have seen.
Several senior East Germans and Soviets, including that Stasi man pretending to be a military officer, had paid the price for what they had done. They had broken the recognised rules of law and faced a battlefield punishment: a firing squad had followed a court martial.
From this town, the 5th Mechanised Brigade–Group was spread out across the countryside. The main road coming up from Bavaria was guarded and so were key-points throughout the area. Dallaire had his headquarters here for now along with some brigade assets while the battalions under his command – merged into mixed units of infantry, armour, engineers and support troops – were in other locations away to the northeast and the east. Across there was the forested series of high hills which was the Thüringenwald. Enemy forces had been pushed back into that cover when not caught outside and engaged within too along the edges. The 4th Mechanised Brigade–Group was to the north of where Dallaire had his men while the 3rd Infantry Brigade–Group was to the southeast.
All Canadian soldiers involved were tired and weary. The professional, reservists and Militia alike had fought hard to get into East Germany after clearing the last occupied areas down in Bavaria and there was an awareness that the war was being won elsewhere and not here. It was a struggle to keep morale up. Dallaire knew that the men weren’t ready to give in but they weren’t about to see themselves die for no reason either. His junior officers allowed fire support to be called in more times than was necessary rather than have the men advance forward and take more casualties when falling bombs and shells would do the job. That slowed things down a lot yet the willingness to sacrifice lives for enemy territory behind the lines was judged not great enough. The thinking on the risk versus reward factor when it came to that was allowed by Dallaire: his men had been through enough already in this long war. He didn’t want his men to die for no reason and there was always the knowledge that there could come the need to move later elsewhere into fights were the enemy would be stronger and the effort needed to be increased, which couldn’t be done if too many men were killed here.
Tonight, as Dallaire had his men out on patrol in some places and on watch elsewhere, he was in his command post listening to incoming reports coming up from the battalion task-groups out near the frontlines. In the darkness and in the rain, there was activity in many locations.
2 R22R (second battalion, Royal 22e Regiment) reported in that one of their patrols had been attacked with hidden snipers and they had shot back before trying to chase the enemy. A minefield had been run into and losses taken. Another lure had been laid and a rifle squad had walked right into it… but they were fast getting their own back.
3 R22R (third battalion, Royal 22e Regiment) had several patrols out and one of them had come across an American pilot making his way south; he had pointed out an enemy position nearby too which he avoided but one the soldiers who rescued him move to attack. Another nabbed themselves an unarmed, wounded Soviet straggler in a bad way who died soon after capture from his injuries.
1 FSL (first battalion, Les Fusiliers du St.-Laurent) had men out too yet their main activity of the night was when the Militia soldiers faced an attempted attack at one of their company bases instead of combat in the field. A sentry was killed with another wounded as he raised the alarm for that attempt to be fought off and the assault force of Soviets killed and captured.
2 RCR (second battalion, Royal Canadian Regiment) had a patrol of theirs come across a group of civilians moving southwards who were seeking aid. The call came in that they had dozens of East Germans in a bedraggled state located and out in the open exposed to the elements.
From out of here, a RCD (Royal Canadian Dragoons) patrol had run into a trio of East German paramilitary deserters who gave themselves up when located. They were checked very carefully for hidden weapons and treated with extreme care when brought back into the RCD base camp.
Dallaire ordered those civilians, who were in effect refugees in their own country now, brought towards Meiningen. They were women, children and some elderly people he heard – no military-aged men – who needed food, shelter and medical care. Meiningen was the centre at the moment for all such people which his brigade came across: East Germans fleeing the fighting. They were generally always in a bad state after coming from wherever their homes were and aiming to either walk west or south where they believed that safety would await them. They had left the fortified areas where East German and Soviet military units were encamped and under occasional air and artillery attack. In leaving their homes, they faced many risks starting from punishment when caught fleeing to the elements to being caught in cross-fire when in the open to the dangers of mines & unexploded ordnance & remnants of persistent chemical weapons. Sometimes there would be men in civilian clothes on their own or within groups of refugees: each time it was found that they were East German deserters who feared that when NATO troops discovered their identity they would be shot out of hand.
Many, many East Germans feared such a fate, deserters and civilians alike. They believed that Dallaire’s Canadian troops were Americans first of all and when told they were Canadians that didn’t mean any difference to them as they thought both were the same (how outrageous!) and would shoot them anyway. They had been told that NATO had been massacring civilians since the war begun and while choosing to flee where they had been there was still a fear that it might happen to them. Dallaire had questioned his military intelligence people over why then they had left where they had been to be told that those civilians believed NATO might kill them when they fled but they were sure they would die if they had stayed in-place.
There were a lot of civilians now as refugees too. The 5th Mechanised Brigade–Group had been coming across them since Dallaire had moved his command into East Germany. They were eventually sent south and down into Bavaria where a big effort was underway to prepare for more of them to come that way. They couldn’t be stopped by the East Germans and the Soviets nor NATO and so it wasn’t tried by the latter for the effort would be wasted. They were kept off the roads used as supply routes and directed towards camps run by the Red Cross and West German volunteers. A major watch would be put upon them in case there were Stasi sleeper agents among them: that had happened before. In addition, military intelligence people would talk with them to see if there was anything useful they might know as well.
Furthermore, when this latest group arrived in Meiningen Dallaire issued an order that they at once go through medical checks at the civilian aid post set up here: his divisional commander had reminded him earlier this evening that checks for what was being called ‘German Flu’ took place all the time from those coming out of enemy-held territory. Neither he nor his men had been told what German Flu was, though there were plenty of rumours.
Dallaire believed that it had to be the effects of a biological weapon... ours or theirs.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:30:42 GMT
Thirty–Seven – Walking Wounded
March 24th 1990 The Fläming Heath, on the edges of Sachsen-Anhalt & Brandenburg, East Germany
Berlin lay away to the northeast. No one had said officially that that was where they were going, but British troops advancing through East Germany knew that was where they would be sent eventually.
They were moving east today, southeast even, and seemingly away from that city that had to be the ultimate goal of Eastern Storm. Senior officers had been told that there was a need to secure access to a new main supply route and link up with the French who were also part of their army group, plus give the Americans some room to move around their own supply links too, but that hadn’t been fed all the way down to the fighting men and officers.
Need-to-know was the reason though, nothing more.
Berlin was where the overall higher strategic plan was for the British to go eventually… just like the Americans, the French and other NATO troops including West Germans aiming to liberate their historical capital too. For now though, the direction which the British forces on the right bank of the Elbe were moving was eastwards and away from a direct approach upon Berlin as they had previously been moving in when on the other side of the Elbe.
The new commander of the British 3rd Armoured Division, Major-General Michael Rose, was with his command column and far away now from the many crossing sites over the Elbe near Schönebeck. The Iron Division had gone over the river in the early hours and trailing behind the rest of the British I Corps: the 1st Armoured Division had gone first with the 1st Panzer Division following them and then Rose’s new command bringing up the rear. All three formations had punched through a defensive line on that river after darting to the south of Magdeburg across the countryside and hitting East German forces on the Elbe unexpectedly in the darkness. Rose hadn’t wanted to be last in-line, neither had the men now under his command. The Iron Division was in a battered and bloody state though including the recent loss of its divisional commander and important elements of the command staff due to a surprise Scud barrage. Rose’s predecessor was alive and injured only as what was categorized as ‘walking wounded’ but it was judged (over his furious objections) that he was unable to carry on with his duty: a request had been made by the corps commander personally, so Rose had been told anyway, for him to come across from over the other side of the IGB from his own command and take over. The division’s deputy, already a colonel serving as an acting brigadier after replacing another man in that position, had been killed and there was a need identified for a well-experienced combat officer not wholly needed in his current posting. Rose’s 2nd Infantry Division had recently moved from its (costly) victory in the Netherlands to work with the rest of the Allied II Corps – assigned to assist the 4th Armoured Division who didn’t come into East Germany – in squeezing the Hannover Salient. There was no rush there to do that as the enemy were effectively cut off and that had meant a stripping of many assets away to fight here before his own transfer. He had followed his orders and made the move.
Again going cross-country, this time on improvised routes which the Soviets had built to avoid roads (targets for air strikes) themselves, Rose was talking his new command to Zerbst. That town and crossroads on the River Nuthe was already held by 1st Armoured Division units he was told and afterwards the plan at the moment was to move towards Rosslau afterwards. The Bavarian-Berlin highway was further ahead of there where Rose was told was the corps objective, one which the plan was to reach before the French coming up from the south: the French had two major rivers to cross in addition to avoiding the urban areas around first Halle then Dessau. This whole move meant avoiding the Fläming Heath. Rose had asked Lt.-General Guthrie why that was the case – what was there worth avoiding – and told that across that rural stretch of East German countryside was a massive improvised defensive position. The Americans, following their own highway, and then the British-French force would come at that from several directions all at once. The trenches, anti-tank ditches, minefields and dug-in defenders were twenty odd miles deep. Air power was blasting them already and there were massive gas attacks under way. When NATO forces were positioned to hit it, the last organised opposition outside Berlin, then the heath would be moved against through their desired avenues of attack. The decision on this had been made at the very top of the chain of command.
Rose had seen the maps, saw it made military sense, and so had no objection. To go east were his orders though explanations weren’t needed to be given at the current time for that to those lower down. His focus as his command vehicle rumbled across the well-worn gravel track which cut right though fields and light woodland was getting the Iron Division into position for the upcoming set-piece attack. Reports came in on movements – including some officers getting themselves and their units lost in unknown territory – and also the combat effectiveness too of the Iron Division. They had fought long and hard, just like his old command, and there were shortages biting now in manpower and equipment worse than before. Guthrie had mentioned that politicians back home were hoping that the war would end soon for there would come an eventual point where the British Army would actually run out of men and equipment making further major offensive operations impossible.
Rose hoped to be in Berlin long before then.
Guardsman Glenn Haughton shouted to his sergeant that there were a pair, no, a trio of civilians coming towards them. The response came that he better hurry up and get back to the Warrior so they could move on after this short stop to dismount and engage enemy troops: the armoured vehicle crew was ready to move on with the rest of the 1 GREN GDS (first battalion, the Grenadier Guards) battle-group.
But the civilians were coming this way!
The sergeant brought over several other men and he had a look too.
Haughton kept his rifle pointed at the two men and one woman. Lessons had been learnt some time ago, very early in the war, that civilians, even supposedly friendly ones, weren’t always what they appeared to be. Several of his buddies plus a couple of new additions (much older men who’d left active service years ago) all were doing the same at the sergeant’s direction.
One of the latter asked aloud what the civilians were holding in their hands as they walked closer. The sergeant firmly told everyone to pay attention and not chatter. Keep your eyes left and right, he said, and watch for some sort of trap coming from the flanks. Haughton had fellow guardsmen either side of him with rifles pointing outwards so he had the three civilians he had seen covered. He saw what they were holding, some of those million odd pamphlets dropped over East Germany. They were more than just propaganda – your regime are the bad guys, don’t fight for the Russians etc. – but also safe-conduct passes for East German soldiers and paramilitaries.
One of the corporals called out to the trio ahead in German. They stopped in their tracks, raised their hands higher and called out something back. Haughton’s German was as good as his French: non-existent. He took a better look at them when they stopped, now twenty yards off. The two men were in their mid-to-late twenties… maybe. Military-aged men now in workmen’s clothes with one stumbling along as if he was a walking wounded casualty of a fight somewhere. The woman was older, dressed not right to be walking in the countryside in this weather, and coughing.
German Flu, called out one of the other guardsmen.
The sergeant told the offending man to shut up. That was a new term which Haughton and everyone else had only just started hearing for ill enemy soldiers and civilians who seemed like they had the flu but didn’t. You couldn’t catch it, everyone had been told, and it wasn’t influenza. And, the word coming down was that no one was use that term.
More shouts had the civilians lay down on the ground, in the wet mud this morning, and stay there. The sergeant waited until they did that and then sent some of the guardsmen forward to check them out.
Haughton wasn’t told to move forward and search them for weapons. He stayed where he was with his rifle at the ready. He was happy with that for it meant keeping back from the germs that woman had.
Colonel Gerald Berragan listened to the radio as his brigade commander – Brigadier Hammerbeck leading the 4th Armoured Brigade – tore into one of the battalion commanders. How could he get his battle-group (a mixed force of infantry and armour units) lost when given maps and simple instructions? Did he even know where he was now? Was he still in East Germany or had he made it down to Austria yet?
Berragan, the brigade chief-of-staff, winced as his usually cool commander lost his temper. This was turning out to be a regular occurrence now with the third battalion-sized battle-group of the four under command now getting confused about where they were and where they were going. There was light in the sky and they had good maps, plus compasses too!, Hammerbeck said over the radio, so how had this happened? He told the unfortunate lieutenant-commander on the other end of the link-up that the brigade headquarters column hadn’t gotten lost nor the support elements too. Why was he making the same mistakes as two of his peers when he had surely heard over the brigade command radio network how mad he had been at them too?
There was no more said after that. Hammerbeck cut the connection and contacted another battle-group commander to ask on his progress now: he had found his way after earlier going in the wrong direction? Berragan checked on his own map as it rested in his lap on what was being reported. The major in-command there – his own senior officer had recently been killed – was on the right track now. Rosslau was right up ahead and he was going to do like the tail-end of the 1st Armoured Division ahead and skirt around it heading for the highway just a few more miles ahead.
Had he seen any Frenchmen? Seemingly taken aback by the almost jovial remark, the major replied after a slight pause that no he hadn’t. Berragan smiled to himself, imagining being in that man’s shoes. He had gotten his ear bitten off earlier but now his commander was almost making a joke with him. There wouldn’t be any Frenchmen, their III Corps was far off, and the unofficial race had already been won by the corps’ lead elements.
There was another radio check made with another battle-group and Berragan only partially listened to that as he paid attention to what was going on with the divisional network. He heard another brigade commander report that his advance had been slowed down too by sub-units getting lost when on the move. He knew that it wasn’t the fault of the men Hammerbeck had gotten mad at and was sure too that the brigade commander knew that as well but had just lost his temper. They were deep inside East Germany, far inside a foreign country where perfect maps of the terrain couldn’t be wholly relied upon. There were no local guides yet trusted and any road signs (when roads were being avoided anyway) had long been removed by the East Germans. It was bound to happen.
The men who had been shouted at would get over it when they heard others getting an ear bashing too and only their pride would be damaged. They’d be walking wounded, so to speak, bruised but more than capable of getting on with things. Berragan knew too that they would be more careful with navigation again after this morning too. It was going to be like this all the time when in East Germany and they would have to get used to checking, rechecking and checking again.
But, this was war and nothing was easy.
Gimpys from several FV432s poured rounds into the aircraft wreckage from where there were Soviet or East German troops sheltering behind. The L7A1 GPMGs fired hundreds of 7.62mm bullets into that wreck and all around it through into the trees. There were shouts and screams from the targets of that machine gun fire but also from junior officers and sergeants aboard the infantry carriers to cease fire: enough damage had been done and anyone there beforehand firing was either dead or running. Don’t slow down and deploy dismounts, the call came, because one of the Scimitars from battalion will take care of finishing off that enemy position with its 30mm cannon.
Major Graeme Lamb, commanding B Company in the first battalion of the Queen’s Own Highlanders (1 QOWNHIGH), didn’t interfere with his subordinates. He recognised good work when he heard it. They were remembering their orders to keep moving and only stop when necessary. There had been rifle fire from that enemy position hidden among the ruins of what he overheard was a downed fighter or tactical strike aircraft – Soviet by the looks of it apparently – and no heavy weapons. The infantry carriers didn’t need to be stopped and his men deployed when enemy soldiers were seen running after all that machine gun fire sent at them. The Scimitar would finish off the wreckage too. The company was only to stop when needed and this hadn’t been it.
Driving forward through already captured territory, Lamb’s B Company followed behind A Company while D Squadron (detached from the 15th/19th King’s Royal Hussars with their Chieftain tanks) led the way out ahead. Battalion assets were trailing behind and there were flank guards out on the sides. Furthermore, there was already another battalion battle-group out ahead who had already moved through this area. Lamb was inside his own FV432, one with extra radios, and had his ears on the radio with his eyes on the maps issued. He’d learnt long ago in the British Army that it never did any good to blindly follow the lead of others, for that would always get you into trouble eventually, and to use your own sense to do as he was meant to. His training and the weight of his responsibilities made sure that he made certain he was going the right way regardless of whether everyone else was.
A call from an NCO in one of the lead vehicles brought Lamb’s attention back to the present situation. There was a delay ahead with a back-up of vehicles. Straight away, A Company’s commander came on the radio and told Lamb that he was backed up behind the tankers ahead. There was a convoy of vehicles coming the other way and everyone ahead was slowing down to let them get past. The gravel route, one built by the Soviets and very useful for the large number of wheeled and tracked vehicles trying to move fast from point a to point b, was only so wide. Standing orders were that advancing combat units had right of way and anyone wanting to come the other way should move off-road, not them. Lamb got on the battalion network and contacted his commander to ask what was going on; the lieutenant-colonel was talking with D Squadron, his operations officer said, and would get to Lamb soon enough. He should be aware though that it was a small convoy and no one was going off-road at the minute just slowing down for a very short period.
Who or what was in the convoy gaining right-of-way?
Casualties, he was told.
Minutes later, no more, came the trucks with their red crosses on the side. He’d seen many of these in the war and some shot-up where their markings made big fat targets for enemy gunners. These moved past rather fast, clearly with badly injured men in them – not walking wounded, not by a long shot – in them coming from some fight up ahead or maybe on the flanks somewhere. Lamb mentally wished those men well though did have to wonder whether whatever fight that had been hadn’t messed with someone’s timetable. That was harsh but true. There was a mission to be got on with here, getting deep into East Germany and hitting the enemy hard.
The trucks were past and the procession started moving again. The advance was to continue only after a small delay. Lamb silently thanked the Soviets for building this sort-of road and then made sure that B Company was moving out.
Onwards.
March 24th 1990 Near Legnica, Legnica Voivodeship, Silesia, People’s Republic of Poland
Marshal Gromov’s helicopter arrived at the airfield and he was preparing to leave it when his aide told him that they were to stay aboard. Western-TVD’s commander queried as to what that meant: was there something wrong?
Apparently, General Varennikov was coming out here and wanted Gromov to wait aboard the Mil-8.
Three Soviet Army officers walked out to the parked helicopter and Gromov watched them through the opened cabin door. He told the aide to leave himself and get the crew to do the same thing. Don’t go far, he said, and stay here nearby. Especially don’t go down into the underground command centre or anywhere off the flight-line: that will draw more attention than there already is. Gromov wanted to say more but the aircrew weren’t known to him personally. He turned to watch as Varennikov, another general who he’d never seen before and what looked like an aide come closer before the latter stopped and stood where his own was.
Then the two generals climbed aboard and the passenger cabin door was slammed shut.
Varennikov said at once that he wanted their talk to be brief and private, hence the helicopter. He introduced the man with him as General-Lieutenant Viktor Mikhailovich Zavarzin, a newly-promoted man who had his complete trust. Zavarzin had been commanding a Soviet Army training division which had moved from Central Asia into the western part of the Russian SSR though orders for any further movement of his former command, plus several others which represented the last major combat strength of the Soviet Army west of the Urals (apart from those in the Arctic and in the Caucasus), were currently to move no further than that. He was now reassigned by Varennikov personally to Gromov’s staff to save what could be saved from the disaster which was Central Europe.
Gromov listened as the Chief of the General Staff informed him that the war was lost. NATO was going to overrun East Germany and western Czechoslovakia soon enough. They’d recapture mainland Denmark and the rest of Austria as well. Afterwards, they’d strike east into Poland, Slovakia and Hungary. All of Gromov’s remaining forces were going to be lost trying to stop that from happening and all for no reason at all. Kryuchkov knew this, Rodionov knew this and so did he. There were those back home making their own plans for an end to the war, those with the KGB who had co-opted others into their devious schemes, but none of those plans incorporated saving what remained of the Soviet Army in Central Europe. Yes, there wasn’t much left, but what there was shouldn’t be lost for no reason at all.
What else would the Rodina be defended with if Gromov’s forces were beaten where they were and the plans of the Chekists didn’t work?
Nuclear weapons? The West had those too and their use by the Soviet side against the West would mean the inevitable counterstrike eliminating the Russian people.
The satellite states of Eastern Europe? Poland was going to rebel soon enough – even if the KGB couldn’t see that – while East Germany was finished and so too was Czechoslovakia.
The well-armed but under-manned training divisions? There were nine of them in total and all spread out over a massive area.
The KGB’s desires to sew disunity in the West? That had failed before and whatever they were dreaming up now wouldn’t work too.
NATO was victorious across Central Europe and when they rolled into Eastern Europe they would keep going into the Rodina. It would be another Barbarossa, this time a real one not the lies spread about one coming back in late January. They would want revenge for what had been done to them and that revenge would come against the Russian people. The Rodina would be occupied and with that raped, broken and dismembered. That was what had been planned for the West should the war have been won by their side and now the same thing would be done in return. Anyone who believed otherwise was a deluded fool.
Zavarzin spoke up once Varennikov was finished with his impassioned speech. He spoke of the blood they had all spilt – Gromov realized the irony which the two generals didn’t – and how the Soviet Army had been broken. They were patriots weren’t they all, patriots like the fighting men who had given their lives for the Rodina and were all about to be sold out by a power-mad Chekist who had launched this war to conquer the world (starting with Western Europe) and would see Russian soldiers killed by the millions in doing so. They had to stop this, the three of them here!
The hyperbole had followed the irony.
Gromov was told by Varennikov that the GRU was with them. Beaten, broken and humiliated when its leadership had been exterminated right on the eve of war in a foolish move, they were ready to assist. The KGB wouldn’t be aware of what the Soviet Army was doing in making sure that there was no more sacrifice and that what was left of the Soviet Army in Europe managed to get back home, or at least as much of it as was possible to pull out before NATO mauled them like they had the rest. There were already orders being followed where KGB people were leaving themselves and coming home less they be caught up in the final collapse that was going to come and one which Gromov was to save what he could from: they could be deceived into not seeing what was going on. The Chief of the General Staff seemed confident in this and Zavarzin nodded in passionate agreement.
But in these remarks Gromov saw something which they didn’t. He asked Varennikov why if the KGB was so distracted, why wasn’t it time for vengeance to be gained? Let’s not try to act without them noticing and hoping we get away with it, why don’t we strike against them?
Varennikov shook his head in a rather sad fashion and told Gromov that the Chekists would kill them first. Why were they meeting in the back of this helicopter? Why did he believe that what had to be done could only be done in Central Europe and not back home? Because the KGB were everywhere and they could only be caught off guard in some ways.
Left dissatisfied with the answer, Gromov still didn’t have a response though. There was so much he wanted to say yet the words wouldn’t come. Varennikov had made it clear that that was his belief and there had been no sign that he would change his mind on it no matter how hard Gromov tried to push him. So, once again throughout this war, when it came to the subject of the KGB, he caved in.
After leaving the helicopter, with Zavarzin loudly telling a crude joke to Gromov and Varennikov, and then the Chief of the General Staff thanking the Western-TVD commander for the war summary he had given him – all so that anyone listening could hear –, they went into the command centre.
Legnica was home to a major Soviet Army where before the war Gromov’s predecessor had his peacetime headquarters. Gromov had only come here once beforehand since his appointment and had only come here today because he had been ordered to do so. NATO liked bombing headquarters bunkers as he knew from personal experience. After the last near-miss, which had left him as one of the many walking wounded, he had avoided them yet there was now no choice but to enter this one.
In a public forum, with KGB people present, Varennikov was given a full-scale briefing on the ongoing fighting and where the frontlines were. There was intelligence upon the enemy’s strength and (possible) intentions plus the numbers on Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces left available. The overall situation was dire and there was no sign at all that anything was going to avert the series of repeated losses on the battlefield. On the ground and in the air, NATO was ascendant everywhere. They were moving on Berlin, Saxony and Prague. All would fall soon enough with the Polish border as well as the centre of Czechoslovakia eventually going to be reached. Cut-off pockets of Gromov’s men were everywhere with further instances where NATO would surround more certain to come unless things changed… and changed very soon.
The Chief of the General staff issued orders to do just that.
Gromov was instructed that due to an ‘averse operational and strategic situation’, the ‘defensive zone’ was to ‘move eastwards on a temporary basis’. His forces would defend eastern parts of the German Democratic Republic, central parts of Czechoslovakia and eastern parts of occupied Austria. Varennikov stated that it was ‘unfortunate’ that both Berlin and Prague, plus large and important other areas of both East Germany and Czechoslovakia, were to be withdrawn from but again this was ‘only a temporary retrograde move’. He had full confidence in Marshal Gromov to do this successfully, with General Zavarzin appointed to assist him in this.
At no point were the regimes of the East Germans nor the Czechoslovaks, both of whom had their capital cities abandoned as they had just been with these new orders, mentioned. As far as Gromov could tell, those back in Moscow had yet to inform them of that.
March 24th 1990 The River Drava Valley, Carinthia, Austria
Colonel Jim Jones watched the shells exploding in the distance as the massed artillery fire did its worst to the enemy beneath them. Up ahead, further downstream and away to the east, the air exploded all around the Soviet troops targeted by several batteries of guns manned by US Marines. Contact and proximity fuses were being used, Jones’ operations officer told him, and those sheltering defenders there would find themselves being killed and wounded in large numbers. The guns kept firing, again and again, with 105mm & 155mm & 203mm shells denotated right where Jones wanted them to: in the centre of the enemy’s positions.
Now it was time to send the assault forces of Task Force Tarawa into action against the flanks.
Mattis’ 1/7 MARINES moved on the left and Hagee’s 1/8 MARINES made their advance from the right. Both marine rifle battalions were supported by tanks and light armoured vehicles directly as they made their attacks while there was waiting air support (if not stolen by another regimental-sized task force before then) and the guns being employed were ready to shift their fire upon command. There were local Austrians acting as guides for Jones’ men and there were more of them waiting behind the Soviets being struck against to slow down an expected retreat.
Better information could have come to Jones had he stayed inside his vehicle with his command column. He would have been able to talk directly to his two battalion commanders and also made sure that all supporting assets were doing as they were supposed to do. Yet, Jones hadn’t been comfortable when doing that in previous engagements, especially at the start of a major attack. He had chosen some high ground which offered a decent view of the battlefield and brought along his binoculars. There was a mobile radio set-up with his headquarters staff and he wasn’t very far away.
Jones wanted to observe his men in action yet still needed to remain in overall command too.
The attack was over within the hour, a heck of a lot faster than expected. The Soviets didn’t retreat and stood firm in their positions. In those, they died or were captured.
Rather surprised at how the engagement had gone, but pleased nonetheless, Jones was soon on the radio to the 1st Marine Division headquarters. He spoke to the divisional chief-of-staff first before Major-General Michael Myatt came on the radio. Congratulations for Jones and his men were sent and then a clarification was asked for as to where exactly Jones’ advance had reached; the suspicion from Task Force Tarawa’s commander was that his superior had been paying a little more attention to the progress of his other units and forgotten about the advance down near the Yugoslav border.
Jones told Myatt that the village of Oberdorf had been reached by his tanks who’d pushed ahead of the infantry mopping up from the fight nearby. The border where the Drava reached it, the objective issued to him as to where he was to advance towards, was just a few more miles ahead. He had contacted division to report that the last known opposition ahead was clear and he was now making his final move. Very soon he would have his men on the river there and right alongside the frontier with Yugoslavia when he took the village of Lavamünd next, the crossing point on the Drava with the border.
Well done, came the final response, and carry on.
When the connection was cut, Jones started to do just that. He had the permission to carry on with this time no restrictions issued down to him to be ‘considerate’ when moving in close proximity to the Austrian-Yugoslav border. He had no intention of sending Task Force Tarawa across that and causing an incident but he felt more free than usual when fighting near to it as there was no orders from above – regardless of local circumstances – to keep well away… and let the Soviets skirt it to their advantage. He knew that with the division’s current main objective being to go north to Wolfsberg at the moment and Graz (down off the Alpine high-ground) eventually there was a lead focus on that, plus the complications with the recent addition to the I MEF’s command of a brigade of Italian troops too. That could have been why he wasn’t reissued another warning about the border today or maybe someone high up had decided to forgo those previous tight restrictions with a new attitude taken towards Yugoslav ‘sensibilities’. Either way, while still obeying his orders, Jones felt the freedom to move about his forces.
Both of his battalions were issued instructions to continue at once to move upon Lavamünd with haste. Supporting elements of Task Force Tarawa would take over securing the battlefield which 1/7 MARINES and 1/8 MARINES had just fought on while they continued onwards. Lt.-Colonel’s Mattis and Hagee were told to carry on, just as Jones himself had been told.
When Jones reached the battlefield in his small command column, he found that order had been restored where not very long ago there had been utter chaos. Once the fighting was over and done with, there was a calmness which had fallen. The guns had stopped dropping shells, the attack helicopters no longer fired their machine guns & rockets and the marine riflemen no longer used their weapons to kill their enemy. Now it was all about securing prisoners and discarded weapons as well as dealing with the wounded… from both sides.
The fight had taken place in hillside woodland between Oberdorf and another small village named Aich. The Drava, which eventually ran east towards its rendezvous with the Danube, was nearby and so too was a wrecked railway bridge brought down weeks before the battle by Italian air power. There had been no direct fight for either village, the bridge & the railway line and neither the riverbanks either. It was a series of improvised field defences where the Soviets had dug themselves in and covered all avenues of approach that they had fought for. Those had done nothing for them when the US Marines under Jones’ command hit them. The minefields, the machine guns sited carefully, the trenches, the foxholes, the mortars and so on hadn’t stopped the attack. The position had been identified long before it was met and careful reconnaissance done of it. Attacking marine riflemen had been positioned ready to move in against the sides as the centre was blasted. Seeing all of the destruction up close when he dismounted his vehicle, Jones understood why the battle had gone so fast like it had. The planning put in by his staff and those with the pair of attacking units when it came to how to conduct the attack had worked just as it was meant to.
What it all meant was the Soviets weren’t stopping the advance from continuing here like they weren’t elsewhere in Austria too.
Jones observed the prisoners from a distance as they were being guarded waiting for transport. He looked over those men, most uninjured but a few walking wounded, but didn’t see what he thought he would: evil. These troops were some of those who had unleashed horrors upon Austria whilst they were here but they looked harmless now. They were shivering in the cold and looked thin and ill. Their hollow expressions towards him didn’t give Jones the satisfaction he had wanted when he had come to see them.
Next Jones went to where the field aid stations were located. There were more Soviet soldiers there, but also some of the US Marines under his command as well. Like the prisoners, he couldn’t bring himself to ignore the wounded either.
And there were a lot of them.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:35:53 GMT
Thirty–Eight – German Flu
March 25th 1990 The White House, Washington D.C., the United States
Brent Scowcroft told President Bush and the rest of the National Security Council (NSC) that German Flu – also known as ‘G-Germ’ – was not a Soviet biological weapon.
The various illnesses affecting Dutch, Belgian, West German and East German civilians as well as many soldiers from both sides who were fighting in selective locations across Western Europe were a combination of diseases and afflictions brought about by multiple factors all combining. Environmental factors, weaknesses in immune systems created by full-scale war and war-effects themselves had created a perfect storm for the outbreaks of multiple, independent illnesses to occur. Looked at from the outside, the appearance came of one disease but this was not true. There were people unwell with various afflictions showing all sorts of symptoms and with varying levels of effects on their health.
The National Security Adviser stated that the areas where German Flu had showed up should point to how it was not a biological weapon. Through certain areas of the Low Countries and across both Germanies, people where ill where there had been large-scale static fighting and with that a lot of physical destruction. German Flu hadn’t shown up apart from in isolated cases elsewhere – such as in France, Denmark, southern parts of West Germany and Austria – and only then the people had recently arrived from the areas where it was prevalent. In the areas where it was seen on a massive scale, civilians and soldiers alike were weak from lack of food, clean drinking water and shelter. Basic sanitation and personal hygiene had suffered because of the ongoing fighting. Then came all of the poison in the air being breathed in from countless fires burning, including those pouring dangerous particles into the sky, and also lingering effects of chemical weapons. Add this atop of the bad weather at this time of year and regular late winter influenza, and along came German Flu. Furthermore, many civilians who had preexisting medical conditions had no access to medications while soldiers had been given multiple doses of inoculations against chemical weapons.
German Flu wasn’t being passed on from person-to-person and, of great importance Scowcroft affirmed, no one had died of German Flu either. People had died who were suffering from German Flu, but the various currently occurring illnesses all put down as German Flu hadn’t killed anyone directly. Autopsies had been done and lungs were found to be covered in poisons while internal organs were in a bad way in some cases with unnatural afflictions, but German Flu was not a killer itself.
Elsewhere in the world where biological weapons had been used, people had died in their tens of thousands. In Pusan, Tokyo and selective parts of Pakistan, the germs spread there had killed civilians on a massive scale. Those three attacks had brought about the shorthand terms K-Germ, J-Germ and P-Germ. The first two were very similar weapons with the germs being employed selectively killing Korean and Japanese civilians in a short period – less than two days – from multiple organ failure with the source of the plagues unleashed not being directly identified. In Pakistan, P-Germ was a weapon delivered in aerosol form when rockets burst over rural areas near the Afghan border that struck at Pakistani civilians by killing them by heart failure within a week. Samples of K-Germ and J-Germ had been studied extensively by US military and civilian scientists; not so much P-Germ. When they were looked at and compared to G-Germ (or, more correctly, G-Germs) German Flu was nothing like them on a biological level nor a killer either; in addition, if it had been a weapon targeted at civilians well it had failed for so many of those ill from it were Soviet soldiers as well as East German civilians.
The few unhelpful comments made in certain elements of the American media who were stretching their interpretation of self-censorship in the national interest were nothing compared to the rumours about German Flu sweeping through Europe. The name had caught the imagination of so many. There were all sorts of exaggerations, false information and outright lies going on there. Troops were talking about it, so too were civilians and politicians. Everyone was convinced German Flu was a biological weapon, if not Soviet them maybe American. Scowcroft told of how true information was being used to fight the fake news, but it was a struggle there. A lot of people believed that it was the third in the trio of NBC weapons being used: first it had been chemical weapons, then nuclear weapons and now biological weapons.
The narrative needed to be changed because the already identified effects upon morale were only going to grow stronger. It needed to be made clear what German Flu actually was and that message spread in a way to gain credence widely. Scowcroft couldn’t put it any stronger to his president when he stated that there was a pressing, urgent need to take control of this situation now before the effects from the fear of and the lies about German Flu got beyond the point where it was just rumours and not outright mass panic/hysteria.
Meeting for the first time since the outbreak of the war below the White House in the Situation Room, almost all of the NSC was present here apart from a couple of notable exceptions. Raven Rock had been the site of recent meetings with Bush and others tele-conferencing in from here or elsewhere. Now they were almost all here. After Scowcroft’s statements, there was discussion afterwards on how to combat German Flu on several levels. There would be a massive medical increase to treat people – civilians and soldiers, friendly and unfriendly – who were laid low by the various diseases. On an information level, an understanding of what was causing the spread of illnesses would be put into play. Strategically, the message would be need to rammed home that German Flu was not a bio-weapon and those who needed to pay attention made to.
Some of the ideas expressed here by decision-makers were far from ideal and really needed work done on them before implementation, but it was a start. It was recognised that doing nothing and allowing the rumours to carry on like they were about German Flu would only make things worse. How could people recover through medical attention if they believed they had been afflicted with a humanity-ending plague unleashed by a nefarious enemy?
Moving on, the NSC addressed the assassination attempt in Defence Secretary Dick Cheney. He was alive but hurt after that helicopter crash. The US Navy Sea Knight had been brought down with a man-portable SAM not very far off the ground and when the helicopter crashed several people aboard had died. He had suffered injuries like other survivors though had lived. From Jamaica to Panama Cheney had been flown first at a high-priority medical evacuee and then on to Bethesda in Maryland.
Cheney had spinal injuries and some internal bleeding as well as other minor wounds. The very best doctors had been called in and his status quickly downgraded from ‘critical’ to ‘serious’. He was conscious through most of his ordeal and still had his wits about him despite the crash. A desire expressed by Cheney to leave Bethesda and get back to his duties hadn’t been taken seriously as he was so very banged about and hardly in the correct state to undertake them. Bush had been briefed on the situation fully with his Defence Secretary and refused the notion floated by his chief-of-staff first to temporarily remove him from his role and make his deputy Rumsfeld Acting Defence Secretary. John Sununu had done so because he believed that Cheney would take too long to recover and the role needed filling.
Bush had declined though. First of all, he believed that Cheney would recover quickly and secondly… Rumsfeld was not who he wanted to see as Defence Secretary. He had fast realized his mistake in bringing him into the Administration and was actually considering removing him. He would catch plenty of political heat and the embarrassment of the about-face on the man would be heavy so the decision on how and when to get rid of Cheney’s deputy was something he was delaying. Either way, Cheney was staying in his role.
As to who had been behind the effort to kill Cheney and what that meant in regard to the then-proposed solution to the conflict with Cuba, there were answers Bush asked now of the NSC. What had been discovered as to who had carried out the shoot down (of the correct helicopter too as there had been two), who had ordered it and what did it all mean? Responses came that evidence pointed to KGB involvement on the ground in Jamaica and also across in Cuba too. More information as needed though, especially the situation there on that island. This was all going to take some time and it was recommended that the bombing campaign stay halted for another day at least until answers could come. The blockade was still in-place and the B-52s, with nuclear weapons, would go back should things go that way.
The war with Cuba was not over.
One of the senior NSC staffers, US Air Force Colonel John Gordon, gave a presentation on the Soviet nuclear posture and images were shown of missile fields plus information given about what was known about their mobile missiles. The ICBMs remained ready to go, they just needed an order to send them from out of the Soviet Union and over the North Pole down into the United States. Gordon also gave a briefing on other missiles: those which the Saudis had and were reportedly now fitted – some of them anyway – with Pakistani nuclear warheads. They were supposed to be pointed at Iran and to make sure that Saudi territorial sovereignty wasn’t infringed. Scowcroft spoke of the concerns that those warheads might not go bang if they were ever used… or might go bang during lift-off.
Israel, fresh from its victories early in the war, was worried about those missiles despite a back-channel – all unofficial – with the Saudis saying they were pointed at Iran. They could just as easily go west rather than north, to Tel Aviv rather than Tehran. The Israelis had spoken with the Pakistanis too about the nuclear warheads and asked if those toys could be taken away from the Saudis in exchange for Israeli medical aid in combatting the massive civilian casualties inside Pakistani with P-Germ: a nice quid pro quo. Elizabeth Dole told the NSC that the Pakistanis were still officially denying that they had a problem in their border regions with Afghanistan because they feared that India would smell weakness and ally with the Soviets leading to an invasion. So they turned down the Israeli offer – a stupid move, everyone here agreed – though let it slip to the Israelis that they had some sort of control over those missiles in addition to the warheads and they wouldn’t fly towards Tel Aviv.
There was concern expressed in the NSC that the Israelis might soon enough decide they didn’t like those greasy assurances and take their own action.
The situation in North Korea was addressed with the Chinese moving deeper – hiccups aside – into the country from the north and the long-awaited invasion coming up from the south with South Korean and United States forces. Pyongyang was the goal for the South Korean First & US Eighth Armys and there was already hard fighting. The North Koreans were not giving in even when invaded from all sides and clear defeat on the cards for them. They were beaten but won’t accept it.
Elsewhere in the Pacific, with most of the ocean a US-Allied lake, intelligence had come in that Vietnam had ‘asked’ the Soviets to move their aircraft and ships out of their country. Chinese pressure had been exerted and they had, surprisingly, caved in to that. Hanoi didn’t want to but they feared not an invasion by either China or even the United States but a nuclear strike eventually against Soviet military facilities. There were no plans to do that here from the NSC and it wasn’t believed that the Chinese had made any sort of threat to do that due to what it would mean in response for them from the Soviets, but the Vietnamese appeared to be taken with the notion that that would happen. Where would those warships, submarines, aircraft and personnel all go? That was a situation to watch.
General Colin Powell was asked to give a briefing on the overall fighting in Europe and he updated the NSC on the war there. NATO forces were deep inside East Germany and had also broken open the front in Czechoslovakia: due to West German continued raiding in the rear the French had moved past Plzen.
Soviet and Warsaw Pact forces were finished in East Germany. Most of the western parts of the country were under occupation or hostile forces bottled up in encirclements. The path to Berlin was open now. Soviet forces trying to defend in static positions had failed just like previous attempts in mobile warfare. Those reserve forces kept in the eastern side of the country near the Polish border still hadn’t moved forward and showed no sign of doing such a thing: the CIA’s source had said they were given last-minute orders not to and that was shown to be true. East German paramilitaries were fighting but they were dying when faced with victorious NATO armies on the advance. In Czechoslovakia, there were Soviet forces behind Prague staying still and those few Soviet & Czechoslovak troops fighting the French-led invasion were falling apart. The skies above the battlefield and increasingly moving further east belonged to NATO; the enemy still had fighters and many SAMs but they were a beaten force too.
Powell did warn that there were still a lot of difficult fighting to come, the liberation of West Berlin and by extension the push into East Berlin too especially. That victory needed to come soon. Replacement troops and equipment were still generally there with shortages in some places but available stocks in others. Reservists and retirees were still being fed into the battles in Europe and factories were starting to turn out gear in numbers now: with the latter, complicated equipment would take a lot longer though. America’s mobilization was moving fast but the New Army being built was still months off being ready even with shortcuts made.
The war was being won in Europe yet there was no walkover taking places. Losses were still coming in and at the minute there was the bonus of injured men hurt early in the war coming back into service after a period of recuperation. These things couldn’t last. A lot depended on how the fighting went and if there was a decision to go further east into Poland. Should that happen, a pause would be needed.
After those discussions here in the very early hours below Washington, something else was covered by the NSC: Replay and what was deemed (rather too dramatically for some) the ‘Moscow Option’. At the behest of the CIA Director, several people were politely requested to leave the Situation Room so that only those with the highest of security clearances were left behind when William Webster spoke.
Several days ago, Webster began, Replay had delivered his latest package of intelligence material through an intermediary via the CIA station inside the US Embassy in Helsinki. Within that had been all the information concerning how the United States could take out much of the East German leadership (but not those at the very top) in their homes plus liberate prisoners from the Stasi’s main detention facility on the edges of East Berlin. There had been a timescale given for when the perfect moment was to strike and assurances that if it was done when Replay said it could be that Soviet defensive forces around those locations would pull out of their immediate areas right beforehand. Operation Black Ghost, when conducted by US and British forces, had been an almost complete success and Replay’s information plus promises had been kept. That mission had been approved by President Bush and the NSC and there had been other ‘goodies’ in the intelligence package given over. There was an American traitor which Replay suggested should be detained (a former US Army Reserve military intelligence specialist recalled to uniform and serving in West Germany by the name of Colonel George Trofimoff) and intelligence concerning the order-of-battle of Soviet military forces throughout their country east of the Urals facing China and the Pacific had been checked out.
On top of this, Replay stated that he could provide accurate information on the bunker beneath the outskirts of Moscow where Kryuchkov and his top people could be found including how to destroy it from the air and a time when Soviet defensive forces would be ordered to stand down. Replay wanted the United States to get back in touch about doing this so that when Kryuchkov was eliminated there would afterwards be a coup d’état to topple was left of the regime after the Soviet dictator was killed. The Moscow Option had the potential to end the war… but also bring about a nuclear holocaust if one of seemingly a million different things went wrong either before, during or after a strategic-level attack inside the Soviet Union like Replay wanted doing.
When discussed beforehand, there had been an immediate decision to check out the facts and feasibility. Caution had been expressed by many, outright concern by others. Bush had asked for several days to be taken to gather information and for him to think on it before the Moscow Option was discussed again as it was now.
As his president asked him to, Webster spoke now about Replay: who was he, who did he represent and could he be trusted Bush had asked. The CIA Director’s answers were at once, like they on the same subject beforehand with his organisation’s source inside the Soviet Union, rather disappointing to hear.
The CIA didn’t know who their source was. He had made extraordinary efforts to keep his identity secret. He had first approached them leaving packages after cryptic phone-calls first through a retired CIA officer living in India and then later making use of dead-drops in Switzerland, China and Finland. The globe-hopping in the midst of a war made it impossible for one man to be delivering the information which Replay (known through various codenames) to be undertaking. What was handed over was all sorts of military and intelligence-related information which had generally immediate or medium-term value. Soviet advances on the battlefield and behind it as well as KGB activities worldwide were foiled using that information sent. Replay had told the CIA that counter-invading Eastern Europe would mean nuclear war yet that had been decided to be ignored based upon other factors. He had told too of the chaos inside the Soviet Union with the ongoing war where the Communist Party was barely important and there were rebellions taking place on the edges of the empire run from Moscow. When pressed for information, Replay refused to give what was asked for: he sent what he wanted to and it was made use of with the CIA disguising the source when it fed it to those who acted upon it.
While there had to be couriers who could travel freely running the information and taking those careful steps to avoid discovery, there was believed to be one man collating it and dealing with the CIA’s written requests and declining them indirectly by refusing to go along with them and sending what he did. Through other means which Webster didn’t discuss here, he spoke of an identification effort to find that one man. There was evidence pointing to a retired GRU colonel, other information suggesting that a former air force general was behind it and more suspicion cast upon a serving KGB counter-intelligence figure known to be at odds with Kryuchkov (but still alive). Webster didn’t say the names Shlykov, Rutskoy nor Kalugin here even when in the controlled confines of the Situation Room.
But… Webster admitted that for any of the suspects which the CIA believed to be Replay, that would mean that their man was part of something bigger. The information was too much, the power to influence events – recently in East Germany one thing, what he said about the Moscow Option even greater – far more than expected. The CIA couldn’t say for sure that this was all a maskirovka: the clues to an identity, and everything else too, could just be a complicated game being played by STAVKA, the GRU or even the KGB themselves. The riddle was too much to uncover and the deeper their agents dug the further away from the truth they got. There was recent evidence suggesting that a civilian organisation supporting democracy inside the Soviet Union to be fronted by the recently-reappeared Boris Yeltsin was behind Replay and were desperate to end the war and were engaging in these back-channel intelligence moves with some support from military & intelligence people to end the war and save their people.
The exasperation shown on Webster’s face was matched by those listening when it came to what the CIA was dealing with when it was engaging in just gaining intelligence from Replay and finding out who he was… let alone having to trust him. Bush himself had been in Webster’s position as CIA Director back in the Seventies during the last year of the Ford Administration. In that short-term post, a political role rather than operational, he had heard some crazy things yet nothing like this!
Powell was asked to summarize what it would take to conduct the Moscow Option and hit a leadership bunker outside the Soviet capital. The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff had had his planning people look into this despite not knowing where the target was and only with the knowledge of other fortified strategic command bunkers encountered so far outside the Soviet Union: he warned that without proper, solid information there would be much more to it. To strike at a bunker like that, one protected against a nuclear attack deep inside the enemy homeland, he’d need to have at least six F-117s in the sky. They would have to go into well-defended enemy air space through separate avenues of approach where detection would set off all sorts of worrying reactions. One would drop earth-penetrating bombs to smash overhead coverage, the second would drop bunker-busting bombs to tear through the bunker itself and the third would deliver more bombs containing the most-lethal nerve gases the United States had to work through chemical warfare suits and get into every internal room inside the bunker: the other three would be there in case one of the first trio was lost. All would then have to get out of enemy air space afterwards, especially the reserve aircraft with the nerve gas bombs. If the bunker was to be destroyed and those inside killed, this would be what it would take to deliver the ordnance on target. Before that, there would have to be perfect intelligence on the facility and all sorts of defences nearby and distant. The attack would be very difficult to do, including supporting strikes also inside the Soviet Union against air defences despite what Replay might want to ‘guarantee’ wouldn’t interfere.
Not impossible, Powell said, but damn hard.
Adding to this, Scowcroft stated that even if the air attack went perfect, that didn’t mean much. Kryuchkov might not be there, he might even somehow survive even if the bunker was drenched in lethal nerve gases made into a cocktail out of someone’s worst nightmare. Then there was the risk that should the Moscow Option work, Replay’s other plans might not work so it would all be for naught. How would the United States react to such an attack here in the Situation Room? Yes, the strategic attack would be met with a strategic counter-attack. Furthermore, when there were all of these very worrying signs that Replay might be a Soviet intelligence ploy for outcomes unknown, why would the United States want to work with him in this manner. Taking his intelligence and using it was one thing, but working with him was something else. Black Ghost had been a risk when special operations forces were used in areas suddenly left defenseless, but going after Kryuchkov at home in his country was a whole different and very dangerous move.
Dole asked Powell if Replay’s intelligence had so far been vital for the war effort. If he was cut off as useful, if he gave over no more intelligence, would that be fatal for the war effort? Put on the spot with such a leading question where the outcome would mean a cut-off on the useful goodies delivered but having to give a truthful answer, Powell gave the Secretary of State an honest response: it was nice to have, but none of it had been absolutely vital.
Jim Webb asked the same of Webster and was told the same thing: what information on an intelligence level had been given had been helpful yet overall it wasn’t going to lose the war for the United States if it ceased. Regardless, he urged the NSC that should the Moscow Option be refused, Replay to be told a ‘no’ in a polite way so as to see if his reaction was as before to carry on sending over goodies in his packages.
On the line connecting him from Raven Rock, Donald Rumsfeld spoke up. He had been in support of the Moscow Option since it was first mentioned and stated that with Kryuchkov gone the war would be over with. It was his war and there was massive opposition to it inside the Soviet Union and outside in supposed allies as well. Kill him and the war was over with, he said; moreover, after Kryuchkov is dead the relationship which had been created with Replay could be used to bring down the whole Soviet empire. He agreed that there were risks, but didn’t believe that they were that severe. The centralized command and control which the extremely paranoid Kryuchkov had imposed meant that with his death there would be no reaction from a confused regime when opposition to him moved to pick up the pieces after his demise. If there was doubt over whether the bombs from the F-117s would do the job, then double the strike force or the bomb-load.
Webster told the NSC that despite all of his worries over Replay’s identity, he still believed that the Moscow Option should be done like the Deputy Defence Secretary did. Black Ghost had proved the reach of Replay: the defences there had been either moved away or issued firm instructions (which were obeyed too) to not interfere. Even if Replay was a front for something bigger, possibly even a KGB off-shoot opposed to their leader, his or their intention was to bring an end to the war by eliminating Kryuchkov. The war could be over with the bombing of that bunker and the killing of those inside.
Dole and Webb voiced their disapproval of the attack and warned of the dangers. Scowcroft asked Robert Gates, who’d only hours before returned from Europe where he’d overseen Black Ghost, to explain what would be the reaction of the United States’ allies in NATO. The Deputy National Security Adviser said that they would be in uproar in opposition. They feared nuclear warfare even more than the United States – well… they believed their fear was greater than the ‘reckless’ Americans – and would at once protest the moment they found out the Moscow Option was to take place. To do so and tell them afterwards, or even not tell them, would just be worse. The evidence for this was their continued caution themselves, the British and the French especially, around the edges of the Soviet Union itself in their actions and with what the United States did too: this stood in contrast to what the Soviets had done to their countries. Rumsfeld cut in and said that the Europeans were hardly likely to cut and run from the war because of the Moscow Option but Gates’ reply as he held his ground was that while that was true they might do something else instead. There wasn’t cowardice there, just the knowledge that a Soviet reaction not foreseen or ignored by killing Kryuchkov could easily mean the thermonuclear destruction of their countries.
Once he had heard all that he wished to on the subject, Bush gave his own thoughts. He spoke of how Kryuchkov had been personally responsible for this war which had killed so many Americans. He had been behind the assassination of Vice President Dan Quayle plus the slaughter of his friend and Secretary of State James Baker: both men’s deaths had hurt him. There had been Soviet Spetsnaz active on American soil killing innocent civilians and the Cubans had been directed by Kryuchkov to invade the Florida Keys (so certain intelligence said). There was too all of the American military personnel worldwide who had lost their lives in this unprovoked war launched at the behest of this one man.
Kryuchkov deserved to be killed and in doing so there was a chance that the war would end. There was still no indication that without his death how long this war would last and every day that it did the risk of an inter-hemisphere nuclear exchange remained extremely high. The United States faced economic collapse soon unless action was taking to move from the half-in/half-out war economy to a full-scale one. There were moves in Congress to start holding hearings on Cuba to try to force an end to the war with that country and Bush told the NSC that he wanted to focus on that conflict rather than having grand-standing congressmen try to fight that war: by ending the war with the Soviets the full attention Cuba deserved could be melted out to them until they surrendered.
However…
…no, he didn’t want the Moscow Option to happen. Too much could go wrong and the risks were far too great, Replay was untrustworthy and he had a very bad feeling about it. The response from allies, old as well as new, wouldn’t be one which was worth it. This war could be won on the battlefield and even if it wasn’t then at least that wouldn’t bring with it the dangers involved by dropping bombs on Kryuchkov’s bunker outside of Moscow. Webster would be allowed to try to assuage Replay’s feelings and maybe if something else came back from the source, something he didn’t have a terrible dread over the unforeseen consequences, then maybe they could work with him on that. For now though, the Moscow Option was not happening.
March 25th 1990 Above East Germany
Flight Lieutenant’s Nichol and Peters were distracted by the hell being unleashed on the ground which they couldn’t help but observe taking place outside of their Tornado. Out over the port wing and off in the distance, there were the flashes from countless explosions down beneath the plumes of rising smoke. Both RAF aircrew tried their hardest to concentrate on their mission but again and again there was the continued distraction. They couldn’t see the aircraft dropping the bombs nor those being hit down below yet sure could imagine what was going on there.
East Germans dug-in across the Fläming Heath were being hit with a tremendous aerial barrage. Dozens of B-52s were dropping hundreds upon hundreds of bombs with high-explosives and napalm used. Tactical aircraft from several air arms were joining in as they delivered their own bomb loads including a lot of chemical weapons. Across the whole area where there were defensive forces dug-in trying to protect the approaches towards Berlin, there was one big target being hit by massed air power in the middle of the afternoon just as had been the case last night and all through today without pause.
Peters remarked to his navigator that it was all of the smoke coming from air attacks like that which caused German Flu. Imagine breathing that in, he said over the intercom linking the front-seater with his back-eater, all of the time: that would make you seriously ill. Nichol added agreement and told his pilot to keep them far away from the unnatural clouds which had formed and were blocking out most of the natural light coming from high above.
Their Tornado wasn’t going anywhere near the smoke nor the massed air attacks on the way in though, they had a strike mission on the other side of the Fläming Heath.
Heading north now after previously flying east above part of the Elbe Valley, Nichol and Peters closed-in upon Jüterbog Airbase. They came in low and fast pulling their attention towards the target and the final stages of their bomb-run. Peters had his eyes looking outwards towards where his wingman was and also for any sudden enemy air activity (which wasn’t supposed to be a danger anymore) while Nichol focused on the attack systems as the last of the checks were made on the bomb release equipment and he waited for the correct moment to arm them.
The final countdown to the target was starting…
The MiGs which flew from Jüterbog Airbase in peacetime and before the war were all gone: there would be no Soviet Air Force Floggers or Fulcrums there. The usual missile defences weren’t there either and only anti-aircraft guns were meant to be defending the place now. It had been hit before, many times indeed, but NATO air power and was no longer a functioning frontline combat airbase. Soon enough, Jüterbog Airbase would probably be overrun by the British Army or maybe the French Army. Before then though, it was being used by enemy helicopters – mostly East German though some Soviet – and they had been making themselves known in the fighting along the Elbe. Many would be under cover yet others could be expected to be out in the open if the intelligence was right as the rear was nighttime NATO air strikes. That was a misapprehension which Nichol and Peters were about to put right.
Once the last waypoint was reached, Nichol armed the bombs ready to be dropped. Unlike the massive loads carried by those hitting the Fläming Heath, he and Peters were carrying a smaller arsenal of weapons today. They had taken a longer flight than other aircraft and wanted to maintain high speed. There was a Sidewinder air-to-air missile under each wing and a trio of CBU-87 cluster bombs attacked to the Tornado’s belly. Those latter weapons were all activated ready to go and Nichol let his pilot know. Peters gave his acknowledgement and made a final check that he was exactly on the right course before he eased back the flight stick and started to gain height ready for the upcoming drop.
Moments later, the bombs fell away with the second Tornado just off the starboard side and slightly behind doing the same less than a second later.
Those six bombs – three from each aircraft – fell towards Jüterbog Airbase and each started a furious spin. The CBU-87s started releasing the submunitions contained within over a wide area: two hundred and two came out of each bomb. These twelve hundred plus fragments fell upon the target below and would soon start to explode. They were explosive-tipped with a shaped charge and designed to fragment as well as having incendiary effects. There were all sorts of helicopters below across the already-bombed airbase and plenty of military personnel who had just started running to see some shelter when an air raid siren wailed. The warning was far too late as the explosions started to occur through Jüterbog Airbase and nearby into fields and woodland too.
Directed by an AWACS aircraft assigned to support 2 ATAF strike missions inside East Germany this afternoon, Nichol and Peters were brought westwards over the Fläming Heath after their attack. The Tornado climbed higher and above the clouds though went through them first. The flight suits both men wore protected them against chemical weapons as well less they fly through such weapons in the air though neither was happy as they shot across the sky where all that smoke coming up from below was. Each told themselves that they and their aircraft needed a decontamination when back on the ground because of all of the poisons in the sky.
Their Tornado was kept out of the way of attacking aircraft still dropping all of those bombs down across the area of East German countryside below crisscrossed with improvised defensive works. Neither knew exactly when or how the NATO armies were due to go over the Fläming Heath on their final run towards Berlin but it had to be soon with all the attacks coming from above. There would surely be a tasking for them with that too but one which was sure to be a high-level strike rather than coming in low.
Nichol and Peters spotted more B-52s in the sky as well as a lot of F-4s and F-16s as well. There were aircraft like them heading back west after their attacks but it seemed like more were heading east and into bomb-runs. Distant fighter cover wasn’t seen and both men remembered the assurances given when on the ground before their attack today about enemy air activity being a low-risk. Neither had been so sure of that then, suspicious of such a claim that the daylight skies now belonged to NATO as the night skies did too, but there had been no sign of Soviet fighters or warnings heard over the radio link. It appeared that they couldn’t stop all of this air power and so had given up trying.
Returning to base, Nichol and Peters wondered what did that all mean…?
March 25th 1990 Near Rudolstadt, Thüringen, East Germany
The three American officers walked casually into the command tent for General-Major Rokhlin’s shattered 19 MRD and were brought across to him by one of the German-speaking staffers whom he had sent forward to talk with them. Rokhlin first noticed that their pistol belts each held a weapon before taking note of the weathered uniforms which they wore showing they had come straight from the fight rather than been sitting comfortable in the rear. There was a little arrogance in the face of one of them, the colonel by his uniform insignia, and curiosity shown by the other two: a pair of majors.
Upon reaching him, with Rokhlin flanked by a pair of trusted sergeants, all three Americans gave a firm salute.
Rokhlin had been expected a lot of different things to have happened when the Americans came here, but not that. He was rather taken aback but it all. He knew that if he had been in their shoes, if the situation had been reversed, he wouldn’t be saluting them!
Using German as the language to converse in, one known by many of his command staff and also these Americans too, the discussions began after Rokhlin’s chief-of-staff moved everyone to some chairs around a fold-down table. The Americans were seated to the left; Rokhlin and three of his staffers to the right. Without any preamble, Rokhlin got straight to the business of trying to negotiate the surrender of his division…
…or what was pitiful remains there was of the once-proud formation that the 19 MRD had been before it had fought for last ten days against such overwhelming odds to ultimate defeat.
***
Since the Americans had begun their invasion of East Germany, which opened with that immense gas attack nearby, the 19 MRD had been engaged in a series of awful fights with not just the attacking enemy but higher command too.
Rokhlin had kept his division supposed hidden and waiting for several days under cover. There had come air attacks nearby but the 19 MRD hadn’t been directly struck at. From up in the Thüringenwald, deserters from the mobilization-only 113 MRD had come down and told tales of woe where they had been gases and bombed and gassed again. The KGB detachments assigned to both Rokhlin’s division and the Fifty–Eighth Army had shot all of them and anyone who wanted to repeat their ‘lies’ that their whole division had been as destroyed as it was. There had come no attack across the Thüringenwald – through the passes in the midst of the forest – as Rokhlin had been told to repel though. It turned out that they had gone around the massive terrain feature just back from the borders between the divided Germanys and also landed paratroopers in the rear deeper inside Thüringen.
New orders had come: join with the 14 TD in attacking the Americans by striking northwards. Rokhlin had started to move his division from out of hiding positions just as the Fifty–Eighth Army instructions demanded that he do. His command was made up of regulars and reservists with three quarters being in the latter category yet they weren’t useless and nor was none of his equipment. The tanks, other armoured vehicles and self-propelled artillery the 19 MRD fielded wasn’t that old; the air defence and engineering gear was weaker but again not useless. He had stocks of fuel and ammunition and believed that his scouts would lead him to the enemy where he could take on and smash their light forces long before any of their own armour could interfere: the 19 MRD had almost two hundred tanks, all T-72s, and what could the American paratroopers do against them? Air attacks had worried him and he had expected losses to come yet believed that when closing up with the enemy close and moving with haste those could be limited.
How wrong he had been!
The moment that the 19 MRD had started moving, the air attacks had come. His Strela-1 and Osa mobile missile-launchers, plus their radar platforms, had been hit by incoming missiles straight away. The S-60 anti-aircraft guns which were towed being prime-movers were next to be hit leaving Rokhlin with only man-portable weapons to protect his division from above. Trying to get forward fast, his reconnaissance units were ambushed by the Americans who seemed to know exactly where to find them. It was almost as if the instructions on deployment routes issued from his headquarters to his reconnaissance battalion had been correctly predicted by the enemy. The divisional KGB political commissar had denied that they could have broken the radio communications to listen in and so the scouts must have given themselves away rather than walked into a trap. From the air with armed helicopters and then on the ground, the lead elements of the 19 MRD had been beaten back when what they had planned to do to the Americans had been done to them.
That first attack towards Erfurt had been beaten off before it had gotten started.
When facing what little armour the American paratroopers had, Rokhlin had been correct in how the 19 MRD would fare: their Sheridan armoured vehicles were hit and burnt while their four-wheeled jeep-type vehicles mounting TOW missiles couldn’t take any damage without being knocked out. Yet, there were only a few victories won before in came more armed helicopters – Apaches and Cobras – and men moving on foot carrying their own man-portable missiles which had hit his tanks so hard. After taking immense losses, Rokhlin had been denied permission to redeploy and told to stay where he was after his division’s failed attack. Staying still, the Americans had first attacked from the air until they had gotten bored of doing so and moved on to tearing apart the 14 TD which was to Rokhlin’s right. American paratroopers on the ground had continued to fight his men as Rokhlin just had to stay where he was and take everything they wanted to throw at him. His tank strength had dwindled to nearly a hundred and his divisional guns had been a favorite target too. It had been a massacre.
Several days later, the 19 MRD had been ordered to move to the east and down to Rudolstadt. No reason had come for this: the Fifty–Eighth Army just told him to move and only during the night so his division would apparently be unobserved. He had assumed the idea had been for his division to eventually move against the American heavy forces which had gone around the Thüringenwald to the east. The Americans, when spotting the 19 MRD on the move, had apparently come to the same conclusion. Their aircraft returned and between Arnstadt to Rudolstadt, those two East German towns, there was a trail of burning vehicles and dead men left as Rokhlin did as he was told and tried to make that redeployment. By the time he reached there, only forty per cent of the 19 MRD remained combat effective.
Wait until ordered to attack again had come the new orders.
Suffer under air attacks and be cut off was what those orders had meant.
Positioned around Rudolstadt and across the Saale Valley down to Saalfeld too, Rokhlin had been told that when the correct moment came he was to push back northwards again, not east as he had believed. There was a major highway running west-east across Thüringen behind the Thüringenwald which the US Seventh Army would be using for their main supply route – so the Fifty–Eighth Army staff told him – and once that was defended by lighter forces he would strike against it and move up to the Jena area. He would have to spread out his division and attack on multiple avenues of attack in rapid fashion. Other units from the Fifty–Eighth Army (who were those units, he had wondered) and elsewhere too would take part in this upcoming operation.
During the wait, the 19 MRD had started to suffer from other wounds not coming from direct enemy action which further weakened Rokhlin’s command. There had been a sudden and very unwelcome presence of East German guerillas who had attacked his men. West German special forces, the political commissar had said they were at first in spite of all evidence to the contrary, before finally conceding that they were East Germans. Deserters and counter-revolutionaries had come the new KGB conclusion, and traitors too. Kill them, he had said, with no mercy shown to them nor anyone who helped them. Fighting guerillas who knew this area very well hadn’t been something which Rokhlin’s men had had any luck against. They had killed sentries, butchered men in their sleep and blown up a lot of the fuel and ammunition so carefully hoarded ready for the assault northwards. The KGB had been determined to crush them, though not with their own hands where exposure of Chekist lives would come, and Rokhlin had been told that new ‘evidence’ had come that they were West Germans after all just disguised as East Germans. The sudden about-face came after the political commissar had spoken to his own superiors where Rokhlin’s understanding was that they were denying that there was any opposition from the locals here despite everything showing the opposite. That guerilla activity was very small but ever-so deadly when it occurred and it took the lives of more than two hundred troops with the 19 MRD.
Rokhlin was informed by an East German Army reservist, an old oberstleutnant past his prime who was attached to the 19 MRD for local support, that those guerillas were active because they had seen what the Soviets had been doing in their country recently. They were fed up of the raping, robbery and outright murder and were striking back. It might be the beginnings of something bigger, the lieutenant-colonel had warned.
Other men started getting ill with German Flu.
Again, that didn’t exist officially. The men needed to wash their hands after using the latrines (open holes in the ground for the use of many), they were told by Rokhlin’s officers under KGB instruction, and to stop drinking untreated water from the Saale River. It was more than though that their commander knew. The air being breathed in was making everyone cough and drowsy. Those with the crippling headaches, stomach pains and diarrhea were also breathing in what everyone else was. German Flu came because it just affected them more because of the other factors such as those infections they gained were added atop what was floating in the air. The few doctors and medical staff with the 19 MRD were overwhelmed and couldn’t handle the number of men being sent to them with all of the illnesses keeping them combat-ineffective. Rokhlin’s chief-of-staff told him that as none of the men were dying from German Flu and the numbers kept on growing, that made the situation worse when there were hardly enough medical personnel. He also spoke of the inability to treat other injured men who had combat wounds when the aid stations were swamped with those non-fatal but debilitating illnesses who kept on arriving.
Late yesterday, Rokhlin had been told by the Fifty–Eighth Army headquarters to commence his attack at dawn this morning north towards Jena.
While he was unwilling to disobey direct orders, Rokhlin had sent to his superiors a message containing the terrible state his division was in. The 19 MRD was weakened by previous engagements, air attacks and now German Flu. There was little chance that it would reach that highway, let alone go past it and up to Jena on the other side. He suggested at a regiment-sized force be sent instead, an ad hoc one where what strongest available troops were sent north and the rest of the division held their position here. This was sent by Rokhlin when his divisional Chekist was away from the command post dealing with the latest captive guerillas: he wouldn’t have sent it when the political commissar was present.
The reply came the Fifty–Eighth Army was clearly written by the head Chekist there. The 19 MRD was to obey orders fully and attack with everything possible in the morning. Every man who could hold a rifle and every vehicle which could move, regardless of overall fuel or ammunition capability, was to be sent forward into combat. If not, ‘the officers’ would all be held responsible for the ‘treason’… and their families at home too. The divisional Chekist received his own orders separate from what Rokhlin did and he hadn’t seen what those contained.
With no other choice, Rokhlin had started to get the 19 MRD ready to make that attack as he personally feared the consequences. However, there had come another message into his headquarters and one from the South German Front – to which the Fifty–Eighth Army reported to – which jumped that chain-of-command. This wasn’t from the KGB but rather from the Soviet Army leadership, passed on down from even higher than that army group command too.
Rokhlin was told to attack with all that he could but if he faced defeat than he was to ‘remember the honour’ of the Soviet Army. He was to fight until no more could be done and if he ‘chose’ to give in he should destroy all radio equipment and secret intelligence documents. No cooperation with the enemy in any way was to be given; in addition, if anyone wanted to make a break for it to carry on fighting then they should be allowed to be given the chance to get away before the end came.
No orders like those had ever been seen by Rokhlin before. He hadn’t known what to make of them nor what had brought about them. He didn’t show them to his political commissar nor anyone else apart from his chief-of-staff and his divisional first officer. The latter, Colonel Gennady Nikolayevich Troshev, gave a speech about how he was a Russian and Russians never gave in. The nationalism expressed by the man, someone whom was a late appointment to the 19 MRD before it entered East Germany, and what Rokhlin understood to be from the Chechen region, wasn’t something shared by many here at the divisional headquarters yet Rokhlin knew that there were others who subscribed to his view. Since that had all started – Rossiya! – Rokhlin and many others had been appalled, especially since so much of the 19 MRD wasn’t ‘Russian’ as interpreted either by their internal Soviet passports nor by people like Troshev. There were ethnic factors at play as well as residence within the Soviet republics… oh and whether one had Jewish heritage like Rokhlin did.
On one of the very few things which Rokhlin had agreed with his divisional Chekist with, those who espoused this new Russian nationalism as they practically screamed ‘Rossiya!’ every chance they got were all neo-Nazis.
Attacking this morning, the Americans had been waiting for them. Rokhlin had finally convinced that his communications weren’t secure. An ambush had been laid ready for the attack by what was left of the 19 MRD and there had come a slaughter of his men when they struck north.
The enemy had been American national guardsmen. Rokhlin had been told many things about them. They were meant to be pampered Internal Troops (like the MVD) for individual provinces within the United States used to crack the heads of the oppressed workers in ghettos when those people rose-up on a regular basis in heroic fashion. No, someone else had said, they were elite national guards under national government control to secure the American system of government like the KGB’s elite units. Another description he had been given was that they were just reservists like his division was assigned to shore-up regular US Army troops in wartime.
After they had smashed apart his attack, a few prisoners were brought back from the fight as the 19 MRD made a hasty retreat. Rokhlin’s Chekist took away those he wanted – officers and certain enlisted men involved in skilled roles – and a couple were spoken with by the division’s GRU military intelligence staff to identify their unit and any useful tactical information. He learnt that they were from Washington – the American capital? No, a province named the same – and part of the 81st Brigade serving with the American 9th Infantry Division. They were reinforcing that division as it secured the rear of the US Seventh Army. None knew anything about how the attack by the 19 MRD had pre-empted, just that they had been told one was coming up to six hours before it did.
That had done it for Rokhlin.
He had what he saw as permission from above to give in when all hope was lost. He had attacked as ordered but the enemy had been waiting and beaten back his division. There was no more fight in the 19 MRD.
A small group of trusted officers had been sent to make contact with the Americans: Rokhlin’s chief-of-staff had suggested that they take a pair of captured prisoners with them (less beat-up men) to show good faith. Rokhlin showed his political commissar his orders from the South German Front allowing him to do this and also told Troshev he had permission to leave with anyone he wanted to flee with. Radios were smashed and documents quickly burnt. The KGB officers were watched by Rokhlin who had brought in a company of riflemen to the divisional headquarters but they strangely put up no resistance: Rokhlin realized that when he had received those last instructions, his Chekist had been told something else giving him warning and orders. The KGB left with Troshev. They went south on foot into the Thüringenwald. Rokhlin had been surprised that they didn’t take any prisoners with them as hostages.
He found out afterwards that they had killed every single prisoner they had: thirteen of those national guardsmen taken earlier in the day and thirty-four others (soldiers and airmen of several nationalities) held from previous engagements and not sent to the Fifty–Eighth Army’s detention camps.
***
Rokhlin had washed his hands and face and put on his best uniform. His medals had been pinned on and his boots shined by one his junior aides. He had hoped to be meeting with an equal, a general officer not a colonel, but the colonel would have to do.
Plus, Rokhlin outranked the man, surely the reason for the salute even from an enemy?
Once he had offered his surrender and that of his division, the American colonel asked first where the rest of the prisoners who’d been taken along with those already returned to them could be found. The colonel wanted to have access to them and take them back to his brigade. If they were injured as he said he had heard they were after being roughed up upon and after capture, then they would be treated here when he brought down medical units to deal with American and Soviet wounded alike: weren’t many of Rokhlin’s men suffering from German Flu?
So, where were the prisoners?
Rokhlin had really wished to start these negotiations off with something else! Yet, he had no choice but to have them told that the KGB had shot all prisoners held. Fury erupted at once with the Americans. Rokhlin had his own personal weapon and his men (including that rifle company) were all armed nearby meaning that his side would win yet he really feared a shootout would occur and didn’t want that at all. His staff officer who had been dealing with them was fast to explain that there had been no stopping the Chekist’s and they had done that without Rokhlin’s knowledge. They had left too, before the Americans had arrived.
Which way did they go?
When exactly did they leave?
How many of them were there?
And where were the bodies of the shot prisoners?
Such was the start to the negotiations. This, Rokhlin knew, was going to be a long night and not an easy process now. All he wanted to do was to no longer have his men killed for no reason and to give up with honour.
He cursed the KGB aloud and had the Americans told his feelings on the matter by his translator. Through the translator, they said something he didn’t understand though: command responsibility.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 13:39:08 GMT
Thirty–Nine – Bombshell
March 26th 1990 Roehampton University Campus, SW London, Great Britain
The Americans weren’t the only ones with a high-level intelligence source inside the Soviet Union.
Britain’s Secret Intelligence Service (SIS – also known as MI-6) had one too with the codename ‘Carronade’. They knew who their source was, they had met with him and checked out his bona files. For months they had been having dealings with him: those had started before the war had begun. Carronade hadn’t handed over as many goodies as the CIA’s Replay had and MI-6 worried about his personality yet they weren’t spending half their time analyzing his identity and so could focus on the content of his intelligence fully.
Carronade was a serving officer with the KGB’s First Chief Directorate (FCD), its foreign espionage arm. He headed up the FCD department in the Leningrad office of the KGB… and in fact nearly been killed several days ago when the Americans had bombed his place of work!
Back in November, he had first approached MI-6 when he had been in Helsinki on official business. In a clandestine meeting with an SIS officer, Carronade had said that he was dissatisfied with ongoing events at home in the Soviet Union and he wanted to see MI-6 get rid of KGB chairman Kryuchkov. Eastern Europe was in uproar and he was certain that his organisation’s head was behind that. General-Secretary Gorbachev was being isolated from his top advisers, those whom Kryuchkov said were agents for the West.
How could that be done by Britain, his first contact had asked him; work with people like me had come the response.
There had been immediate concern about Carronade. Someone in his position shouldn’t have been so naïve when it came to what SIS was capable of, sorry, not capable of doing. There had come too a fear that he was possibly an agent provocateur or a dangle. The first meant that he was looking to expose MI-6 activities by pretense of working with them and the second defined a disinformation effort. Throughout the Twentieth Century, SIS activities when it came to Soviet Russia had been fraught with such issues. The KGB and its predecessors really knew what they were doing when it came to running counter-espionage operations and playing those who tried to act against them back on themselves. Yet, the feeling had been to keep contact with Carronade but at arms-length and to listen to him. If there was an opposition which he was trying to get MI-6 to aid so when it was widened it could be moved against by the KGB, then there was still use in that. If he was feeding them disinformation, then there would naturally have to come real information with that to make it credible.
As the dance with Carronade moved on, as more meetings took place, mostly in Helsinki but sometimes in Stockholm and Oslo too when on FCD business through December and into early January, SIS officers got to know him. He was a drunk and a bitter man who held fierce grudges against those who he believed had wronged him, many within the KGB. He was a womanizer who was very crude with it: female British intelligence officers weren’t assigned to him after the first one faced his lewd comments. He complained about corruption and stupidity among his colleagues when there were some signs of that in him. He had some useful information though never anything of serious value. MI-6 started to believe he was a real informant yet, despite his senior position, he didn’t give them much. The belief was that he was waiting until he was ready to try to defect and when he made that move he would then start talking of serious matters. They knew there was a lot of knowledge in his head that they wanted access to. Taking him as a defector was doable as he often spoke with real bitterness about his wife and children as he said that there was nothing nor no one in his homeland he had any attachments to.
Those officers dealing with Carronade had pressure put upon them as the New Year moved on when East-West tensions in the diplomatic sphere ran higher every day. He was pressed for more information about what he knew concerning KGB operations abroad and also knowledge of what was going on at the very top of his country’s leadership. Carronade told SIS in mid-January that Gorbachev was no longer effectively in-charge of the Soviet Union and Kryuchkov was running the show. He had said that the talks between Gorbachev and Bush in Iceland would get nowhere as Kryuchkov wouldn’t allow them to succeed.
Yet, he hadn’t given any warning that Gorbachev would be assassinated nor that following that would come a successful coup d’état. What Carronade was able to do though was tell MI-6 straight afterwards – using emergency contact means already established – that a coup was underway and it had been long in the planning. KGB operatives from the Leningrad office, but with the Second and Fifth Chief Directorates (dealing with counter-intelligence and domestic subversives), had at once started to arrest what would become hundreds of people. Gorbachev supporters were detained first and then the net widened: Carronade’s information at once showed that this had been planned for a long time.
Carronade had sent warnings that war was coming. He had provided no direct evidence and couldn’t give SIS what they wanted in the when, the where and the how but he had told them that Kryuchkov was about to attack the West and sent Soviet armies to the English Channel. He told them that the stupid attempts at last minute diplomacy which was done to try to avert the war was pointless and also being exploited by the KGB too so as to slow down NATO mobilization. MI-6 had asked him the big question – why was Kryuchkov doing this? – but he hadn’t been able to give them an answer: Carronade didn’t know the man personally nor was in his inner circle. He had told the Britons he spoke with that the ‘why’ didn’t matter because war was coming.
As the conflict went on, Carronade had been unable to travel abroad like before. His diplomatic passport listing him as a diplomat accredited protection didn’t mean anything in wartime. He could hardly tell his superiors that he would be unmolested because he was working with SIS; they wouldn’t let him leave Leningrad unless there was an urgent need. Carronade had created one and MI-6 officers had met with him once and very briefly in Helsinki when he managed to make a flying visit there into that hotbed of wartime intelligence activity – which the Finns were trying to stop due to the violence which came with it – but their contact had afterwards come through other means rather than face-to-face meets. This occurred when he was the only British Intelligence source left of any value within the Soviet Union.
The messages which SIS received from their source had carried on coming as the weeks went by but with less frequency. In the place of frequent contact, there came greater content. Carronade fed to British Intelligence information of internal Soviet political events at a high-level rather than anything military-related. It was he who pre-empted American and Israeli sources telling the West that the Communist Party was being utterly sidelined and that the message of nationalism was to be spread; he informed MI-6 too of the rebellions in outlying parts of the Soviet Union before they heard that from others. His British contacts asked him questions and he gave them answers… or told them why he couldn’t: unlike the CIA’s source. Without telling Carronade where they got their intelligence, SIS asked him about what the Americans had been told when it came to a counter-invasion of East Germany after the tide of war had turned. Carronade said that no, Kryuchkov wouldn’t use nuclear weapons if that happened and anyone who said so was working for the KGB – no, not like he was, but for their war aims – and couldn’t be trusted. Carronade told Britain that Kryuchkov feared full-scale nuclear warfare just like they did and wasn’t the type of man to make empty threats for he knew what would happen when they were shown to have nothing behind them.
Such an analysis had been passed onto the CIA (the British giving some details of their source but not all) and MI-6 knew that this had played a part in the decision to launch Operation Eastern Storm. Carronade had become the only voice listened to on this matter…
… although there was always the guard maintained so that British weren’t being ‘took’, or so they kept telling themselves.
*
The SIS had their headquarters at Century House on Westminster Brigade Road in Lambeth. The tower block on the southern side of the Thames had long been viewed as a security risk and was also too small for MI-6: they had recently acquired a much larger and far more secure building at Vauxhall Cross. For many years, there had been plans for operations to move out of London anyway during wartime to an anonymous location. Commando attacks, air raids, civil strife and – of course – nuclear warfare were the concerns and British Intelligence wanted to operate no matter what danger came.
Worries over whether the Soviets knew of their previously scouted operating locations, SIS had changed their dispersal site to a university campus in south-western London. The Roehampton Institute of Higher Learning was empty of students and in a semi-rural area. A security cordon could be thrown up and the knowledge of the location would be kept need-to-know. Century House had been near-abandoned upon British military mobilization with a security detachment left behind: there had come a gun and grenade attack even with the armed soldiers there.
Sir Colin McColl and his people had made the campus their home and their place of work. They worked in classrooms and university offices while lived in the student accommodation. Back-up power and their own phone lines were installed. In the park grounds a-joining the campus, antennas were set up. Armed men patrolled the grounds and there were the occasional helicopters which flew in from London. SIS presence here was starting to get known as time went on, especially as they expanded, and there was the worry that eventually there would come enemy attention in some form.
The Chief of MI-6 – ‘C’ – received a briefing this morning on the latest information sent from Carronade. McColl was a man under great pressure from politicians and always with the weight on his shoulders of responsibility for the lives of his field officers out there in the world. Helsinki, where Carronade’s intelligence was routed through, was a dangerous place but so too was everywhere else. SIS had lost a lot of officers, agents and contacts – dead or missing – through the course of the war and there was no sign of that ending anytime soon.
From Finland, Carronade had delivered a bombshell.
Inside the KGB there was a movement to get rid of Kryuchkov. He had been invited to, and agreed to, join them. It wasn’t a plot for a second coup but instead a concerted effort to peacefully convince the General-Secretary to step down. Carronade’s comrades had already started talks with Kryuchkov where they had convinced him that the war was lost and that the only way to avoid either a nuclear apocalypse or a NATO invasion of the Soviet Union was for peace with the West: he would have to go for this to happen.
Carronade said that Kryuchkov was reasonable. He had moved against and killed Gorbachev and his supporters two months ago, but – apparently! – he was still someone ready to listen to those opposed to him as long as he believed they weren’t out to bring down the Rodina. There were opponents still alive after clashing with him in the past and now his fellow KGB people were able to talk with him and tell him that he had to leave his position to save the Motherland. Two meetings had taken place already in the past week with a third due soon on which Carronade would report back to MI-6 on what occurred with that. There were to be talks with Kryuchkov concerning whom to replace him with – along with guaranteeing his personal future – and what terms to offer the West for peace so that those would be accepted.
Carronade was cock-a-hoop at this, it was clear from his message, and certain that it was going to work. Kryuchkov would be gone and he and his fellow Russian people would be safe from nuclear extinction. He told SIS that in his opinion, this would work and the war would come to an end: he hoped they welcomed it like he did!
McColl was going to have to tell this to the UK War Cabinet. He could imagine the reactions that would come, none of which would be good.
They wanted the war to end but they weren’t going to go along with anything like this. Neither would the Americans nor any of the other Allies when they heard the details of the KGB ending the war in such a manner as making sure Kryuchkov was safe and selecting who would succeed him.
There wasn’t a chance in hell that this latest KGB ploy, one which clearly hadn’t happened overnight, was going to be accepted.
March 26th 1990 Santa Ana, Matanzas Province, Cuba
Comandante en Jefe Raúl Castro refused the blindfold.
He told the DGI officer where to insert the cloth and to hurry up and get it over with. The coronel (colonel) with Cuba’s intelligence service, a traitor to the country and the Revolution, gave him a smirk of superiority and then turned on his heels. A short walk away was made by the man back to where the firing squad was waiting and Jefe Castro leaned forward and spat at the ground behind him. He would have liked to physically attack the man yet his hands were bound behind him to the post.
From over where the coronel stopped, Jefe Castro heard laughter. There were six men there, all in DGI uniform. These men were soon to shoot him and hand Cuba over to the norteamericanos.
As he waited for them to do as he had said and get on with it, Jefe Castro reflected on how when his day had started only a few hours ago, he led this country and these men should have served his every whim. That, however, was before bombshell after bombshell had come with the revelation made about a great betrayal and then the gunfire leading up to these last moments of his life.
*
After sleeping at the home of a loyal but retired military officer, Jefe Castro had meetings in the city of Matanzas with military, political and DGI figures being brought together so he could listen to them. There had been many subjects up for discussion ranging from anti-invasion measures being prepared, the ongoing civil strife across much of the island nation and incoming information concerning what the norteamericanos were up to when it came to his failed attempt to engage in dialogue with them.
He had been eager to find out just what the United States were thinking when they had either kidnapped or killed his diplomat which had been sent to Jamaica several days ago.
The Cuban Revolutionary Armed Forces were hurting but there were still troops ready to defend the nation. All around the nation’s shores and inland through airports and airbases – clear invasion targets – troops were dug-in with tanks and artillery ready to support them. Those in the south had been hit by nuclear weapons and casualties had been heavy but they were still capable; those elsewhere had been bombed by aircraft and shelled by warships yet they were ready to fight back. Armoured forces were hidden inland ready to rush forward, even under air attack, and drive back an invasion. Whether it was Havana or Guantanamo Bay, or anywhere else, Cuba would fight to stop the country being conquered by the norteamericanos. There were reports that the United States had few troops available themselves to make a success on their own so there was the expectation that they would be joined by traitors from Florida armed as paramilitaries. Other information said that Mexico or Venezuela – lackeys of the norteamericanos – might sent troops too.
Regardless, an invasion would be beaten back at its beachheads. Cuban troops would fight to defend their nation.
Those men on the frontlines were ready to fight though behind them in many towns and cities – Havana the clear example but Matanzas an exception – there was still chaos. Rioting and criminality was rife among civilians. There was no outright rebellion against the regime Jefe Castro led but scenes of chaos instead. Security forces had lost control in so many places and they would need troops to help them restore order, troops needed on the beaches. Air attacks which had been followed by power and food shortages, plus the actions of troublemakers, had brought this about. Thousands, maybe tens of thousands, were dead and mob rule was in-place but he was assured that it could be brought under control once troops were eventually released. Those people were interested in self-gratification rather than overthrowing the regime even if they fought against security forces. Moreover, when the invasion came, those people would remember their patriotism and join the fight to defend Cuba too.
His briefers on this won over Jefe Castro’s scepticism on that as they affirmed to him that that situation was something that could be recovered from.
When Jefe Castro had been told what had actually happened to his diplomat sent to Jamaica, not what he had been first told had taken place, he had thunderstruck at the truth of the matter. He had been unable to speak. He had broken out in a cold sweat. He had felt his hands shake. Rage had come to him next.
The betrayal…
His man hadn’t even made it to the aircraft, let alone flown to Montego Bay to speak with the norteamericanos. The diplomat, his staff, his escort and the convoy of vehicles had all just plain disappeared. There had been no air attack or commando raid. They had just vanished with no one knowing anything about it.
Everything that Jefe Castro had been told before about the norteamericanos betraying the deal arranged through the Swiss for talks on neutral ground had been a lie. The lie had been told by his countrymen too.
After the last meeting, Jefe Castro had spoken alone with several of his senior surviving generals. He had asked them first whether their public confidence was the same as in private: could an invasion be beaten back? Yes, they told him, it could be done. The norteamericanos had most of their troops in Europe and in Korea: what they had available to use against Cuba was of little consequence. When forced to rely upon surrogates, that would cause the failure of any invasion. The Cuban Army was professional, well-trained and well-armed. Massive losses would be taken, but they would beat back an invasion even if it came with use of tactical nuclear weapons. What the generals did fear though was what was going on in urban areas. They were wholly unconvinced that the loss of control in so many areas wasn’t important. The trouble had been spreading since the first days of the war following the air strikes on Havana and elsewhere. It had to be stopped and there were troops available to do that.
Jefe Castro had promised that he would look into that and give an answer very soon. His generals had tried to push him into instant authorisation, but his mind was on the betrayal made against him. He had asked them about that because he had long since given up trusting the words of the DGI after so many of their people had been shown to be disloyal. Who was behind the disappearance of his diplomat where his efforts to bring an end to this war had been so thoroughly sabotaged as they had been? Was the DGI behind this and were they working with the Soviets again?
His generals didn’t know. They should have known because all of Cuba was under martial law but they admitted that both the DGI and KGB personnel with the Soviet presence in the country had a lot of influence in many places. They spoke to Jefe Castro of moving against the DGI after the war with the norteamericanos ended… and then forcing the Soviets out too, hopefully without bloodshed. Asked why those spies, domestic and foreign, would have done what they did, the generals told their commander-in-chief that they didn’t know why but they would find out when they had those who were working against Cuba in their custody!
After those talks, when coming out of Matanzas in a what should have been a well-protected convoy, that protection had been lacking.
Jefe Castro had had little idea of what had been going on. There had been gunfire, explosions, gunfire and more explosions. His bodyguards had given their all trying to save him but they and his staff all lost their lives. He had been miraculously unhurt among all of the shooting. One of his aides, a junior Cuban Army officer, had offered to shoot him so he wouldn’t fall into the captivity of the ‘norteamericanos’ alive: the thinking than had been that it was a United States military operation.
No, he had told the primer teniente (first lieutenant), he would make a run for it and fight on. He and Fidel had fought from the mountains against Batista and he still had fight in him even now. Moments later, when Jefe Castro and several men started to make a run for it someone had screamed ‘gas!’ and then he had passed out, shamefully soiling himself as he did so.
*
Jefe Castro didn’t understand why they were going through all of this.
The coronel was the only senior man here: there was no one of higher rank in view. There were no cameras nor witnesses. He hadn’t been given a drumhead trial with charges read and a sentence given.
Why the ceremony of a firing squad? They surely could have just shot him beside the road, that would have been easier, yes?
But here they had him tied up, a blindfold turned down with scorn, and the tradition of an execution in this fashion as if it was for someone’s benefit. It really didn’t make sense.
He was trying to figure out the ‘why’ – who this was for, what would happen afterwards and why had he been betrayed as he had – when that coronel starting issuing orders for the men to raise their rifles. Jefe Castro tried to think of something to shout at them. He was framing his words to call them agents of the norteamericanos and traitors to Cuba but the rifle shots came first. He was distracted though by his fears of Cuba left without his and brother’s guidance.
How could Cuba survive?
Pain and then darkness and then nothing.
March 26th 1990 Husterhoeh Kaserne, Pirmasens, Rhineland-Palatinate, West Germany
‘Springtime for Kryuchkov:
I was never a member of the K.G.B. I only followed orders. I had nothing to do with the war. I didn’t even know there was a war on. We served in the back, right across from Poland. All we heard was Chopin… Chop, Chop, Chopping.’
Schwarzkopf had heard other variants of the same little ditty before. This evening, at his intelligence briefing, one of the officers assigned to hunt down the KGB had his own spin on it, changing the end. He allowed himself to raise a smile though a couple of the others present let out a laugh: the British spook who had done his own impression of Franz Liebkind had been funny.
SACEUR asked what was still called the Arnhem Team – extended from its earlier mission – as to whether there were any captured KGB personnel who had admitted what they had done. Were there any ones willing the confess their own guilt? No, came the response: those KGB people in NATO detention were all still claiming that they had done nothing wrong and it was all the fault of everyone else. They were angels, they were saints and they were all opposed to the numerous war crimes committed by others.
From out of still occupied areas of West Germany where occupying forces were surrounded, there were KGB officers who were being nabbed when they tried to disguise their identities. Trickery and deception was used a lot and there had to be some who got away undetected (such as those from Arnhem) but the expanded force of spooks and military personnel hunting them was getting most now. The big Hannover Salient and the Hamburg-Jutland Pocket were both doomed and those inside knew that. There were others who fled but it was the KGB people who had most attention focused upon them. Schwarzkopf’s own desire to see justice done, in addition to the political will from on high, was driving this.
Moving on to a different matter, the briefing SACEUR was being given turned to a new source of intelligence. Details were left out for Schwarzkopf and his staff but he was told some non-specifics about Barefoot. The CIA was being supplied with intelligence from the Israeli Mossad which originally came from Poland: it was not a variant of the CIA’s Rainbow/Replay intelligence.
Barefoot was saying that Soviet forces inside East Germany were pulling back to the Polish border. Soviet forces were moving, not East German forces. Berlin was being abandoned by the Soviet Army and left to East German forces to defend their capital and occupied West Berlin: most of the rest of East Germany was being given up too. This was all meant to be temporary, the Soviets were telling themselves – oh, and the East Germans when they got around to dropping that bombshell on them –, and the supposed plan was that eventually when the tide of war turned their way they would retake lost territory.
Yeah, okay…
The intelligence on this was a day or two old from source but it had already been confirmed by aerial reconnaissance and signals interception. SACEUR’s own assets had started to detect odd movements of enemy forces and now there was this intelligence asset who said that it was a deliberate decision made at the very top. What Soviet forces could pull back were cutting and running though those who couldn’t retreat were being told to hold until relieved: this included those in those big pockets long out of hope.
Schwarzkopf asked exactly where the Soviets were meant to be moving to according to this Barefoot character. His own information showed signs of movements towards the East German-Polish border to the northeast and southeast: there was nothing directly behind Berlin. Barefoot had told the CIA that there were meant to be Polish troops which could come across in the centre; what Polish troops, SACEUR’s own intelligence chief asked before he could. That CIA briefer said that that information had yet to come but their own military analysts were at a loss to answer that as well.
This aside, an answer to a question that would be important at a later stage, the Soviets were out in the open and moving. Schwarzkopf knew where they were going – roughly – too. That was what he needed to know for now to send in air attacks. Soviet later intentions mattered for naught if those forces could be battered from the air and had their (already-weak) combat potential curtailed. SACEUR intended to see that this happened.
Following that intelligence brief, Schwarzkopf spoke with several key subordinates in command positions: those at the head of air, ground and naval forces throughout the European war theatre. He had his own operations staff and competent briefers though hearing from those others directly dealing with the continuous ongoing fighting was important to him. Their concerns, needs and ‘feel’ for how the war was going were regarded by SACEUR as key to allowing him to effectively do his job. His decision was always final, naturally, but he asked their opinions on many things because they were far more involved that he was.
Then it was to the orders group here at his underground headquarters near the Saarland he went.
Schwarzkopf was shown the maps and graphs of the status of his forces and where they were: there was the same information given about enemy forces too. In some places the frontlines had moved since he had last seen the maps though in others they hadn’t. The information on the enemy was not guesswork yet not established fact either. There were things he was pleased with and others he was displeased to see and hear.
Such was war though.
SACEUR’s chief operations officer brought him up to speed on the main aspects of the ongoing fighting. The ‘combat pause’ currently underway on the ground inside East Germany and Czechoslovakia meant that occupied territory was being secured behind the frontlines easier than could be done if the hell-for-leather advances had continued. The frontlines were still moving and there was heavy fighting everywhere, though the enforced slowdown with Eastern Storm had calmed everything. Schwarzkopf had brought forward supply links and shuffled many of his forces around over the past day and a half getting ready to strike forward again: now was the time to get moving.
Orders were issued for the advances to be made to move against Berlin, Leipzig, Dresden and Prague. Those cities were to be driven towards with the first and the last – the East German and Czechoslovak capitals – to be eventually taken and the other two general rather than direct goals. The point was that around them the final resistance in East Germany and western Czechoslovakia, where the enemy really would really fight, could be found. Schwarzkopf had political objectives to fill but there was also the military need to meet opposing forces in battle and defeat them.
The US Third Army and the British-led NORTHAG would advance upon Berlin, moving against it from the west and south respectively.
The US Seventh Army would drive deep into Saxony and towards the Polish border.
The French First Army would launch their attack upon Prague.
When it came to what that Barefoot information had said about Soviet forces in East Germany, SACEUR had considered holding back and seeing how that played out first but when speaking with his subordinates in the field he had realised that that would be a mistake. The intelligence might be wrong – despite CIA assurances – and his forces were ready and eager to go. Every hour they were held back meant further casualties being inflicted. Finish the war off here in Central Europe, he had told himself, but also be prepared to take advantage of that situation. Working from earlier contingency plans, Schwarzkopf now issued instructions for Operation Blue Magic to be readied. This was the codename for the most-recent update to the plan to open the way into Berlin using airborne forces. It was risky, maybe even a disaster in the waiting if things went wrong, but it was doable if most of the defending forces in and immediately around Berlin, those being in the main Soviet, up and walked away. Ground forces would have to link up with airborne forces fast yet if sufficient planning and fire support was there it would work.
Those assets assigned to Blue Magic were to get ready to commence their assault to take advantage of an enemy withdrawal and when the right moment came it would take place.
Other instructions came from SACEUR too.
Special forces teams, assisted in places by recently combat-trained officers from intelligence agencies (if they were going forward they were going to have to be prepared to fight), were to be sent into Poland. Schwarzkopf had received permission from Powell & the NSC back home and recent information about the situation on the ground in northern & western parts of Poland said that the plans for them stood high chances of success. They would go in to conduct reconnaissance and also try to work with any resistance that they could find.
For several days, since he had been told that the previous moratorium on sending men into Poland had been lifted, SACEUR had waited to give this go ahead. He had heard that there were some who would whisper – never brave enough to speak up in his presence though – that he was opposed to long-range special forces reconnaissance operations and preferred more tactical-focused commando activities because of the bravado shown by some special operations personnel rubbed him up the wrong way. That was false: he wasn’t opposed to such missions on those grounds. For Schwarzkopf, it was the concern that those who were involved in dreaming up such missions, not taking part in or being in the command loop for them, were fools and idiots who gambled away lives. When operations happened under his watch, he was responsible and he wouldn’t sign off on anything stupid.
The Briton DLB had been marshalling NATO special forces ready to go and was sent instructions to send his men in overnight via air and sea. There were many Polish-speaking commandos with those men going deep into enemy territory, including, SACEUR had been told, a substantial number of those from the Polish diaspora in Britain: ancestors of those who’d lost their homeland to the Nazis first and then the Communists.
Up at the very top of Norway, where Soviet forces held onto a small part of Finnmark near Kirkenes and on the Varanger Peninsula, the Norwegians were given permission to attack and retake that last bit of their country under occupation. For a long time, they had been eager to move forward but orders which came from Schwarzkopf were for them not to advance up to the Soviet border. As could be expected, the Norwegians had been hopping mad and edged forward where they could but they needed external support to liberate that bit of their country and that came under NATO command. Moreover, political pressure had kept them from doing so: there hadn’t been a wish to have NATO troops on the frontiers with the Soviet Union there. It had been a decision argued about for a long time and called foolish by many, SACEUR included, but the Norwegians had acquiesced and abided by it.
Now that permission was granted after the politicians had changed their minds when it came to geopolitical thinking on that matter. The lavish air and naval support coming from NATO – primary American – assets in the Barents Sea would assist in the liberation.
From Pirmasens, Schwarzkopf instructed that the planned mission by the battleship USS Iowa and her increased battle-group to make another attack run across the Baltic was a go. There were plenty of targets for guns and missiles to be used against, those further eastwards than were hit last time. Lessons were supposed to have been learnt from what happened before when one of her escorts had been sunk and the Iowa very lucky not to be lost.
The battleship, with air support assigned when and where possible, would be going as far as Kaliningrad where what had been done to the Kola would be repeated (on a smaller scale) there too.
Here in West Germany, behind the main frontlines inside East Germany and Czechoslovakia, SACEUR ordered that the Hannover Salient – a pocket really – be not directly attacked either from the front or the rear. That portion of West Germany in enemy hands which stretched southeast and across the Harz Mountains into East Germany was not somewhere that he wished to see crushed by direct action. There was no combat potential within it from what troops were trapped in there. The fighting men were hungry and German Flu was rife among them. Civilians and POWs were present, and while Schwarzkopf would have liked to have them liberated, the cost of doing so would be too much in terms of lives lost. He had been appointed as SACEUR after the decision had been taken to crush the Netherlands Pocket and been aghast at the losses taken – NATO troops and civilians too – during that fight to the finish there… before the bombshell that was that nuclear blast to signal the end.
That was not going to happen again.
With the Hamburg-Jutland Pocket, there were NATO forces now on the southern edges of Hamburg and more advancing down through Jutland. Again, there were trapped enemy forces who were hungry and incapable of undertaking any offensive action; civilians and POWs were there as well. German Flu hadn’t hit this area but those within were in a sorry state. With more troops available and a lesser number of enemy forces over a wider area than the Hannover Salient, SACEUR gave permission for that attack to continue. He had been concerned that West German and Dutch troops which had come out of the Netherlands would bring German Flu with them but with the disease now being proved to not being infectious that risk was lessened: ill troops were individually pulled out of the attacking forces coming towards Hamburg for treatment.
On the same theme, Schwarzkopf ordered that West German troops whose units had been shattered by surrenders and desertion in the middle of last month and rebuilt since, be sent into action.
So much of the once mighty West German Army had been lost in February before and during the ceasefire. Some units had held together and had been fighting since yet so many more West Germans had been held in the rear unorganised and doing nothing. The situation had meant to be temporary, a week or so, before loyalties were tested and the troops either sent individually to fighting units or re-rolled into non-combat tasks. It had gone on for far too long though and SACEUR had been far from happy with so many non-Germans fighting for West Germany while West German soldiers (tens of thousands of trained men!) weren’t used. Under his instructions, there had been work done to re-form these men into new units with older equipment taken from storage. The West Germans needed logistical support and that had delayed matters greatly. Yet, now there were two corps commands of troops to be added to the fighting strength of NATO’s armies.
Orders were for one of those corps, mainly light and motorised units, to move up to the edges of the Hannover salient and replacing the Belgian I Corps (complete with a British division) allowing that force to join NORTHAG heading for Berlin. The other corps, armoured and mechanised units, was to cross from Bavaria to join the US Seventh Army inside East Germany and pushing forward.
Schwarzkopf had a firm directive to finish this war off and everything he was doing was now to bring about an end to it. Defeat the enemy, and make them know they had lost, he had been told. That order was one he was obeying like his men were obeying his.
END OF PART FIVE
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:46:39 GMT
PART SIX
Forty – Escape From Berlin
March 27th 1990 Occupied West Berlin, West Germany
NATO aircraft were active above Berlin. They were on strike, reconnaissance and counter-air missions. Warsaw Pact aircraft joined them in the skies above both sides of the city, justifying the counter-air aspect of the NATO attacks.
Missiles and shells coming up from the ground, SAMs and anti-aircraft guns, joined both in the sky and they weren’t fussy who they struck against. If it was up above Berlin, there was a good chance that it was going to be shot at.
One of those missiles, a 2K11 Krug (NATO codename SA-4 Ganef) fired by a Soviet Army battery some distance away from the city to the northeast, smashed into one of those Warsaw Pact aircraft: friendly fire. The East German Air Force – Luftstreitkrafte – had been ordered to put fighters above Berlin and use whatever aircraft they had left in their inventory to defend the reunited city. They were down to older aircraft and training jets at this stage of the war. The one struck this morning was a two-seat MiG-21UM Mongol B trainer flying from Rothenburg air base near the Polish border carrying just a pilot and armed with shells for the 23mm cannon plus four air-to-air missiles. The incoming SAM exploded in the fighter’s wake and the detonation of the warhead at once caused immense, fatal damage. The engine went out and so did many flight systems, part of the starboard wing was blown off as well. The pilot ejected as he knew that to do so would mean death for him and after he was blown clear of the MiG-21 he watched as it spun towards the ground below.
Into West Berlin the fighter went.
Angela Merkel and Ursula von der Leyen were among a group of twenty prisoners in KGB custody, male and female, out in a courtyard about to be shot. The two women were handcuffed together and they were waiting to be blindfolded like the others. The firing squad was nearby and there could be heard laughter from among those Russen as they got ready. Neither Merkel the East German nor von der Leyen the West German had met each other until a few moments ago when they were brought out of their cells, handcuffed to one another and led out here into this blood-stained area where they were about to soon join the pile of bodies already present.
Merkel saw it first… whatever it was. She looked up and saw something coming towards her from out of the sky. She lifted her arm, dragging that of the woman beside her upwards too, and tried to shout out a warning. Seconds later, von der Leyen realized that something was falling out of the sky too behind where the KGB firing squad was: she closed her eyes and thought of her children.
A fantastic explosion rocked the KGB detention centre being ‘emptied’ of prisoners who no longer had any appreciable value. Those not killed by the impact of the aircraft and then the detonation of its fuel in a furious blast were either gravely wounded or knocked unconscious.
Upon waking up, Merkel found that the woman who she had been handcuffed to was no longer forcibly attached to her. That woman had the same left forearm wrapped in red-coloured clothing and was doing something to it which caused Merkel sudden immense pain the moment she looked down.
“I’m a doctor; you’re hurt.”
Merkel’s ears were ringing and she felt rather dizzy as she sat up. She wasn’t sure exactly when she had seen or heard.
“Sorry, what did you say?”
“I’m a doctor, I am helping you. I have to stop the bleeding.”
And Merkel finally understood.
“What happened?”
“An explosion… I think.” The way that other woman said it showed displeasure at being interrupted in her work. “Whatever it was, it blew the handcuffs right off. I am fine but you are not.”
Merkel didn’t look down again at her arm, but at the woman beside her. She had no idea who she was. She knew now that she was German by her accent though it sounded like she was from the Federal Republic rather than the Democratic Republic. Around her, she heard screams and crying. There was a horrible smell in the air and a lot of smoke forming. Someone was barking orders in Russian too: orders for men to get their weapons and form up.
“We must leave. We have to run.”
“I need to tend to you first.” Another short-tempered answer, then a softer tone. “I am Ursula. What is your name?”
“Angela. Ursula, there is no time, none at all. The Russen will start shooting us any minute now.”
“No, you must stay still. We will wait here until help comes.”
Merkel tried here best to keep her cool but she understood the urgency. She had to make that clear to this doctor, this Ursula, or they were both about to die when the shooting started again.
“We have to escape right now or we will both be killed here. Come with me, Ursula, or stay here and be killed by these Russen.”
von der Leyen let Angela drag her away. She hadn’t wanted to get up off the ground for she had felt that she would fall down should she have tried to stand but she had been wrong. Her legs hadn’t been numb even though they had felt like it; she had even helped the other women up and to start walking.
Angela led the way and von der Leyen followed in blind hope of freedom from the gunfire which very soon erupted behind them. They went through a door and down a passageway. The injured woman, certainly an Ossie, didn’t know where she was going for they double-backed not once by twice. They both froze and stood against the wall when a terrified guard ran past them: the man in KGB uniform ignored them and shot past as if he was running for his life. Angela carried on, calling after von der Leyen to hurry up, and then they went out another door and across another courtyard. There were bodies stacked there too and blood on the ground. She looked away, staring at Angela’s back, and following her lead.
Then it was out through yet another door and all of a sudden they were out in the open. They were out of the prison! It couldn’t have been that easy, von der Leyen thought, but it seemed that way. Whatever had happened with that explosion had set them free! She dropped to her knees, overcome with relief and called out to Angela.
“Angela, thank you!”
“Get up,” Angela screamed at her, “we must keep going! They’ll be after us. Run with me!”
Like a scolded child, von der Leyen got up. She read the urgency in the face of her savior and responded to the instructions given by standing. She looked around first before moving though.
“We are in Zehlendorf.”
“Where is that?”
“You are an Ossie, are you not? From the Democratic Republic? Zehlendorf is in the southern part of West Berlin.”
“You can show me around after we get further away.”
Angela started to run and von der Leyen followed her. The two women were dressed in rags and barefoot on this cold morning. They were fleeing through occupied West Berlin where there were Soviet and East German forces all around them. If they didn’t very quickly find a change in their circumstances, then they would face death or capture and then death.
This was how their escape from Berlin started though.
March 27th 1990 East Berlin, East Germany
General-Lieutenant Zavarzin couldn’t believe that Berlin was being given up like it was. The capital of the DDR on the eastern side and the propaganda value of holding the western side both had meant something when under Soviet control. But, now they were being abandoned. NATO’s armies could have East Berlin and West Berlin while Soviet troops withdrew from such a doomed fight as one for the city would certainly be.
The East Germans were more than incredulous. They refused to believe it and were adamant that there was some sort of Western deception going on with false orders being transmitted. They came to Zavarzin and his officers and told them that there must be some mistake. Withdraw away to the east? No, move forward into new defensive positions to the west, surely? They were ready to fight for Berlin and wanted the Soviet Army to stand with them. Berlin could be denied to NATO!
Zavarzin had his orders though, those to pull back towards the Polish border. He was here to supervise the temporary withdrawal because currently Berlin was indefensible with the few forces available to defend it. There were reinforcements coming, he told the East Germans, but until they did those currently around Berlin needed to redeploy. Again, following his orders, with a nod and a wink as he pretended that he was acting on his own initiative though, Zavarzin said that if the East Germans wanted to stay and fight for Berlin then he wouldn’t stop them.
Marshal Gromov had chosen him for this job, overseeing the pull-out from Berlin, and instructed him to give the East Germans the impression that he was sympathetic to them and would look the other way. Zavarzin had understood the unsaid meaning behind this and agreed with the thinking: let NATO take their ire out on the East Germans. So he let the East Germans believe that and withdrew Soviet forces – plus supplies, so many of them – out of the city.
Do svidaniya, tovarishchi.
Following a warning order sent out to prepare for redeployment the day before, a final instruction had come last night for all Soviet Army, Soviet Air Force, Soviet Air Defence Force and GRU units within the Berlin area to leave had been issued late last night: the KGB received their own orders. Unit commanders were informed where they were to move to and when. This was sent to combat, combat support and service support units with radio instructions delivered in code and messengers delivering written orders as well.
Regardless, problems had been anticipated even with such firm orders going out and the methods employed to make sure everyone received those instructions. That was where Zavarzin came in: Marshal Gromov had sent him to Berlin to personally make sure that his orders were obeyed. Get everyone and everything out of Berlin, Zavarzin had been told, and do it fast.
What combat forces there were in Berlin were at once moving when the order had been sent to them. The 6th Separate Guards Motorised Rifle Brigade – the ‘liberators of West Berlin’ – and the 58th Separate Tank Regiment were moving straight away with the former heading towards Müncheberg and the latter for Fürstenwalde. The various units of Airborne Troops, which included two divisions and many separate regiments of merged units worn down by battles and their parent divisions defeated as a whole, were on the move too. They were coming out of Berlin by road using their light armoured vehicles and a lot of trucks too, some of them liberated from civilian uses in Berlin. Zavarzin found that artillery, air defence and combat engineering forces were also all on their way to new locations spread along the eastern side of the Odra like the Airborne Troops from Seelow to Eisenhüttenstadt. There were Polish troops which had come across the border and they were on their way to link up with them just inside East Germany.
Aviation forces, which were made up of mainly ground units instead of aircraft which could easily fly away, were also completing their redeployment just as ordered. Maintenance staff, aircraft engineers, flight controllers, radar operators and so on were all doing as they were told and moving east. The GRU had pulled out its people and equipment (radios, computers and signal antennas) just as they were meant too.
However, it was the service support elements inside Berlin which were causing the problems. Marshal Gromov had foreseen this and told Zavarzin that they wouldn’t refuse to obey orders – like he said many East Germans would – but instead there would be technical difficulties everywhere. Those who maintained military equipment and provided the necessary rear-area services weren’t used to rapid movement like others. To pack up all of their equipment and move their men about from where they had gotten comfortable would be delayed by those incapable of responding to orders even when given warning. These were those who hadn’t seen urgency all throughout the war and wouldn’t be able to fathom the need for speed. Zavarzin could expect to be met with obstruction in the form of reasonable delays incurred, he was told, but was not to put up with it.
Soviet forces were conducting their escape from Berlin today and no one was to be left behind.
Travelling across Berlin in one of the HMMWVs that the Americans had left behind – he had no idea where their soldiers had gone, nor the British or French troops here at the start of the war either –, Zavarzin visited the places where there was delay in pulling out. Using the full weight of his personality (get right in their face, as the Americans say, he had been told) and his rank too, Zavarzin got those who were being slow to speed up. He shouted at junior officers and threatened to shoot them himself or even let the KGB find out that they were disobeying orders. He had to relive some officers still and promote those below them: his threats about the Chekists hadn’t been ones he had intended to follow through on so those officers relived of duties joined penal units as privates. What couldn’t be moved in terms of equipment was either to be destroyed in-place with explosives or handed over to any nearby East Germans who wished to stay and defend Berlin.
Zavarzin made sure that ammunition, fuel and food supplies came out though. His orders were that they were to be taken out of the city second only to men. It wasn’t as if much of that was coming across Poland recently and it would all be needed for the fight along the Polish border.
There were a pair of colonels who were under Zavarzin’s supervision also moving through Berlin and they had the task of securing ‘special munitions’: nuclear and chemical weapons. None of those were to be handed over to the East Germans and nor where they to be destroyed either. One of the colonels ran into a problem where they came across nerve gases being handed over to an East German Stasi unit by the KGB. Zavarzin was fast on the scene, racing across the city in his jeep with his escort struggling to catch up, and he put a stop to that. The Chekist had flimsy orders; Zavarzin had the full authority of STAVKA behind him. The artillery and mortar rounds contained that nerve gas went into the custody of his men and a helicopter was called-in to lift them out of the immediate area.
If the East Germans wanted to fight for Berlin then that was fine, they could take the full consequences of NATO retribution. They weren’t doing it with Soviet special munitions though.
While all of this was going on, as Zavarzin was personally pulling the last Soviet forces out of Berlin as they made their escape, he was also in contact with those who had already left and reached the new defensive positions away to the east.
Those were positioned from up at Eberswalde-Finow, down across the Barnim Plateau, through Strausberg, to Fürstenwalde and then along the Spree River as far as Lübben. There were Polish forces which had moved across from their own country over the Odra and had taken up position there. Either side of this area where those from Berlin were falling back to, from the Baltic coast and down to the Czechoslovak frontier, there were further defensive positions where more men were withdrawing into.
Those in the centre of that defensive line run inside East Germany to stop NATO entry into Poland were getting into position ready to hold it. The troops which came out of Berlin earlier in the day were arriving just as they were meant to. There had come some air attacks upon them as they moved out of Berlin but the damage hadn’t been that strong; Zavarzin was told that NATO bombers were active to the north, the south and the west instead of to the east of the city. Soon enough, that would change but for now he had to complete this redeployment of all those out of Berlin, not just those who had been ready to move out.
There was still time to do so before the deadline to complete the evacuation imposed upon him expired. Zavarzin wasn’t one to let down those who gave him orders, not when he believed in them and understood their future implications. He would spend the rest of the day hurrying along those who had no concept of having to do things in a hurry.
March 27th 1990 Frankfurt an der Oder, Brandenburg, East Germany
The conspiracy against the Soviets – and the East Germans too – undertaken by the Polish WSW would in later years be called the ‘White Eagle’ resistance: using the national symbol of Poland as a name. There was a lot of romanticizing of what occurred, whitewashing some detractors said. The effects of what the Polish did in acting against what they regarded as their enemies, not their military opponents in NATO, were devastating overall and gave Poland back its pride. However, at the time, when the Poles did turn against the Soviets, the motives later depicted weren’t those of all of those involved at the time. Dashing, honest heroes there were few of. There were good and bad people part of the conspiracy… and a lot of the latter too.
The WSW had to work with what they had though. They were a small organisation focused upon military intelligence and internal security within the Polish Armed Forces. They were not a true intelligence agency with unlimited reach and immense power. Many of those bound in loyalty to the White Eagle acts were coerced or tricked into helping. The self-proclaimed patriots at the top had their own reasons too, many selfish even if they were fighting for Poland overall. The patriotism expressed shouldn’t be regarded as the only reason for the WSW stabbing their erstwhile allies in the back like they did.
‘For Poland first, for me second.’
The WSW had had a plan. That plan came with a timescale so that they could be ready to act as they wanted to. Their enemies, the Soviets, didn’t cooperate with that timescale.
The KGB started to get wind that something was going on in Poland. Krakow had just been the start and following the wave of attacks there in that city there had come others spread across the country. The transport links were shut down by sabotage and overt acts of terrorism. It became apparent that there was widespread coordination. When using the SB (Poland’s internal security & intelligence agency) to assist them in tracking down those responsible, the KGB started to come across links with Polish military personnel to the acts working against the war effort. The WSW had people in the working for them within the SB and they reacted fast, maybe carelessly, but because they saw the need.
In Warsaw, the KGB chief there responsible for security throughout Poland was assassinated in a gruesome murder. Evidence was planted to blame others for the act but the White Eagle had been caught glimpse of. The WSW had understood it was running out of time and would need to do what it must with haste.
Contact was established with the West.
The SB had been engaged in a delicate dance with an Israeli connection at the behest of the KGB where they were trying for some time to feed strategic disinformation to the West using this conduit. That connection was turned for WSW use and real intelligence sent to establish bona files: what the CIA would call Barefoot when it was passed on. The Poles planned to talk more with the West and negotiate from a position of friendship with them at a later stage.
Where Polish low-grade reserve troops had been formed up into the misnomer that was the Polish Third Combined Arms Army to be sent into East Germany, the WSW attached several of their people who were part of their conspiracy in headquarters roles there. The troops were meant to be deploying just inside East Germany to link up with Soviet forces protecting the Odra-Neisse frontier against a NATO invasion: those troops would follow their standing orders but with people there ready to make sure that when new orders came those would be obeyed instead of Soviet ones.
As part of White Eagle, the WSW became aware of exactly where the plans were for to send an East German government-in-exile to inside Poland. They knew there would be East German leaders heading for the Soviet military base at Legnica and their method of travel as well as their timescale for movement across by air. The Polish patriots (and others) weren’t willing to see a German presence such as that on their soil. The Soviets were one thing, but Germans…
The motives behind what the WSW were doing in turning against the Soviets were wide and varied. They wanted to take their country out of the war and not see it fought over. There was hatred of the Soviets and the East Germans but more than that was a desire to not see the country a war zone more than it already was where full-scale ground combat would replace the limited NATO air attacks.
White Eagle was all about stopping a repeat of the mid-Forties.
What had happened across in Germany, east and west, had been witnessed by the Poles. The WSW had seen for itself the fantastic defeats incurred, which included the destruction of most of the professional elements of the Polish Armed Forces in battles with NATO. They had then watched as NATO’s armies drove eastwards and heading for Poland. As the Soviets prepared to fight to defend the East German–Polish border, and fight across Poland too, the WSW got wind of their plans for how that would take place. Conventional and unconventional warfare would take place as the Soviets defended their own country on Polish soil; the latter included not just chemical weapons being used in abundance but also thermonuclear ones too.
The Poles were aware of German Flu. They had access to their own information which pointed to the true causes of that rather than the official propaganda line that it was a NATO biological weapon. They feared how it would debilitate the Polish people and that further down the line that it would be fatal even if it currently wasn’t. Full-scale fighting across Poland, added with the effects of chemical & nuclear weapons, would be fatal for millions of Poles.
The East Germans were another factor with their plans for the ‘temporary’ seat of government in Legnica after their escape from Berlin. To give the East Germans legitimacy, the thinking on the part of the WSW was that there would be a move to declare the military base, maybe part of that town, maybe all of it, maybe an area around it, sovereign territory of the German Democratic Republic. That was where it would start with the Germans, the Poles feared: afterwards they would want a greater area of sovereign Polish soil which had been rightfully recovered in 1945. They were on the run, but the WSW was not going to give them comfort and shelter.
And then there was the Soviets and how they had made Poland their plaything to be fucked over again and again.
What had happened in the past had happened in the past: that was how the WSW saw it. Recent events though, starting with how the KGB destroyed the transition to democracy in Poland late last year had been key to the beginnings of the White Eagle. Government and opposition figures had been illegally arrested and taken out of Poland to Siberia… to be shot. In their place had come puppets who had first ordered paramilitary forces and then Polish troops to shoot their own people. The Soviets had been giving the overall instructions and making sure that they were obeyed too: those who refused to what they said faced the same fate as those killed last October. The Soviets had then killed their own leader, created a crisis with the West where they blamed them for Gorbachev’s death and then launched a war against NATO. Poland had been dragged into that and many lives lost. Every day that that war continued, Poland faced destruction in nuclear war either at the hands of the Soviets, NATO or both.
No more could this carry on, had been the decision: Poland had to stop this and if no one else was going to then the WSW would.
*
Frankfurt an der Oder sat on the border and was just inside East Germany; the Polish town of Słubice was on the other side. The road and rail connections had been important for the war effort and been struck at many times. Dummy bridges had been hit by NATO aircraft first when that deception had held before later the real fixed crossings had been knocked down. Further temporary bridges and ferries had been bombed afterwards from the air. During those air attacks, civilians in both Frankfurt and Słubice had been killed as the damage done had extended beyond the bridges & ferries as well as the links to the highway and the railway lines beyond either side.
Still though, the crossing sites were being used for movement of men and equipment both ways. Those going west though, Polish troops heading into East Germany, were having problems moving as fast as they were meant too… creative problems.
With the Polish Third Army were two Polish Army junior officers (of many) working for the conspiracy which was White Eagle. Major Franciszek Gągor and Captain Tadeusz Buk and had been ‘co-opted’ by the WSW into serving the interests of Poland, not the Soviets. They were attached to the field army command staff in lower-level roles with Soviet-issued orders to make sure that the five light infantry divisions got across into East Germany to defend the border on the western side of the river frontiers. Both of them were following different orders though. The deception weighed heavy on them both as they knew that their fellow Poles would suffer in some ways, but they would be acting for Poland rather than any one person. Each had committed themselves to the cause before they linked up with the troops supposed to be moving into East Germany and were following those.
Major Gągor was a career staff officer. He had trained Polish troops due to take part in international peacekeeping operations under UN auspices and recently taken part in one himself to the Golan. His current posting with the Polish Third Army was in logistics to oversee supplies going forward for the infantry divisions to use when the expectation was that they would see combat.
From the WSW, he had received instructions to make sure that those supplies didn’t go through. They were to be sent to the wrong place and moved to the correct location. They were to be lost and then eventually found again. Slow everything down he was told and without the ammunition and fuel stocks, the Polish Third Army wouldn’t cross the border in a timely fashion as envisioned by the Soviets. Every legitimate excuse which could be given was to be put into play to bring everything to a halt.
Moreover, Gągor was told about the bridging units coming forward before they arrived within the area near the crossing points to be used. The WSW told him misdirecting them and then making sure that their new instructions were muddled too was important. As few troops of the field army as possible were to get over into East Germany and this could be done by physically stopping them from getting over the River Oder. Working from inside Frankfurt, Gągor was doing just that. There were five divisions, all light units, but only one, and an incomplete one, was going to get into East Germany by the end of today.
The Soviet plan called for three to be across from Poland already, not one.
Captain Buk, a tanker now assigned to coordinate the efforts of the lone tank battalions assigned to each infantry division (instead of a full regiment and with old tanks too), was given a more pressing task and one he didn’t expect. Rather than slow down the movement of men like his co-conspirator was, he was ordered by his WSW contact to leave the army command post and go out to supervise the movement of some of those tanks over the Oder.
In doing so he was to assassinate Generaloberst Horst Brünner.
The East German military officer led the PHV: the Main Political Administration of the East German Armed Forces, which had spent the pre-war period arresting hundreds of Nationale Volksarmee soldiers who had had a conscience. He was on his way to Poland and coming through Frankfurt, travelling in a road convoy where the colonel-general was meant to be well protected. Kill him and those with him, Buk had been told, and before he could reach Poland to get as far as Legnica presumably to make sure what military presence came with the East German leadership was ‘politically loyal’. While Buk wasn’t told the reasoning behind his order to kill the man, he could assume that it was to slow down the movement into Poland of the East German leadership and by killing Brünner that would be achieved.
There was a terrible ‘accident’ right near a pontoon bridge. A trio of T-54 tanks were given an order to fire their guns to make sure they worked. The firing was meant to be done with blank rounds just as others had done before and after them. Shells – live ones! – from those particular tanks blasted apart the East German column and killed a lot of those in the vehicles after they had swept through Frankfurt and started crossing the river. Brünner was among the dead in the accident which occurred on a bridge (destroying it too). Apologies were made and punishments of those involved promised. Buk had followed his orders from on high and kept his own hands clean of direct involvement and was pleased to see that while the East Germans were mad, the Soviets hadn’t really given a damn about the death of an East German general: they had more important matters to deal with.
These were the first two acts where the WSW began attacking Soviet interests outside of Poland itself. They were just the beginning and only the warm up of what was to come. When the right moment arrived, when all of the necessary preparations were made at home, and before the suspicious KGB could catch up with them, anyone looking back at what happened today in Frankfurt would see just what had begun.
Those who believed that they were fighting for the greater interests of Poland above immediate concerns were moving the final pieces into place. They would make sure that the Soviet-led defensive line strung along the border with East Germany was fatally weakened when Polish troops which had made the journey would be ordered to fall back to link up with those who had been ‘delayed’. They would strike all across Poland hitting KGB and Soviet security forces adding to the already done destruction against the transport network linking the Soviet Union with East Germany.
And they would too get rid of the subservient, traitorous fellow Poles of theirs keeping the country in this war at the behest of the Soviets. There was a blood reckoning coming in Warsaw.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:48:41 GMT
Forty–One – Combat Jumps
March 28th 1990 Berlin
NATO paratroopers dropped into Berlin ahead of the ground forces still some distance away.
The US Third Army and NORTHAG – multi-corps commands – had started moving a couple of hours before the airborne troops made their combat jumps, attacking when it was still dark while the paratroopers leapt from planes just as dawn broke, but the heavy forces were estimated to still be several days away. The risk of sending in both the Allied I Airborne Corps and the US XVIII Airborne Corps into Berlin with ground forces far away was judged to be worth it though. East German forces left behind when their Soviet ‘allies’ had run away were believed to be incapable of defending the city against even the light forces sent against them. They were still in shock and not organised to defend the whole city – only parts of it – so Operation Pegasus (previously Operation Blue Magic) got underway to take the German capital.
To the west and southwest of Berlin, inside and outside the city, those out to conquer and liberate both East Berlin and West Berlin started landing this morning.
British Paras and West German Fallschirmjager were dropped by a flotilla of transport aircraft in two locations just on the outskirts of West Berlin and just inside it too. The 5th Airborne and 26th Fallschirmjager Brigades were veterans of fighting across Norway and through northern West Germany and into East Germany as well. The men were tired but still capable. Their morale remained high too, especially the West Germans who had been through so many ordeals like their country had.
RAF Gatow was where the Paras landed. 1 PARA and then 2 PARA soon afterwards dropped all around the small British military base which had been one of the very first locations to see fighting when West Berlin was invaded early last month. The airfield was currently undefended and there had been much damage done there not so much from that initial fight when motorised Grenztruppen had overrun it but afterwards when NATO aircraft had bombed it. Yet, SAS reconnaissance on the ground and analysis of photographic intelligence gained from a low-flying jet had shown that a lot of the damage was superficial and there wasn’t much to hinder flight operations if combat engineers could fast get to work. Airborne-trained Royal Engineers with 9 Para Squadron were on the ground behind 2 PARA and started their work straight away.
As to the Paras themselves, they found themselves soon out of anyone to fight. There had been some East German Air Force personnel present and also a KdA detachment to support them, but no one else. The mission of those men was to defend the airfield and the Paras regarded the East Germans of having done a very bad job of that! Their defensive positions had been terrible, they had almost no ammunition and they had folded at the first sign of a proper attack. Rounding up prisoners and sorting out the wounded, the Paras tried not to mock their opponents for being unworthy opponents but it was hard not to. They had been hyped up by their pre-mission brief telling them that RAF Gatow would be well-defended by those here even if there would be no outside support for said defenders. That had been false and all the preparation, including the parachute assault of two battalions conducting combat jumps – dropping from low altitude laden with weapons and gear –, had been for naught. Still, the airfield was in their hands and there was rapid work underway to get its runaway open: the Paras weren’t the only ones to be coming here, the rest of their brigade (Gurkhas and men from the Royal Regiment of Fusiliers) would be first and then more forces from their parent corps. They were quickly given orders by their brigade commander to move out and establish outward defensive positions. Aggressive patrols were authorized too so that the Paras would come across any further opponents before they got mind to do anything foolish like try to retake RAF Gatow.
With the West Germans, the Fallschirmjager had dropped over the nearby Döberitzer Heath. This military proving ground lay just outside the boundaries of West Berlin, almost within spitting distance of RAF Gatow. Two battalions came out of transport aircraft with more to follow them (another of paratroopers and the other of airmobile mountain troops) landing atop the open ground on the southern part of the heath. Interference from wind had been expected but underestimated: a lot of the Fallschirmjager missed their designated landing spots by a wide margin. It took some time for the men to form-up and recover weapons containers. Thankfully, there was an absolute lack of enemy resistance to hamper this… despite the West Germans being happy to oblige anyone who wanted to fight them.
The 26th Brigade headquarters command detachment which came in with the arriving paratroopers quickly established that there was no need for them to make a fast attack across to RAF Gatow to support the British there. The airfield was already in their hands and the West Germans were free of that priority mission assigned to them and therefore at once preparations were started to conduct the secondary task: move southwest and in the general direction of Potsdam. The city was still some distance away for the Fallschirmjager to make on foot and while the British Paras, plus the following Belgians and Americans which were also with the Allied I Airborne Corps, were going to push forward eastwards, the West Germans would be marching on Potsdam. Defensive positions had been set up by East German paramilitaries to the west and south of Potsdam, facing the threat direction from heavy NATO ground units but there was almost nothing in the way of the Fallschirmjager now behind the city.
The two landings, RAF Gatow and the Döberitzer Heath, made by the British and the West Germans were designed to allow for a fallback to be made if stronger-than-expected resistance was met in opening-up the enemy from inside by landing in their rear. This represented the thinking on the command staff of the Allied I Airborne Corps as to having a back-up plan in case something major went wrong. Heavy opposition in previous battles had been encountered where what was once the Allied Mobile Force had met the enemy yet defeat had always been avoided with this level of preparation for the worst being regarded by the command staff as being the main reason for that.
The West Germans had been given the task of securing the rear following their initial landing as they first moved in the opposite direction to the planned corps attack towards Berlin. The plan was though that they would later take part moving into Berlin like everyone else. NATO troops from the ACE Brigade–Group which formed the rest of the West German 1st Fallschirmjager Division would be arriving with the Belgian Para–Commando Regiment (not assigned to a division) and the Americans with their 10th Light Infantry Division. RAF Gatow was the airhead through which they coming in and afterwards the attack would get moving first in a northern direction along the edges of West Berlin up towards Spandau due to a wide stretch of the Havel blocking a direct assault into the city proper.
In Spandau and the nearby town of Falkensee, the enemy was known to be present. There was a regiment of East German Army reservists in armoured vehicles with tanks and artillery also there. Grenztruppen soldiers would be supporting them in addition to KdA militia, armed paramilitary police and even armed teenagers with the FDJ (Free German Youth). The lighter units would be dug-in within the urban terrain while the mobile units were expected to fight out in the open. The Allied I Airborne Corps was anticipating a very tough fight before it could push forward into the main part of West Berlin. They wanted to get there before the tankers and the mechanised infantry racing to catch up with them though and so would go right at the enemy as quickly as possible.
While the Europeans conducted their combat jumps to obtain a main and backup landing site, the Americans with their part of Operation Pegasus went for two lead objectives. They wanted to overwhelm the enemy and attack outwards from both initial airheads through which assault elements would take and then see exploitation from follow-on forces.
The US XVIII Airborne Corps sent their paratroopers to Schönefeld Airport outside of Berlin and Tempelhof Airport inside West Berlin. The 82nd Airborne Division along with Rangers and Green Berets went into each location in coordinated drops above them. Some men landed directed into the airports themselves while larger numbers landed on the ground just outside each and moved in to secure them from defenders. There was East German resistance on the ground, at Tempelhof more than Schönefeld, but the losses taken on the ground were less than those incurred in the air. Coming from a considerable distance away to the east where Soviet forces which had just pulled out of Berlin could be found, long-range SAMs struck several of the big US Air Force transports laden with assaulting troops. S-300 missiles, strategic-level weapons better known by their NATO codename ‘SA-10 Grumble’, took out five aircraft: all C-130 Hercules’. Men died in the skies high above those killed on the ground below.
One brigade each from the 82nd Airborne Division hit both airports. The division’s peacetime third brigade had spent the whole of the war on the Korea Peninsula. Those two brigades both had strong support from attached special forces units plus also the addition of light armour including national guardsmen in units from Georgia & Oklahoma in their ‘infantry anti-tank’ battalions consisting of HMMWVs laden with TOW missiles. Other armoured support, which could be para-dropped like the HMMWVs, were M-551 Sheridan tracked armoured vehicles. ‘Purple Heart Boxes’ these had been called due to previous occasions during the war where when they were hit and burnt fiercely taking the lives of those inside or leaving any survivors horribly wounded. There were only forty left with the battalion (3-73 ARM) assigned to the 82nd Airborne Division after another dozen had earned their unfortunate nickname in the fighting across Thüringen. The big guns carried, the mobility of a tracked vehicle over a wheeled one, the ability to be dropped from above and the protection from lighter weapons meant that they came into Berlin today even if many in the US Army wanted to see them melted down for scrap. When faced with less-capable enemy armour and not more-modern tanks, the M-551s were a fearsome opponent and they also came with machine guns alongside the 152mm cannons mounted. Fighting in Berlin was expected to be tough and the HMMWVs carrying weapons would be vulnerable (as already shown also in Thüringen) to any enemy fire.
Both Schönefeld and Tempelhof had war damage done to them: the former from NATO bombing only and the latter from air attacks plus earlier ground fighting in the first week of the war. The runaways were damaged and many facilities at each wrecked. Combat engineers came in behind the lead troops as they also made combat jumps to start getting working to turn each into an airhead deep inside the enemy’s rear. The Americans planned to use Tempelhof more as a forward site for smaller aircraft with Schönefeld handling larger aircraft. Even before the Grumble missiles took out almost half a dozen transport aircraft, it was expected that there would be a considerable SAM threat over Berlin. When it came to Tempelhof, urban terrain surrounded that airport: providing perfect coverage for anti-air fire plus possible mortar attacks too. Once both were secure and air operations could be conducted, either airport first though Schönefeld preferred, the 101st Air Assault Infantry Division would be coming in along with corps assets including the 29th Light Infantry Division now replacing the 9th Motorized Infantry Division within the US XVIII Airborne Corps.
When fighting around both airports this morning after the initial engagements to take them, the American paratroopers came up against East German opposition just as they were told they would find. Grenztruppen and KdA forces were met around Schönefeld while more civilian militia were met inside West Berlin the Americans also came up against what they would start to call ‘toy soldiers’.
Soldiers with 1-505 INF (part of the 3d Brigade, 82nd Airborne Division) were moving southwards from Tempelhof in the general direction of Schönefeld off in the distance. There was a plan for a proper link-up between the two airports where a thunder-run would commence – something done in Vietnam – using M-551s and HMMWVs moving at speed taking on all comers but before then the paratroopers were on foot with vehicles in support of them clearing a path slowly forward as the area under American control was carefully expanded. Sniping, RPG attacks and roadblocks manned by paramilitaries with rifles were engaged before the Americans met vehicles carrying East German Army guardsmen: the Friedrich Engels Guard Regiment. This was only a ceremonial and static guard unit pre-war of seven infantry companies of dismounted soldiers known more for their parades rather than anything else. Much had changed since October though including a small expansion before the war and a larger once since it had begun, where the newer elements (five more companies of riflemen) were better-armed and deployed into West Berlin as a propaganda move. The East Germans were just as surprised to see the Americans where they were as the invading paratroopers were. A violent clash on West Berlin’s streets occurred in the Britz region.
The East Germans shot first and their aim was terrible. The gunners mounting the machine guns on the Hungarian-built SPW four-wheeled armoured vehicles sent their bullets high or to the side. There were a lot of bullets and almost all of them came nowhere near the Americans. In their new uniforms and issued with weapons, these East Germans weren’t real soldiers (they had less than three months training) and they were up against some of the very best that the US Army had who were veterans of many recent fights. The Americans shot back and their aim was true. Dragon missiles blew up the vehicles and the ill-trained toy soldiers were gunned down when the American paratroopers used fire-and-maneuverer to get all around and behind them. Fighting the militia units had been frustrating as they hadn’t been out in the open but these toy soldiers, representatives of the occupation of West Berlin, were just what they wanted to engage.
The East German company was massacred and the few survivors ran.
When ‘mopping up’ afterwards though, the Americans found that there were more than just East German military casualties which had been inflicted in the fighting. West Berlin was home to friendly civilians held hostage here and a lot of them had been caught up in the short but vicious fight. Too much fire support had been used by the Americans in addition to the East Germans firing wild: there were dead and wounded friendly civilians everywhere. It was a worrying sign of things to come where it was known that despite the sudden pull-out of the Soviets, there were still a lot of fighting to be done against East Germans throughout Berlin where there were so many civilians present.
March 28th 1990 Berlin
When the Soviets left Berlin, the defensive position of the city – which had never been strong enough to realistically stop NATO anyway – was fatally weakened. There had been no warning of what was coming for the East Germans: all of a sudden their allies just abandoned them with vague excuses and empty promises. The withdrawal cost a significant chunk of the combat strength previously in-place in the form of the Soviet troops who pulled out, all of whom were well-trained and veteran soldiers, but more than that there were gaps torn open everywhere in the arrangement to cover avenues of approach.
The East Germans were still struggling to cover these holes opened up and also try to make up the manpower issues when NATO airborne forces made their combat jumps into the city.
The thinking was that there would still be a few days left before the invaders poured across the Fläming Heath and towards the city. Those armoured forces were immensely powerful but the East Germans had planned to fight them on the edges of the city, even if they came in from several directions, and bring them to a crawl on the edges of Berlin using first the suburban and then the urban terrain to their advance. NATO would be averse to casualties among the West Berlin population and it was among those civilians which the East Germans planned to fight among.
But the invading armies of the West had refused to cooperate with those plans with what they did. Whether the arrival of so many paratroopers ahead of the heavy forces could have been stopped should the Soviets have stayed, even reinforced the city with other troops, was something that the East Germans didn’t have time to debate. They were caught by surprise for the second time in two days and had to suddenly fight for what they believed was rightfully theirs (a united Berlin) before they had expected to, in a fashion they hadn’t planned for and all by their lonesome.
Unfortunately, there was no one who they could commiserate with and tell their tales of woe and how all unfair this was…
As was the case with the Poles too, the East German military had lost almost all of its professional strength in the fighting already; the Nationale Volksarmee had too seen the destruction of large numbers of their reserve forces, especially the better-trained elements. What they were left with were a very few regulars, reservists of low quality and paramilitary & militia forces. To make matters worse for the East Germans, in spite of all the destruction taken to their armed forces, there were still some other units who hadn’t been smashed to pieces in open battle with NATO through the last seven weeks but who were trapped in large pockets of resistance far away from Berlin where the regime was making a last stand of their own and needed those in Hamburg and near Hannover.
To defend the city which had been reunited by force of arms, the East Germans in-place wore a wide variety of uniforms. There was meant to be a higher command to whom they all answered to… in theory anyway. These men were part of different organisations who certainly knew the consequences of Berlin falling along with East Germany too and should have put differences aside for the time being. Unfortunately, they didn’t do that because being sensible was too much of an easy choice to make. Once again though, it wouldn’t have made a difference overall: the city was still doomed because the oncoming force was so strong and the defenders rather weak.
Of regular soldiers, the East Germans had what was left on the 40th Air Assault Regiment. The paratroopers had taken losses during their combat jumps made during the war and those hadn’t been made up enough to bring the regiment up to anywhere near full pre-war strength. There were the two regiments of guardsmen as well: the Friedrich Engels and the Hugo Eberlein Guard Regiments. These men were not fully-trained for major combat operations: they were static defensive, units good for sentry duties and parades and no more than that.
The 15th & 42nd Motorised Rifle Regiments, high-grade reserve formations whose parent divisions had been lost in West Germany, were part of Berlin’s defences as well. They had tanks, armoured vehicles and a lot of weaponry even if it was old. Both had seen some action inside West Germany (against NATO hold-outs) and been withdrawn back into East Germany some time ago as part of an aborted Soviet plan for a reserve force to defend their ally… back when they cared about such a thing. The two units were capable of mounting a strong defence, yet there weren’t so many of them when in comparison to what was coming towards Berlin in the form of the advancing NATO armies.
More troops around Berlin came in the form of an uncompleted full division raised several weeks ago in the form of the 5th Motorised Rifle Division. These were older reservists, with equipment as old as them and little refresher training done. The division was missing combat support and service support assets. There had been discipline problems and a shortage of officers assigned who had any combat experience. Several months more of training was needed to have the unit combat-capable but there was no time at all for any of that to be done.
Both the East German Air Force and Navy – the Luftstreitkrafte and the Volksmarine – had their personnel were in the city. These were a wide mix of air defence teams (for guns and missiles) as well as communications, supply and security troops. Added to them were headquarters and administration staff all handed rifles and told to form up into units ready to defend Berlin. They had a lack of transport, heavy weapons or experienced leadership. Regardless, these uniformed personnel were instructed that they were to fight to the end to assist in stopping the city from being taken by NATO invaders.
Half a dozen regiments of Grenztruppen were in and around Berlin. These border guards had manned the Berlin Wall and many of them had taken part in the seizure of West Berlin. They had little in the way of armoured vehicles – certainly no tanks or artillery either – and were not properly combat trained. Many of their comrades from units deployed pre-war along the IGB had seen action inside West Germany and defending East Germany and had not stood strong in a real fight against a capable enemy. For rear-area occupation roles, the Grenztruppen were useful, so too in a static defensive role, but against an organised mobile opponent they wouldn’t be able to stop an invader intent on overrunning Berlin.
Then there were the militia forces of the KdA – the East German regime’s private army – and armed police units. Again, some of these units had been deployed outside of East Germany during the war and when doing so they had been used for occupation duties, inside towns and cities instead of rural locations. When the fighting had come to East Germany, the militia had fought for their country just like they had done in West Germany. They just couldn’t stand up to a real attack like the border guards hadn’t been able to either. These weren’t soldiers even if their political masters who sent them off to fight believed they would. Those currently in Berlin, East and West, were armed and given instructions so they could fight to defend the city but like the Grenztruppen they were going to be in trouble when hit with opposing armour and veteran infantry units who came to the city to seize it.
There were ‘others’ inside Berlin too who NATO were going to fight as well.
The Stasi had people everywhere who had melted into the civilian population – admittedly not always successfully – with weapons and radios taken. They had been ordered to fight behind enemy lines once NATO had pushed forward through the organised defences… or, more-correctly, getting others to fight for them. Among them there were those who were going to follow their orders and try to do immense damage to the invaders and cause them to eventually give up when faced with serious losses incurred. However, other Stasi personnel given the same instructions had decided to flee already or who were planning to do so if they could get away in time. They understood what their fate would be when Berlin fell and the regime which they served came down with it. These people were everywhere: some committed to the cause and others planning to run the first chance they got taking the lives of anyone who stood in their way.
The Soviet pull-out had been for Soviet military personnel, not the KGB. Of course, the KGB withdrew the majority of their people when the Soviet Army cut-and-ran on the East Germans but not all of them. There were a number of Chekists given orders like the Stasi were to make the occupation of the city by NATO bloody for them. They had various plans and schemes, most of which involved getting others to do their fighting for them in the form of civilians who were made to cooperate in a wide variety of ways. NATO was to not just be caused direct casualties at KGB hands but rather the aim was to get them to cause losses to civilians in the city: they would be tricked and deceived into shooting and shelling the defenceless. Once done, the KGB would seek to exploit such acts on the ground in Berlin and also further afield. Whether this would have the desired success here when such schemes hadn’t worked elsewhere on countless other occasions throughout the war wasn’t something questioned: those were the orders given.
There were Soviet Army deserters in the city. Individuals or in groups of two or three, certainly no more than that, hadn’t been swept up yesterday when the rest of their comrades were withdrawn away to the east. Most of them had weapons with them and had escaped from their units only recently. They had deserted for lots of different reasons and had no intention of going back. However, at the same time, none were exactly keen to defect to NATO. Instead, they were in Berlin drawing attention to themselves as they stole, they drank and they attacked people. The deserters would fight anyone and when NATO troops arrived they would fight them too. No, they didn’t stand a chance and would be best off dropping their weapons, holding up their hands and declaring that they wanted freedom… but that wasn’t going to happen.
Such were Berlin’s defenders. They were spread over a massive area through both East & West Berlin as well as along the outskirts too. Some were dug-in, others were mobile and ready to move. Their capabilities varied and so did the role envisioned for them when the fight for the city came.
The fight wasn’t meant to come for several days though.
But NATO paratroopers had made their combat jumps and the Battle for Berlin had begun earlier than the East Germans expected. The unexpected assault was something that was met with resistance straight away and that was only going to increase. If the East Germans had stood any chance, they would have needed more men – the missing Soviets – and even then it had been an almost impossible task to start with when they were anticipating NATO forces moving against them in the manner they envisioned.
Operation Pegasus destroyed any hope the East Germans had: NATO had struck early and delivered fatal blows in where they landed. Berlin wasn’t going to be held onto no matter how hard the East Germans tried. Oh, but they were trying as troops flocked to where NATO had arrived. They would continue to fight regardless, not willing to see the writing on the wall and admit defeat.
The KGB were counting on just this. They had more stock in this than their quasi-terrorism plan inside Berlin, that was only part of something far bigger.
March 28th 1990 Near Ptice, Bohemia, Czechoslovakia
The French First Army was continuing its advance towards Prague, the capital of Czechoslovakia. The D-5 highway which ran eastwards from Bavaria – a modern road though not up to the standard found in West Germany – was being followed by the French as they drove forward with that being their main supply route. While they tried to not be directly tied to that highway, the French were as along it came all of their supplies moving forward to support the offensive. Their combat operations were either side of the highway, spreading a considerable distance away to both the north and the south, yet it was the course of that highway which led the drive on Prague. Plzen had been bypassed, so too other towns along the way, but the French were planning to go into Prague and seize the city. They were hoping that the civil strife which had occurred throughout areas of Bohemia which they had been through, where Czechoslovak militia had first turned against the Soviets then their own regime afterwards, would take place in Prague too; but they were ready to fight their way into and then to control the city against anyone who wished to stand in their way as well. Unlike in East Germany, through the occupied parts of Czechoslovakia the people had violently risen up in places against their government and its allies and the French had taken advantage of that. They weren’t relying on this for their continued military operations though.
Prague was being driven upon by the two French component corps of the French First Army while the West German II Corps was operating to the south. The French II Corps was on the left and the French I Corps was on the right as they followed the course of the D-5. Each corps had four combat divisions assigned with five of the eight assigned to those higher commands in peacetime and the other three being wartime attachments. Within each division itself and attached to the corps commands directed, there were pre-war standing units and reserve formations. The French First Army had troops which were home-based in West Germany, inside France and elsewhere in the world (Africa and the Caribbean) under command along with good quality reservists. These were men who had fought a long defensive war in Bavaria, one of tactical withdrawals and counterattacks rather than static warfare, and paid the price for that before the tide of the war turned in NATO’s favour and they were unleashed to strike back east.
Whereas the invasion of East Germany and the assault now into Berlin was a true allied affair with multiple NATO countries committing forces to it, Czechoslovakia was being conquered almost exclusively by the French. They had the West Germans on their flank pushing aside Soviet forces and had ripped through Czechoslovakian troops to drive towards their capital. The fighting was taking a toll in terms of lives lost and the French hadn’t been making a mad dash forward but they hadn’t been stopped either. The situation on the ground assisted them with a rebellion underway and the Soviets more concerned with East Germany rather than Czechoslovakia. In recent days, intelligence had come that the Soviets were pulling what reserve troops they had located east and north of Prague back too as they abandoned their Czechoslovak allies just like they had done to the East Germans as well.
Such news had only meant that the drive on Prague would continue. To aid the advance, the 11th Parachute Division, serving with the French II Corps, was thrown forward as paratroopers made several combat jumps near to the Czechoslovak city late yesterday (with NATO transport aircraft assisting and then going off to support those in and near Berlin). The French First Army wasn’t going for the dramatics by going right into the city, but rather landed nearby to speed up the progress of their ground forces rather than seizing it with the paratroopers.
Link-ups between the airborne and ground forces occurred throughout today. Most of those went smoothly, but, as this was war with all the confusion that came in the midst of battles, there were a few occasions were things went wrong.
Colonel Henri Bentégeat was currently assigned to command the 5th Armored Division’s 2nd Brigade. In peacetime, the division based in West Germany was the size of a rather large brigade (two thirds of a standard NATO combat division) but with wartime expansion two smaller subordinate commands had been created breaking the division into a pair of brigades. This was done to better coordinate the movement of such a large force and with his appointment a few days into the war, Bentégeat had taken charge of a NATO-standard heavy brigade of mixed battalion-groups of armour and mechanised infantry. First in Bavaria and now into Bohemia, his brigade had fought battle after battle interspaced with short rest periods in between when pulled out of the battle line which came too with movements in the rear into new positions. The latter had occurred overnight before today the 2nd Brigade was back on the attack today.
In an attack through woodland, Bentégeat had sent his troops forward through Czechoslovak positions outside of a trio of villages to the west of Prague. At Svarov, Ptice and Uhonice there had been none of the resistance met when in the woods and the French had moved through each of them aiming for the rolling countryside beyond. Ahead there were fields, a railway line which ran lateral across the projected line of advance, a large village named Chyne and then paratroopers around Hostivice: a town right near Prague’s main airport which the one of the brigades with the 11th Parachute Division held. The paratroopers from the airport had spread out and were engaged in combat all around Hostivice – after taking their fight to their opponents rather than waiting for them to move on the airport – as they waited to be assisted by Bentégeat coming up behind the enemy they were battling. For operations here in Czechoslovakia there were few very good maps of the ground and to assist in local navigation through areas deep inside the country there were ‘friendly locals’ helping out the French First Army. Such men and women were a wide mix of characters with different motives and trusted to varying degrees. Bentégeat had been sent a trio of Czechoslovaks who had apparently been thoroughly checked out as to see where their loyalties lay: he still had his men keep an eye on them though. Even if they weren’t working for the enemy, Bentégeat had reasoned that they may have had a different idea of what they wanted to see with their country being liberated than what suited the goals of the French First Army.
He had made sure his subordinates understood that and his paranoia paid off today.
Bentégeat had his mobile command column stopped outside Ptice and listened to what had gone on inside Chyne up ahead where his brigade’s advance guard, a squadron of AMX-30 tanks from the 4e Regiment de Cuirassiers, had got into trouble. Commandant Benoît Puga reported that the local guide had brought them into the village rather than around it with the aim of taking on the local authorities there rather than allowing the brigade to be led to where they could find Czechoslovak troops around Hostivice fighting French paratroopers. He had lied to Puga about where exactly they had been and where they were going. The tanks had rumbled into Chyne and Puga had brought them to a stop before the guide to get them all the way to the centre of the village. He had confessed his intention when Puga had pulled out his pistol and threatened to shoot the man as the fear had been that an ambush was waiting for them with enemy troops waiting ready. No, no, no, the man had screamed, he was bringing the French tanks into the village to liberate those who lived there. The village was a regime stronghold with political appointees and secret policemen present: he only wanted to liberate his fellow citizens, not kill the Frenchmen who were toppling his country’s ruling regime.
Following this, Puga told Bentégeat that the guide had been ‘set free’ and was gone. He admitted that maybe it was a mistake but he had been so angry with the man and marched him off with rifles pointed at him. The tanks were now moving again, out of the village and across several fields. Puga was relying on the map and also the eyes of his men. He believed that he was going in the right direction but needed to confirm that before he dragged the rest of the brigade after him and potentially off into the unknown.
Bentégeat ordered his subordinate to keep in constant contact with the brigade operations staff. There was an inbound fight of a pair of Gazelle scout helicopters sent by division ready to assist in finding the correct path forward and Puga would be put in contact with them when they showed up. In addition, Bentégeat also told the junior officer he had leading his advance guard to next time just shoot anyone who lied to them again like that.
He was only half joking.
While his men at the front were moving again, trying to find the right way forward so they could link up with the paratroopers up ahead, Bentégeat contacted the divisional command post and spoke with the 5th Armored Division’s chief-of-staff due to the commander being currently unavailable. He informed of his current situation and explained what exactly the delay was in moving the brigade forward. Bentégeat was told that his man on the ground had handled the situation well in pulling back out of that village. There was a good chance that there would have been no more than a quick engagement with tanks taking on bullies lording it over frightened locals, but it could have gone the other way too. Follow-on light troops serving with infantry units in the 14th Reserve Armored Division would deal with Chyne eventually – and anywhere else when there was such a situation identified – but for the time being the mission was to reach the paratroopers. They had been fighting for some time since their combat jumps and were on the attack rather than sitting back ready to be assailed from all sides but needed relief, especially in the form of tanks and heavy infantry units under Bentégeat hitting their opponents from behind.
When it came to navigation across the Czechoslovak countryside, Bentégeat informed him that a lot of reconnaissance flights had been conducted in recent days through Bohemia by French and NATO aircraft using a whole range of equipment to map the region. This was all being fast put together by cartographers and maps for distribution were almost ready. Bohemia had been full of surprises for the whole of the French First Army as they moved further inside in the geographic layout, especially when it came to man-made structures like roads, railways and canals. Borders areas, those near Bavaria, had been extensively mapped throughout the Cold War but not so much the interior of Czechoslovakia. It was a problem which should have been addressed beforehand and was something being urgently done now. No one had expected to get this far this fast though.
Prague though was somewhere mapped, along with its defending forces: where Bentégeat knew that he and his men would be soon enough.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:50:26 GMT
Forty–Two – Coup d’état
March 29th 1990 Arroyo Naranjo, outside Havana, Cuba
General de Cuerpo de Ejército Delgado had been nominated by his fellow generals to be the acting Jefe of the Cuban Revolutionary Armed Forces. There were a few surviving generals of four-star rank (General de Ejércitos) yet they were down in the southeast of the country; they were arguing over who would be the next national leader or thinking of trying to flee the country to elsewhere in the Hispanic world. Here in the west of Cuba, everyone else of substantial pre-war standing was either dead or with the rebels operating from Mariel…
…with the rebels being subservient to the KGB there.
Throughout the war, General Delgado was regarded by his peers as having fought for Cuba, not any one person. He had argued with Raúl Castro (not Fidel, naturally) and stood firm in opposition to Soviet influence. Moreover, when traitors had killed Raúl, it had been him who had discovered the betrayal and led the first moves against the coup d’état. The political non-entity appointed by the DGI at the behest of the KGB had been shot by General Delgado himself – so the story which everyone believed went – and he had then gathered troops loyal to Cuba to fight against the intervention of outsiders; everyone conveniently ‘forgot’ how he had (from afar) commanded those men sent north at the beginning of the fight and off to their doom.
He had promised his fellow generals that he would regain Cuba’s honour by finishing off the traitors as well as bringing an end the war too. These were big promises made by General Delgado and not ones which would be easy to achieve, yet he set out to do them. He won’t let Cuba down, he had told his fellow generals, and would die in the attempt rather than see failure.
Cuba’s Western Army Command was the strongest military force in the country pre-war. It controlled all forces on the western side of the island which including a majority of the most-capable elements ready to fight for Cuba at home or abroad.
Between the igniting of World War Three and Cuba’s late intervention – a two-week period – much of that strength had either been transferred to the southeast down to near Guantanamo Bay or readied to be sent away from Cuba’s shores in the landing operations against the Florida Keys, the Bahamas, the Turks & Caicos Islands and the Cayman Islands. Armoured forces and lighter airborne/amphibious units had therefore moved out of the Western Army Command area. Infantry units as well as a few heavier forces (the latter to defend Havana against a surprise counter-invasion) remained with the command. American attacks first with their bombers dropping immense loads of conventional fire power had hurt those military units but far more damage had come with the nuclear strikes. Small, tactical weapons had been used with the norteamericanos hitting combat support and service support elements where they were concentrated rather than dispersed troops themselves. The Western Army Command had lost its headquarters staff in these attacks as well as suffering severe damage to its communications too. The troops were still there but commanding and coordinating any major movement had been made difficult.
General Delgado knew the difficulties yet the Western Army Command was regardless the only hope that Cuba had. He gave the newly-appointed commanding general (a three-star ranking general like himself) two tasks to be carried out with immediate effect. Firstly, move troops into Havana – starting at the outskirts first – to restore order there and stop the city being a tempting target for the norteamericanos with a mercenary army for some sort of ‘liberation’. Secondly, attack the traitors and the Soviets to the west of Havana, spread out from their Mariel base, and crush them no matter how hard of a tough fight that would be. There were enough troops to do both, General Delgado had instructed his subordinate, and he would personally be on-hand to oversee each task completed.
The troops committed to the fighting in Havana were doing just what he expected of them. His small mobile command column (bunkers were death traps as exemplified by Fidel’s fate) hidden in civilian vehicles though armed to the teeth had come forward into the city’s outskirts and not far from the advancing troops sweeping all opposition before them. Criminal gangs and rioting civilians were either dead or running for their lives. They no more looted, burnt and fought the security forces as justice was being delivered against them. They had risen up right when Cuba was on its knees and were paying the price for that now. Some innocents were being caught up in the fighting, General Delgado knew, but he recalled what French saying on that: c’est la guerre. The norteamericanos had a similar saying too about smashing eggs to make an omelet but his English wasn’t as good as his French. Either way, needless deaths aside, he foresaw the complete pacification of Havana within the next few days, maybe even by the end of tomorrow.
Mariel was going to be much harder.
The Soviets had their 7th Brigade encamped around that port town and they had been joined by other Soviet elements in-place in Cuba all gathered in one area rather than spread out across the island. Joining them at the behest of the KGB had been those who had rebelled against the regime and launched their aborted coup d’état. These were DGI people in the main but also Cuban military officers and political figures as well. Where they were positioned was a distance of forty miles away from the capital, but they might as well have been ten times further. The A-1 highway, the western section of the Autopistal Nacional, had been subject to repeated air attacks hitting river crossing points and also striking vehicle convoys on it making it impassable without a major effort to repair damage and clear it of wreckage too. There were a pair of smaller, less modern coastal roads from Havana to Mariel: again, the norteamericanos had been busy with their air attacks to make them impassable. Hit with nuclear weapons to the south was what was once San Antonio de los Baños air base; a wide area around that destroyed military facility was extremely dangerous to traverse by military forces at the moment.
The norteamericanos had effectively cut off Mariel for their own reasons but making it an extremely difficult place to send a force of loyal Cubans against. That mattered for naught though. General Delgado wanted those traitors and Soviets there crushed and beaten. There was a good chance that they had given the norteamericanos the location of Fidel so he could be killed and they had certainly murdered Raúl too. Their aim was keep Cuba in the war for KGB strategic goals even if that meant that all of the Cuban people would die when the norteamericanos eventually got around to massacring everyone with their nuclear weapons.
There was a smaller highway which ran from the south of Havana westwards in the direction of Mariel: the Cerretera Central. It had received ‘attention’ from the air but wasn’t as heavily damaged as the other roads. This road, built by the norteamericanos in the Machado era, came close to San Antonio de los Baños though not too close. There were Soviet and rebel Cuban forces at Caimito as a forward position and then more in larger numbers further behind at Guanajay. The road ran through both of those towns and they were going to be more battlefields as Cuba was liberated. Further innocents were going to be caught up in the fighting like they were in Havana. Again, as General Delgado saw it, their deaths would be the price of Cuba’s freedom.
Here in Arroyo Naranjo, he received news that the lead attacking units heading for Mariel had come under fire around Caimito. There had come an ambush where the Soviets were waiting but they had mistimed their attack. General Delgado’s men had been stung and slowed down but they were still moving forward.
It had begun, Cuba was now fighting against the Soviets just as they were fighting the United States too. Foolish to outsiders, of course, but necessary for Cuba.
March 29th 1990 The Prenden Bunker, near Wandlitz, Brandenburg, East Germany
Danger from NATO air attack and the presence of traitors everywhere imperiling East Germany’s leadership meant that they were safe in their bunker to the north of Berlin. The National Defence Council was protected here by their fraternal comrades of the KGB who could do what the Stasi couldn’t and make sure that there were no more assassinations. The Soviets were helpful in identifying threats to the regime from those who would betray their country at its weakest moment. They screened who came in to the bunker and all communications went through them too. They provided the defences to stop an attempt to assault the bunker with NATO commandos as well, one which had recently been conducted against the nearby Waldseidlung residential complex.
What would the East Germans in the bunker have done without their friends in the KGB?
There were ten senior members of the National Defence Council at Prenden.
Former Interior Minister and current General Secretary Friedrich Dickel was present underground along with a host of senior political figures from the regime such as Wolfgang Herger, Günter Kleiber, Egon Krenz, Herbert & Werner Krolikowski (two brothers), Alfred Neumann and Fritz Streletz. Defence Minister Heinz Kessler and Stasi chief Werner Grossmann, both who were always in uniform, were also at Prenden. Along with these people at the top, there were middle- & lower-ranking figures who worked for the leadership at the bunker too.
Kessler and Grossmann had been out of the bunker in recent weeks while the other senior people, especially Dickel, had been here continuously since the beginning of February. As could be imagined, the atmosphere in the bunker was rather unpleasant after those here had been here for so long without going outside in the fresh air. The air was thick with cigarette smoke which the air conditioning (meant to protect against chemical and biological threats) was struggling to deal with. Deliveries of fresh food had been slowed down and the water from the tanks made several people ill. The KGB had managed to send in cigarettes and alcohol and had promised to do something about the food situation too as no one wanted to keep eating the canned meat for any longer. As to the air filtration, that was being fixed today by Soviet engineers and so while turned off for a short while when it came back on later in the day all the previous problems with air quality were meant to be solved. Regardless, sometime tomorrow they were all meant to leave here and travel across to Poland where somewhere safer was waiting for their arrival.
Adding to the physical matters of being in the bunker, confined underground in tight proximity like they were, the atmosphere was thick with suspicion and tension too.
A coup d’état was feared. The politicians looked at those in uniform led by Kessler and Grossmann in fear that at any moment they would shoot them and take over. They looked at each other too, waiting to see who would try to turn the military and security services against them as pawns instead. Dickel himself feared that no one respected his authority as head of state because the rumours that the Soviets had put him in power were widely-known not to be the ‘lies’, ‘slanders’ and ‘falsehoods’ which it was proclaimed they were but actually true. He was busy today arranging for medals and awards to be given out, including making Kessler a marshal: East Germany’s highest military rank at a time when there really wasn’t anything much of the military left.
As to the Defence Minister and Stasi head, the two of them had their own concerns. They understood far more than the politicians of how recent events were to be the downfall of East Germany. The Soviets had abandoned them and were massing their troops along the Polish border ready to take that step back while leaving NATO armies to finish off what East German forces were left who were kept fighting under KGB orders. Kessler had no time to be thinking about taking over here as there was no authority to be gained. On the other hand, Grossmann was plotting a coup d’état: he just needed more time to get it going. The fools here would be shot and he would leave to set up a seat of government in the northeast of the country, even Rugen Island if necessary.
The news came today that Generaloberst Horst Brünner was dead. Their fellow National Defence Council member had been killed though when away from here and the excuse that he died in an accident was in no manner believed.
Polish tanks meant to be practice firing their guns but using live ammunition instead of blanks? What a load of rubbish! It had been an assassination clearly arranged by someone here or elsewhere who wanted to take charge of East Germany.
Krenz and the Krolikowski Brothers used the excuse of the meeting which covered the news that Brünner had been killed to talk of other matters. They said what hadn’t been said openly here before: the war was lost. Krenz called for some sort of dialogue to be opened with the West, on favourable terms for East Germany of course. The Krolikowski Brothers said that East Berlin was soon to be in NATO hands and they needed to spare the people there the suffering which would come with hostile foreign occupation by a vengeful West and the only way to do that was to arrange a ceasefire before all there were slaughtered in a NATO bloodlust.
The others accused them of ‘factionism’ and denounced them as ’traitors’.
Grossmann, the former chief of the Stasi’s foreign intelligence arm, the HVA, before he had stepped into the shoes of the dead Mielke and taken over as State Security Minister, allowed the three of them to talk and encouraged a debate on the merits of that. His thoughts were on weakening the politicians and seeing them openly divide: the best way to get rid of them was to have them at each other’s throats.
Kessler told them that infighting here did them no good. He said that the end was coming and they all needed to think about their futures. He spoke of a message he had received from Berlin via a military courier who had come here and out of sight of ‘die Russen’ had passed clandestinely word of events there. Generalmajor Lothar Engelhardt was not able to hold onto the city and was having severe difficulties holding his forces together. Berlin was lost, even if the final shots had yet to be fired. Their country was doomed and they needed to decide what they were going to do. Did they really all want to go to Poland where the Poles weren’t going to be very welcoming especially if they had nothing to bring with them of any value to continue the fight? Dickel spoke up as he demanded that they all held firm together as representatives of the people and supporting their allies. He was passionate in his speech to them all. He banged his fist on the table as he called for unity in such desperate times as these and urged everyone to stop thinking of themselves. Unity, he called for, unity in spite of everything!
No one listened to him.
After lunch was served – a very unappetizing meal fully eaten by few – out came the alcohol and cigarettes. The leadership and those working for it relaxed some from earlier tensions and several people noticed that their air conditioning had come back on.
None of them noticed though that the KGB people usually present inside the bunker had all suddenly disappeared.
Many in the bunker became drowsy. Others started to feel a shortness of breath. These were people with pre-existing medical complaints. Then others, well people, started to feel off too with headaches first then problems breathing as well as a lack of control over their bladders.
Panic came when it was noticed that the exits to the ground above were shut and there was no one manning them. They had all been locked in!
People starting falling unconscious and into a coma which they would never awake from. The air conditioning kept going with the system working through every room and passageway inside the bunker where before it hadn’t been as effective: the engineers had done their job very well.
‘Gas’ someone screamed; ‘treason’ called out another. Slowly, they all started to realize that they were going to die here, trapped underground and being killed by whatever was coming through the air conditioning. Desperate attempts were made to try to escape but there was no way out. Kessler and Grossmann both had their people try to use the telephones and the radio links yet those didn’t work. Dickel died first before Krenz not long after him and then Grossmann. Kessler struggled on as he directed military officers to try and break down one of the exits yet he and those with him soon fell down too.
There was to be no coup d’état in East Germany though. This was not the work of their fellow countrymen. Their protectors had decided that they were no longer worth the trouble yet didn’t wish for such people to end up in the hands of the West where their secrets would be revealed. The KGB had cut off their communications and access before gassing the lot of them as they were trapped underground.
Ironically, the KGB could have saved itself the time: the Poles had a very good plan to kill the East German leadership by shooting down their plane when it headed towards Legnica tomorrow. The KGB didn’t know about that though, nor did they know about other Polish intentions. Moreover, those parts of the KGB who acted to ruthlessly here at Prenden were preparing to move against other parts of their own organisation elsewhere today as well.
What hadn’t happened in East Germany was about to happen elsewhere.
March 29th 1990 Moscow Oblast, Russian SSR, the Soviet Union
The bell couldn’t be un-rung.
Kryuchkov had showed that a coup d’état in the Soviet Union was possible with his own strike against Gorbachev and the former General Secretary’s supporters. How it had been done was one thing; of more importance was that someone had shown the will to do it and be successful. That state order had been seen to be capable of being forcibly changed.
Since then, there had been few stern measures imposed to close of avenues for a similar move to be made again. The country was open to a second coup d’état as long as someone else decided too that they would dare to do it again.
Nine days ago, up in Leningrad, the GRU and the KGB had struck a deal.
Handshakes had been exchanged between bitter personal enemies which came following promises to let bygones be bygones, to not forget what had happened but put it aside for now. The top people in both organisations, those with the all-powerful KGB and the not-quite neutered GRU, had agreed that Kryuchkov needed to go. He had been given the opportunity to peacefully step aside yet had refused. He had gathered up those loyal to him and was secure in the belief that he and his position was unassailable. He wanted to continue the war to the very end; his war which he had started and aimed to see it through until a finish which the GRU and the KGB came to realize would ultimate mean the nuclear destruction of their country.
Kryuchkov was preparing for a fight with his intelligence organisations, relying on the military now (the irony!) to protect him along with what few KGB people he had left as he made a stand. That fight to the finish he sought was one which the security services would give him.
The KGB’s Spetsgruppa A led by General-Major Karpukhin assaulted several targets in Moscow this evening. The moment it got dark, they were moving to attack several locations within the city itself. They had been planning to act later in the night but there had been ominous signs that Kryuchkov’s supporters had got wind of what was coming. Aircraft were being marshalled in Poland around where paratroopers who had pulled out of Berlin were gathered: the fear was that those men would fly back home and defend Kryuchkov’s regime and those capable, veteran troops would pose a challenge which Karpukhin’s Alpha Group wouldn’t be able to overcome. Moves were underway through other means to stop those flights without resorting to serious bloodshed (a few deaths here and there would have to occur) but nothing major.
Once again, the irony of this was glaring. The KGB when it was wholly loyal to Kryuchkov had made sure that the Soviet Army was all sent abroad to fight so it couldn’t pose a risk at home. Now, Kryuchkov had been aiming to bring back troops to fight for him!
The large and heavily-expanded Alpha Group were veterans themselves. There were more than three hundred of them in Moscow. These men had crushed rebellion and revolt – real and imagined – throughout the country in recent months. They had killed their fellow Soviet citizens in Vilnius, Novosibirsk, Kursk, Tbilisi and so many other places. Now, they killed others here in Moscow.
The Soviet Ministry of Defence Main Building on Arabatskaya Square was assaulted by men coming from helicopters flying extremely low over the city. They came across the Moskva River on their last leg before they hovered above parts of the roof: men abseiled out and down. There was a meeting going on down below in the basement of senior military personnel who were loyal to Kryuchkov including his hand-picked Defence Minister; others were sought elsewhere in the building for these hardened killers to murder in their place of work.
A slaughter begun. Anyone who stood in the way of the Alpha Group was shot down as they hunted for those they came here to kill.
Karpukhin oversaw other assaults in Moscow too. The KGB headquarters on Lubyanka Square and the Lefortovo Prison were left alone but a similar assault to the one which hit the Ministry of Defence struck at the KGB facility at Yasenevo. This was where Kryuchkov had his power base – not at KGB headquarters – with the First Chief Directorate having their offices. The all-powerful foreign intelligence arm was packed with his supporters and most of them could be found at Yasenevo.
Another slaughter occurred there.
In less dramatic moves, smaller Alpha Group detachments, these in vehicles, arrived at Moscow’s train stations and airports as well as civilian communication sites including the Ostankino Tower. There was no fighting at these locations but the groups of armed men firmly took control to cut off Moscow from the outside world.
General-Lieutenant Trofimov had been appointed by Kryuchkov to his old role when the latter made himself General Secretary. Trofimov was regarded as loyal by his former boss (a mistake indeed) and someone not interested in gaining anything for himself but rather defending the state against those who would bring it down from within: Trofimov had built his career on crushing internal political dissent against the state, not seeking to gain high office.
Well… Trofimov had decided that Kryuchkov posed more of a risk to the Soviet Union than any writer, poet or human rights activist.
The KGB’s Second Chief Directorate, its counter-intelligence arm, was dispatched by Trofimov to take care of people considered Kryuchkov loyalists but who didn’t pose a serious danger like those at the Ministry of Defence and Yasenevo did. These men and women who specialised in following around foreign spies on Moscow’s streets before the war had been tailing such people for some time now so that they were all kept in sight. Word had come from them that there was a move afoot to bring back Airborne Troops units from Poland and they had also discovered the plans made by some of Kryuchkov’s allies to flee (complete with stolen state funds) aboard should things go awry. This evening they started arresting those they had been following. Some violence came including physical assaults, gunshots and a couple of suicides from those who didn’t want to be detained. Still, what was done was done quietly and efficiently.
Trofimov was informed that a few had gotten away and wasn’t best pleased to not see complete success yet the vast majority of Kryuchkov’s supporters here in Moscow had been rounded up. Those who hadn’t been caught weren’t going to get very far away either in the long run.
Colonel Putin was down at the Nikonovo Bunker. Lebedev (who he had escaped from the Netherlands with) had sent him here to join the GRU efforts to break in and remove Kryuchkov from his hiding place. There were Spetsnaz men who’d arrived from the Russian Far East and they glared at him in his KGB uniform with undisguised malice. Putin knew all that had happened with how the GRU had been mistreated and humiliated so he kept himself in check: he met those stares like a man but was ready to take a step back if the situation forced it.
The cooperation of the GRU was vital, Lebedev had told him, and we have to let them get their hands dirty in dealing with Kryuchkov to bind the new alliance together… for now at least.
Using explosives and even power-drills, the Spetsnaz were forcing the entrance open to this bunker. This was somewhere built to protect those inside from not just air attack but a commando assault too: it wasn’t an easy task. Booby-traps had already killed several Spetsnaz and those inside knew what was coming. Putin had been informed that through deep-buried communications links which were being listened to, they were calling for help – any help! – to come and stop the assault as well as having their weapons inside ready. A shootout was coming but there were enough men here all well-armed with more-powerful weapons as well as maps of the inside to make that defence futile. Gas would have been a better weapon to be used here yet Kryuchkov was wanted alive and so this was going to have to be done the hard way. As the work went on, Putin stood back at a safe distance watching absentmindedly as he thought about what would happen when the Spetsnaz got inside.
Before fleeing from imminent NATO captivity as they had closed-in upon Arnhem, Lebedev had spoken with a Stasi man about a grand scheme drawn up by the East Germans to maintain their position and lives should the worst ever happen and their country fall. That was currently not something they were doing, but once back in the Rodina and engaged with Trofimov’s schemes that had been brought up again. There were several things which needed to be done to make that work for the KGB, one of those being having Kryuchkov delivered gift-wrapped to the West. He would be brought out alive, given some ‘medicine’ to allow his memory to quickly fade and then later handed over for punishment by those out for his blood. The West would want to push for vengeance for all that he had done and they could have him.
Everyone else inside the bunker was unimportant and would be quickly disposed of.
Putin had been told that initially the idea had been to have Kryuchkov killed here, by the Americans too. Lebedev had taken time to have all of his schemes – ones which Putin fully endorsed – agreed upon by the other plotters against Kryuchkov with the idea back then that he should be killed. There had been a KGB disinformation game being run throughout the war against NATO but it hadn’t worked out as planned: the West had been confused as to who was behind it and didn’t fully trust it for reasons unknown to the KGB. Regardless, through that intelligence link a request had been sent to have them hit here with their magic aircraft dropping bombs to smash the bunker apart. They had refused to do so, not saying why, and then the plot against Kryuchkov had evolved into what it now was with a better outcome determined as one which would be sought. Putin thought that much better for he knew how much the West would like to get their hands upon the man underneath the ground for the war that he had started and all the deaths he had caused in his mad quest for global power. He would be no good to them though for what was in his head: he’d just be a puppet for one of their international trials where he’d eventually be a senile old man.
His attention went back to the bunker entrance. A cheer went up and Putin realized the Spetsnaz were making more progress. He wished them well getting in and hoped they would remember to be damn careful when inside and start shooting everyone but the one man who they were here to remove alive. He looked up at the dark sky above and hoped too that there was no satellite looking down here at the minute!
This was all meant to be a secret before the lie to be sold to the West was ready with all pieces in place.
The GRU and the KGB, working hand-in-hand, had done what Kryuchkov had done: completed a successful coup d’état. Like the first, this second one was initially all out of the public eye. A lot of people involved didn’t know what else was going on. Only a few people were meant to know everything.
The belief was that it had all gone perfectly and the next stage was to follow it up with the lies which were due to come as to what had actually occurred. The war was to be ended in a way which wouldn’t see the thermonuclear destruction of the Soviet Union yet also not in a manner which saw the state brought down and on its knees begging to a victorious West. This was a delicate balancing act yet there was a conviction that it was achievable because everything had been done to make sure of success.
However… there were some things which the plotters hadn’t taken into account.
There was more than one intelligence asset that the West had giving them information and this one wasn’t a maskirovka too convoluted to work as desired.
The Poles were rushing their final preparations too, ready to throw Soviet plans off.
And there had been certain orders for the defence of Soviet territorial integrity issued by Kryuchkov unknown to many apart from his closest people, people who the GRU and the KGB were busy killing.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:52:11 GMT
Forty–Three – Mopping Up
March 30th 1990 Handewitt, Schleswig–Holstein, West Germany
It had started very late last night and gained in intensity through the early hours and into this morning. The Soviets were surrendering en masse. There were no conditional surrenders, no offers of ceasefires in-place and no more games about maybe giving in either. All across the combat zone near the West German–Danish border, Soviet troops were giving themselves up to NATO custody.
Major-General Mackenzie, the Canadian Army officer commanding the Allied III Corps (formerly LANDJUT), had been told by his superior who headed the Baltic Army Group to move forward with haste but caution too. No, this wasn’t happening everywhere, the war wasn’t over, but it was clearly a sign of things to come. Be careful in moving forward as we don’t know what the KGB is up to, Mackenzie had been told as well, yet try to get as far forward as you can.
Those orders were ones which Mackenzie had his men follow.
The border had been crossed just after dawn with the West Germans leading the way. Their 16th Panzergrenadier Brigade – far different from its pre-war make-up – being the first to go over and into their own country. His own Canadian units, those with the 1st Mechanised Brigade–Group, had been ordered to let the West Germans take the lead for two reasons. Firstly, Canadian troops were busy suddenly overwhelmed by the number of prisoners which they needed to secure as the enemy gave in. There was also the issue of letting the West Germans, who were ready to exploit any breakthrough the Canadians made before the mass surrenders started to occur, be the first to go into their own country. The Danes would follow them with some of the Norwegians doing so in getting inside West Germany and spreading out while other Norwegians would stay to help take charge of all of the prisoners.
Mackenzie himself had his small headquarters column follow behind the West Germans along the same route they took: down the E3 highway through the southern extremes of Denmark and then over the border crossing as the road became Autobahn-7 and went into Schleswig–Holstein (the Soviets had used the same road to invade Denmark, going north instead of south, of course). Some of the West Germans moved to the west once over the border with most of them carrying on heading south and waiting until they came across someone who wanted to fight them. Mackenzie had his headquarters come to a halt near the small town of Handewitt where communications arrays were quickly set up. The town had been fought over briefly but suffered more from the aftereffects of what had happened at Flensburg just over the other side of the autobahn; over there where Mackenzie was avoiding going near to.
With the radios active and his operations staff fast being able to set themselves up properly when stationary rather than on the move, Mackenzie was brought up to speed on the latest developments which had occurred during the move down from Jutland and into West Germany.
The hamlet of Arenholzfeld was as far as the lead elements of the 16th Panzergrenadier Brigade had reached before they come to a halt. A massive section of the autobahn was torn up and the area around it littered with anti-tank and anti-personnel mines. They West Germans were saying that it looked like an immense air strike had hit the area several weeks beforehand, maybe last month even, and no one had cleaned up the mess. They were maneuvering around the obstructions and would be getting going as soon as possible. When Mackenzie was shown on the map where this tiny place called Arenholzfeld was he was amazed at how far the West Germans had reached: they were almost at the town of Schleswig and more-importantly halfway to the Kiel Canal already. Their flanking columns had gone into the airfield at Eggebek as well and found that Soviet Air Force personnel there were doing the same as those in the Soviet Army in surrendering. The Danish Jutland Division (about half of its pre-war strength but only due to a large number of smaller units merged in following bloody battles earlier in the war) and the Norwegian 3rd Brigade were being left far behind!
Closer to here, Mackenzie was told that the trio of divisional headquarters of the remaining combat formations assigned to the Eleventh Guards Army had all been reached by Canadian and Norwegian troops back inside Denmark itself following the earlier arrival at the field army headquarters itself. There had been burning of paperwork, smashing of radio encryption equipment and there were no signs of anyone in KGB uniform but almost everything had gone smoothly enough. The Soviets had given up peacefully and were allowing themselves to fall into custody without any more than minor acts of indiscipline. Their weapons and ammunition were all being handed over and they were showing Mackenzie’s people where minefields were as long as guiding them to facilities holding NATO prisoners – hundreds of men, not thousands or tens of thousands – throughout their occupied areas.
Yet, there had been an issue at the command post of the 3rd Guards Motorised Rifle Division (3 GMRD) where there had come the revelation that an hour or so before the surrenders had started they had shot dozens of Danish ‘terrorists’: those men were Home Guard soldiers, Danes who kept their rifles and ammunition at home and had turned guerilla once the war started. When news spread that the Soviets were giving in, these men had approached that command post aiming to take the surrender of those there. Gunfire had come in reply as the Soviets were in no way ready to surrender to them as they feared the consequences of that. A Danish liaison officers who was attached to the 2 Princess Patricia’s Canadian Light Infantry battle-group and who had travelled to the Soviet divisional headquarters had given a response to this news in the form of shooting the chief-of-staff of the 3 GMRD. It would need to be written up as a field court-martial but Mackenzie would see to that.
These things happened and could be explained away as long as it was an isolated event done in the head of the moment, not premediated.
Mackenzie was briefed that the latest reports which had come in when it came to what was going on with the Soviets overall was they were surrendering what they had left in West Germany, not everywhere in Europe. Down near Hamburg, where there were Dutch and West German troops approaching from the south, there were surrenders taking place too. It was apparently the same in the massive Hanover Salient as well. Elsewhere though, across in East Germany, this wasn’t the case.
The Allied III Corps’ deputy commander came on the radio-link up from the Eleventh Guards Army headquarters where he was. The short, informal ceremony to surrender there was done with and the field army commander secured along with his command staff… minus the KGB people just as was the case everywhere else. Mackenzie asked him about the morale of the Soviet Army people there and what were the reasons given for their quitting the fight.
They had been sent orders from Moscow yesterday evening to surrender themselves to NATO forces. These had been firm and had given them no leeway in how to act. Give up at once and turn yourselves over to NATO custody, their orders had said with nothing else to add to that. There had been some discussions where some officers believed that the fight could be continued but eventually the Eleventh Guards Army commander had told his men to start surrendering while remembering to uphold their ‘honour’. The Soviets had been following previous orders to hold until relieved (there had been no chance of that) and it had come as a shock to them. Their men had been willing to fight though there had been a lot of recent disquiet with the new propaganda spread concerning the sudden Russian nationalism and that had affected quite a few of the men and officers in a negative manner. The Eleventh Guards Army was a formation stationed in the Baltic Republic’s in peacetime – Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania – yet it wasn’t made up of soldiers from those parts of the Soviet Union. There were a majority of ethnic Russians within semi-reserve divisions but also Ukrainians, Belorussians, those from the Caucasus, Central Asia and distant Siberian regions: those latter people hadn’t bought the nationalism line yet nor had all of the supposed Russians too.
Even with crippling fuel & ammunition issues, a lack of air cover and a hostile population fighting them, plus internal morale problems, the Eleventh Guards Army could have stood its ground for another week at least, maybe longer. It had bene dug-in and the Allied III Corps was numerically weaker. Now though it was just being swept up and its men finding themselves POWs in rapid fashion.
There did come some reports of a few hostile encounters though as the whole process of moving down into West Germany here was never going to be bloodless. This was something which Mackenzie had expected to occur far more than it had as the mopping up of the enemy was completed. The outbreaks of fighting occurred near to Flensburg, that town destroyed on February 17th when the mid-war ceasefire had been shattered. The destruction there had torn open the frontlines as it hit the rear support areas of the West German 6th Panzergrenadier Division (to which the 16th Brigade belonged) yet the overwhelming influence of that nuclear attack had been the effect upon the town and those who had been there at the time in the form of locals and internal refugees who’d fled the fighting further south. The West German civilian losses had yet to be calculated due to the inability to do so while the area had been behind the frontlines. The Soviets themselves had been into Flensburg – not the two ground-zeros directly but nearby – to conduct reconnaissance and West German units had done so after the border was crossed.
There had been a lot of shooting and Soviet forces had come off the worse. The official word coming up the chain-of-command to Mackenzie was that there had come resistance there and it had been dealt with. The West Germans had been mopping up those who didn’t want to surrender and to do so had involved firing on those they encountered. Again, it was something that Mackenzie was going to have to let go for the time being. This was their country they were liberating and they were going into a ‘sensitive area’. As long as there were no outright war crimes being committed and the enemy still had weapons in their hands then it would be left alone by he and his headquarters staff.
Such a thing was to be expected.
March 30th 1990 Berlin
For Operation Halberd, NATO pushed two dozen combat divisions – twenty-four heavy and light divisions from multiple nations – towards and into Berlin. They came for what a journalist attached to the US Third Army had been told would be ‘the mother of all battles’.
A couple of hundred thousand combat and supporting soldiers from the United States, Britain, France, West Germany and Belgium (along with token contributions from Canada, Italy, Luxembourg and Spain) were involved. Halberd had begun with their paratroopers arriving followed by airmobile units supporting them; today the heavy ground units arrived. NATO forces were armed to the teeth and came with a wide variety of weaponry. They were ready to (if they had to) fight for every building, for every street and every inch of the city. No one wanted to level Berlin, West Berlin especially, but there was a preparation to do so if necessary if that was what it took to destroy its defenders.
One big fight was expected and there were estimates that it could last for a week, maybe more if things went wrong. Casualty numbers were projected to be high for friendlies, the enemy and civilians alike.
The fight turned out to be a damp squid.
*
Brigadier Dair Farrar-Hockley moved the 19th Infantry Brigade into West Berlin behind the Belgian troops up ahead.
He had his battalion battle-groups spread out moving along roads in tight columns and following their maps. Men had their rifles pointing all around them as they advanced on foot with their vehicles left behind them though the FV432s and Saxons were ready to rush forward and give support. There were eyes swinging from left to right and often looking up too towards windows and roofs of buildings. Everyone was waiting for an attack to come yet what fighting there was had already occurred and they were moving through an already-swept area. A few fires were visible and there was some smoke yet no gunshots rang out.
The rain was more of a concern for the British soldiers. There was a downpour underway and many grumbled about getting soaked; others considered what was being brought down with the rainwater from those clouds above, all of the gunk up in the sky. Without the big battle that they had been hyped up for, the let out their tension in other ways and complaining was always good for morale in its own way.
On the radio, Farrar-Hockley kept in contact with his subunits and also his higher command with the 4th Armoured Division. The 11th Armoured Brigade, to the west of where he was, had seen some engagements though those were few and far between. The Belgian units which had come through first had taken the gunfire of the defending troops before they had either deserted or surrendered and so there were only a very few East Germans left who needed mopping up. No contact with an enemy had come with either the 20th Armoured Brigade nor Farrar-Hockley’s brigade though. All they were seeing were men surrendering: hundreds were coming towards British troops with their hands up.
The brigade kept on going forward and moving deeper into Berlin with everyone wondering whether all that the East Germans had been able to do to defend occupied West Berlin was to slow them down by surrendering in such numbers.
Major-General Binford Peay’s 101st Air Assault Infantry Division was inside East Berlin. They were getting drenched by the rain too but were also seeing combat today as the East Germans fought for their capital where and how they could.
The airhead at Tempelhof through which Peay had brought in his men was behind them. They were now in the Lichtenberg and Mitte districts, right in the heart of East Berlin after coming across the River Spree. The advance had been an opposed one yet had not delayed the men Peay commanded to any great degree. There had been roadblocks and sniping as well as some attacks from man-portable heavy weapons yet the East Germans hadn’t held onto anywhere they had tried to. They continued to fall back if they weren’t shot down by the Screaming Eagles taking their capital city away from them.
Coming forward himself, closer to the moving frontlines than many on his staff had been happy with, Peay was able to hear the odd gunshot and there were some explosions too. Where the East Germans used RPGs, his men were returning fire with Dragons. There were Sheridan tracked armoured vehicles with the 82nd Airborne Division also present – keeping the two divisions apart so they didn’t get in each other’s way or, worse, engage in friendly fire, was difficult – here in East Berlin and Peay knew they too were using their big guns to blast stubborn last defenders. The US XVIII Airborne Corps headquarters had told him that across in West Berlin there was minimal resistance and it was only a case of mopping up a very few diehards there. Here in East Berlin that resistance was stronger though still of no serious obstruction overall. He knew that his men had advanced very far in a short space of time against a dug-in opposition who were operating on their own ground, yet while the enemy fought here, they didn’t do it very well. It had come as a shock how easy it had been after all of the build-up getting ready with Peay proud of his men for how they had handled themselves in the best traditions of themselves, their unit history and the US Army.
Untrained men formed the majority of enemy ranks, his division intelligence officer was now saying, and that certainly looked to be the case. Either way, those who weren’t giving up, as more and more were doing, were dying when they came up again Peay’s men. He hoped that more of them would see sense and surrender like others because there was no need for any of this: they had lost and any more fighting was pointless.
Brigadier-General Wesley Clark left his command column behind temporarily and joined with his tanks and armoured infantry as they entered Berlin-Tegel Airport. The 177th Armored Brigade was pouring forward through West Berlin with no one opposing them and Clark believed that he would never get an opportunity like this again to be right in the centre of such dramatic effects.
There was no one who would tell him to stop behaving like a fool.
Not driving across the tarmac of the runaways or flight-ramp yet going over the grass and the taxiways, Clark’s men in their vehicles secured the airport. He was disappointed to find that no one wanted to make a fight of it and had hoped that the East Germans would make a show for themselves. However, they had either ran away or thrown up their hands all throughout the day as Clark’s brigade, the 28th Infantry Division to which he was assigned as well as the US II Corps and US Third Army (the higher commands the 177th Brigade reported to) took an immense amount of enemy-held territory with only a few shots made.
He’d seen the surrendering enemy himself and there had been nothing but contempt for them. They’d been poor soldiers who couldn’t shoot straight and had no idea of how to fight. The Soviets were dreadful people, but at least their men – when he’d engaged them in previous fights – had fought. An East German colonel had tried to surrender himself to Clark after his regiment had fallen apart and even gave a salute: Clark had let his XO deal with him and focused on moving forward and achieving his brigade objectives… with a view to taking someone else’s too if he could. Apparently, the British and West German paratroopers who’s come into West Berlin first, along with the airmobile soldiers of the US 10th Light Infantry Division, had had a tougher time in the last two days. He had no idea who they’d been fighting! All he had seen was an enemy giving up and looking scared that they were about to be shot for wearing the wrong uniform. There hadn’t even been any mopping up of hold-outs to do as everyone his men encountered just wanted to surrender and be given a hot meal as well as ‘freedom in the West’.
There were helicopters in the sky and jets above too, flying under the clouds dropping all of the dirty rain down onto West Berlin. Clark had climbed out of the Bradley he had rode into the airport grounds aboard and looked up at them above him. They’d all be looking down upon him and the victory which he had just achieved, leading from the front as he had.
Major-General Michael Rose had his 3rd Armoured Division push deeper into West Berlin as the advance was made along the Heerstrass heading for the very centre of the city as it was being liberated. The 6th Armoured Brigade had taken over the lead now as the 4th Armoured Brigade was needed to stay back around Spandau assisting with the Paras finishing off enemy resistance there that was no more than mopping up anyone foolish to want to continue to fight: the 33rd Armoured Brigade was to follow, bringing up the rear of the main divisional attack.
On the radio, Rose listened to the British I Corps staff giving orders to be aware that the helicopters over Berlin were to be treated as friendly unless proved otherwise. There was no truth to earlier false reports that East German leadership people or the Stasi were fleeing in them: those were West German helicopters delivering men ahead of the advance into certain locations. He knew what those ‘key sites’ would be that the West Germans were going after. Rose was certain that places such as the ruin of the Reichstag and elsewhere like the Brandenburg Gate. They were regarded by the West Germans as important to their history and they were clearly racing for them by the fastest means to make sure that no one blew them apart. He had been warned during the pre-mission briefing that there was a fear of massive, coordinated destruction by the East Germans in West Berlin where they would destroy it rather than let it fall into NATO hands. Like everything else, that now appeared to have been wrong.
Even today’s weather forecast had been inaccurate!
Berlin was meant to be a tough fight with defenders ready to give their all. Instead, Rose’s men in the tanks and vehicles were passing by East German soldiers surrendering at every opportunity – slowing things up as they did – rather than fight for this city. West Berliners were starting to come out onto the street too.
How different this was from Dordrecht and the climactic battle there.
Generalmajor Lothar Engelhardt had pulled his headquarters back to the Pankow district. NATO troops were all over Berlin and there had also been the security issue with so many men under his command if not surrendering then planning to take him prisoner to hand him over to the invader. From what he could gather, should he need to – and it was looking like that indeed – there was still a way out of Berlin to escape to the northeast as NATO were in control to the west, the south and now the centre of the city. They’d reach Pankow soon enough and he’d either have to surrender to them or be gone from here.
At the rate of their advance, he reckoned they would reach where his headquarters within another hour, maybe less. Before then, he needed to make a decision.
The Battle of Berlin had lasted three days. During the first two, Engelhardt’s men had tried and failed to contain the rapidly-expanding airborne bridgeheads that the invader had established at several points to the west and south. He had sent men to counter them and seen his men massacred. Both regiments of armoured infantry with reservists who were somewhat veterans of the war had been beaten. Regular units of guardsmen and also border troops had failed to make any headway in supporting attacks against those and the enemy paratroopers who’s made their early arrival had opened the gates to the city…
…for the rest of NATO’s troops to pour in today.
There was no contact with either his country’s civilian leadership nor Soviet military forces which had pulled away to the east near to the Polish border. Engelhardt just had his last received orders to defend the city at all cost with what few troops he had. Well, he had been unable to complete that task. The belief that NATO would move into West Berlin first and then go after East Berlin had been wrong as they had hit both sides of the city with all that they had. They had blasted their way past what men of Engelhardt’s had fought and breezed through those surrendering everywhere else. Those surrenders were widespread. The numbers Engelhardt was informed about were shocking. So many men who were meant to defend Berlin had just quit the fight.
NATO had won because they were strong while Engelhardt’s forces were weak, especially since the Soviets had abandoned them. They had also won this fight for the city, even if it was not yet over with the invaders to finish off mopping up who else remembered their duties to fight, because so many defenders had decided not to make that stand which they were meant to.
Engelhardt was given the latest update on how far NATO was reported to have reached. The heart of Berlin was theirs fully and there was also a drive by French armour outside of the city proper around the eastern outskirts, clearly an attempt to cut everyone left inside off from the outside. With that, he realized that the end had come here and there was no point in continuing.
He chose to surrender and started issuing orders for his staff to try and get in contact with someone senior in the NATO leadership of those taking Berlin. An American by the name of Yeosock commanded the US Third Army, he was told, and a Briton named Inge led the Northern Army Group.
He opted for the British, not wanting to suffer the certain overbearing attitude of the Americans.
*
The Battle of Berlin would be over by the end of the day.
NATO had won a fantastic victory, one whose conduct had taken them by surprise in the end… in a pleasing fashion. There had come casualties yet the number of those were at first estimates less than ten thousand overall with a feeling that those would drop.
The war wasn’t over though. And it was just about to take a terrifying turn too.
March 30th 1990 The Baltic Sea and the Barents Sea
Over the past couple of days, the USS Iowa had been very busy. The battleship and her surface action group (SAG) were on a second attack mission heading east across the Baltic Sea which had first taken them up to Bornholm to shell Soviet troops occupying that Danish island and then there had come more attacks along the Polish coastline. Today, the Iowa had been alongside her escorts as they engaged enemy naval targets in mopping up operations against Warsaw Pact warships who were left operating in Gdansk Bay. There had been an intention to shell the port facilities at Gdansk and Gdynia though reconnaissance had shown that they had seen little repairs since air attacks launched against them earlier in the war: it would be a wasted effort.
News had come that there were Soviet naval forces off the coastline of the Kaliningrad Oblast and so instead of attacking Poland, the Iowa and her SAG had raced north to go after them.
The only intention was to attack enemy warships out at sea and possibly engage shore missile defences if those fired upon the US Navy ships. The Iowa had long since used up her Tomahawk cruise missiles (a port reload was needed) and there were no more either in those of her escorts who had such a long-range land-attack capability. The Soviet coast itself wasn’t to be shelled directly in a manner like Bornholm had because there was no plan to send marines in afterwards. The move northwards to go along the coastline of the Soviet Union by the Iowa SAG was just a raid conducted on the fly to hit enemy forces at sea.
In doing so though, the Americans went very close to the sovereign soil of their enemy and their intentions weren’t known. The Iowa SAG was a hostile strategic missile platform and also capable of support amphibious operations too.
The Soviet Navy’s Baltic Fleet had some of its submarines still active. There had been many losses taken to the sub-surface force though those were far less than the surface elements of the Baltic Fleet had suffered in almost two months of warfare. The submarines were spread across the Baltic Sea with a focus now upon defending the Soviet coast rather than aiming to get through the Baltic Exits or even control the northern coastlines of East Germany and Poland.
Orders had been issued several times throughout the war to these submarines when it came to their rules of engagement. The latest orders for those left active that were within reach of their own coastline (in the Gulf of Finland, down along the shores of the Baltic Republics and off the Kaliningrad Oblast) which had come a week ago were that they were to protect the Soviet Union from direct invasion coming from the sea. If an amphibious force was sighted, it was to be to attacked without waiting for favourable tactical circumstances. In certain cases, in the most exceptional circumstances, the use of ‘special weapons’ was allowed. It was a standing policy which Kryuchkov had signed off on: if there was an imminent danger of an invasion taking place, then the submarines defending the coast could fire nuclear-tipped torpedoes. To allow for a rapidly-changing situation and to avert the grave danger coming from an invasion – seen in Kryuchkov’s mind to be more than the risks from nuclear warfare –, final authorization from Baltic Fleet headquarters wasn’t needed if contact couldn’t be made without revealing the submarine to attack by those it was aiming to engage.
These orders hadn’t yet to be changed by those who had toppled Kryuchkov. They were still busy doing a million other things and had put more importance on shooting their opponents at home. Control over nuclear weapons had been secured, they believed, when they had undertaken their coup d’état with code-cases in their control. Tactical weapons were known to be everywhere and not always under direct control yet instructions had been issued to the Baltic Fleet that it wasn’t to launch a nuclear attack without higher authorization. That message had been received and affirmed and word was then passed down to the submarines at sea to give them a change in orders where the only way in which they could fire their torpedoes with nuclear warheads was if they were given direct permission. When it came to the previous orders, no one in the Baltic Fleet headquarters had been happy at the previous ones giving personal freedom to individual submarine commanders at sea in a war zone to fire off such weapons; they were eagerly passing them to their submarines. It should be additionally noted that the Baltic Fleet knew that no invasion was coming from the sea as NATO was busy in East Germany and there was no amphibious force anywhere near the Soviet coast.
This all took time though. The submarines needed to be contacted when they were on the surface with antenna raised. Half a dozen of the Baltic Fleet submarines on coastal defence missions had received their new orders, two more had yet to.
One of those was the Type-877 class (known to NATO as the Kilo-class) submarine with the hull number 469.
Tonight, when operating off the Kaliningrad Oblast four miles away from Baltiysk, the 469 spotted an amphibious force complete with a US Navy battleship. There was a misidentification of several warships as amphibious assault ships but the classification of the Iowa was correct. Radio contact was at once tried to be established with land but when the antenna was raised, this drew enemy fire in the form of torpedoes dropped from helicopters. The 469 came under sustained attack as it had appeared right ahead of the Americans and they fired upon it like they would any other target. The submarine dived, left noise-makers in her wake and made herself silent. A fierce debate occurred aboard between the captain, his first officer and the KGB security officer over the danger posed by the battleship and her ‘amphibious cohorts’ to the Soviet Union itself. There was panic and self-conservation in their minds but also the knowledge that they didn’t want to disobey their standing orders. The Americans were heading in the direction of Baltiysk, a port that would be valuable for an amphibious landing operation. A decision was made and a lone 53-65 anti-ship torpedo with a ASB-30 thermonuclear warhead fitted to it was fired towards the Iowa.
Up above, the US Navy was hunting for the submarine below. The threat was recognised as serious because of the identification of the Kilo and its capabilities. Messages went up the chain-of-command from out of the Iowa SAG that a submarine was being engaged off the Kaliningrad Oblast while downwards from the command staff aboard the battleship to eliminate the threat. Only conventional weapons were used by the Americans as the engagement didn’t in any way meet their own criteria for the use of their own carried nuclear weapons. Torpedoes were fired and depth charges dropped.
Then the wake-homing 533mm torpedo raced towards the Iowa.
A frigate tried to get in the way and torpedo decoys were activated. Warnings went out and preparations were made in case the torpedo hit. There was absolutely no indication of the particular warhead on that incoming projectile.
It blew up in the Iowa’s wake. The warhead with a destructive force of eight kilotons detonated twenty yards astern of the battleship. The Iowa (a combat veteran of the Second World War, the First Korean War and the Third World War) and those who were aboard her, along with the crews of two other warships, were wiped out in an instant due to the nuclear blast which created a fireball and then a massive shockwave.
There was much damage done to other warships part of the Iowa SAG but from them came urgent FLASH messages declaring a nuclear attack against the US Navy by a Soviet submarine.
*
Up in the Barents Sea, Carrier Strike Group Two was unable to undertake any major mopping up operations as the Arctic waters were clear of targets for them to engage. They had recently conducted support operations over the very northeastern tip of Norway when that had been liberated and made some more air attacks far to the south inside the Soviet Union beyond the coastline where the enemy had withdrawn its air and missile defences from. There had been some submarines to engage but no enemy surface ships of note nor naval aviation present. The carriers and the immense escort force had seen their war come to a halt due to their victory being so overwhelming.
A few warships had recently been sent away to the Baltic Sea and there was some talk of more going as well. The carriers were staying here though. Their aircraft had only flown conventional strikes during the war though Carrier Strike Group Two had a strategic mission should the war go nuclear: if the worst happened, thermonuclear bombs would be carried by A-6 intruders and FA-18 Hornets against Soviet targets. Being prepared to fulfil a strategic role like this meant that the rules of engagement which the US Navy had here were different than if the carriers were elsewhere. They were right in what the Soviets regarded as their own waters and would be an early target in a nuclear exchange scenario; this was too the case with the carriers in the Black Sea and off the coast of the Soviet Far East as well.
To defend the carriers, nuclear weapons could be used but the circumstances had to be exceptional.
Carrier Strike Group Two was a SACLANT asset. SACLANT (on equal footing with SACEUR) was the wartime US Navy Second Fleet supported and working with NATO navies in the North Atlantic and some of the a-joining seas including the Barents Sea. When it came to the Baltic Sea and the Mediterranean Sea, NATO naval operations in them were under SACEUR command. That was the peacetime arrangement and it had remained the case throughout the war.
However, due to the need for cooperation between (relatively) nearby NATO naval forces operating under different higher commands, SACLANT forces and those of SACEUR’s naval components were in close contact without going up and down the chain-of-command each and every time. They shared intelligence on enemy capabilities and movements when it came to naval and naval air operations. The Soviets were operating their Northern, Baltic and Black Sea Fleet’s independently and there wasn’t known to be any such cooperation between them: NATO had seen the effects of that and wasn’t prepared to do it. Orders came down as they were meant to from above but the naval forces under different higher commands were in regular contact with each other. This was especially true among those from the same national service who were separated into serving under either SACLANT and SACEUR.
The US Navy had their strategic warfare missions ready to go as well and that also meant a great deal of cooperation and communication between vessels within different theaters as threat levels were monitored with utmost attention.
Within minutes of the news that the Iowa had been attacked and destroyed with a nuclear weapon in the Baltic Sea, Carrier Strike Group Two contacted SACLANT with permission requested to assume a nuclear posture with regards to defence only. There was no request made to launch an attack – that wasn’t going to be something asked; if that happened it would be an order coming down – but just to enforce its nuclear defence posture. The permission was granted fast enough. There was a lot going on with the news about the Iowa and the larger strategic implications yet neither the request and permission were made in blind panic. This had to be done to protect the carriers from a nuclear threat to them so they didn’t suffer the same fate as the Iowa. No one knew if the destruction of the battleship was the first shot of the nuclear apocalypse everyone feared, but if it was Carrier Strike Group Two needed to be able to undertake its role in that and that meant defending the carriers.
Soon enough, a threat justified as needing to see the particular defence implemented was found… maybe a little too easily.
With full permission and no confusion to it, the USS John Hancock fired off a pair of her RUR-5 ASROC anti-submarine rockets at a sub-surface target detected by one of her Seasprite helicopters. The rockets shot away from the destroyer and then depth charges fell away over the water above a target; small parachutes slowed the depth charges down for their descent deep into the Barents Sea.
Seconds apart and at different depths, each exploded.
These were W44 nuclear depth charges. The weapon had been in the process of being withdrawn from service last year before the change in geo-politic circumstances as Eastern Europe had erupted in violence had meant a ‘temporary delay’ in that. One of these had been used before during World War Three against a suspected Cuban submarine in the Caribbean where a US Navy submarine there fired a UUM-44 SUBROC rocket with a W44. Now two more of these depth charges were used against a Soviet submarine in the Barents Sea.
The pair of ten kiloton blasts had been timed perfectly to destroy the targeted submarine. Their detonations at different depths and with a slight delay between each was meant to make sure that the multiple shockwaves rather than the actual blasts themselves underwater would kill the submarine. Success came and the submarine was ripped apart by those shockwaves. From up above, the crew aboard the Seasprite, told to fly away, saw nothing of the twin underwater blasts: no noticeable physical effects were observed visually or on radar due to the engagement depth.
*
In the next couple of hours, the ICBMs and SLBMs didn’t fly. There was no nuclear apocalypse.
American and Soviet military forces had just directly engaged each other in nuclear warfare, twice within the space of an hour. This time they weren’t attacking their opponent’s allies (even their own in the case of the Soviets) but each other. Yet there was no destruction in nuclear fire of Washington, New York, London, Paris, Moscow, Leningrad and so on. Every civilian in both the United States and the Soviet Union wasn’t killed by malicious mass murderers in power in the other nation leaving the world facing nuclear winter where within the year anyone left alive would be mutant cannibals etc.
The worst fears were not realized.
Why?
The nuclear attacks took place at sea and out of sight of land. These were tactical weapons used against combat forces, not civilian targets. There was only some information on what occurred in the Baltic Sea and the Barents Sea: no one had the complete picture. That could have led to a panicked reaction but instead there was a need expressed to find out what exactly had occurred first rather than a rush to hit back without the knowledge gained of what it all meant.
Each attack had its own form of authorization though with the first one, the Soviet command structure at an operational level had not been directly involved. Following the nuclear blast off their coast and then a communication afterwards from the submarine 469, only then did confirmation come of just what had happened. Those aboard the submarine were surprised at the reaction they received from their commanders as they had only been following orders. When it came to the Barents Sea, the Soviets had no idea of what had happened there apart from sub-sea sensors had caught sound of the twin blasts. There was the thinking that another one of their submarines had attacked the Americans (following the same orders as the one in the Baltic Sea) rather than the other way around.
The Americans knew exactly what had occurred in the Baltic Sea and the Barents Sea but were unsure about the circumstances leading up to the blast in the former. They didn’t know why exactly their ships had been attacked with such a large loss of life which resulted from the Iowa’s destruction though. The motivation behind that was something they sought out as their understanding was that nuclear weapons couldn’t and wouldn’t be used by accident. They were ready for more attacks to come their way while at the same time worrying that their intelligence that the Soviets were very eager to end this war now was wrong and it was being escalated instead.
Each side was now waiting for the other to retaliate.
The Americans waited for a counter to their retaliation. The Soviets had hit first, they had struck back and they feared that the Soviets would attack again.
As to the Soviets, they believed that their forces had struck twice against the Americans (both unauthorized) and were worried about an American retaliation.
Both sides were gathering information and trying to keep what had happened need-to-know. They were also waiting to see what would follow the nuclear attacks, what the other side would do.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:54:47 GMT
Forty–Four – Disarray
March 31st 1990 Above the Russian SSR, the Soviet Union
As part of the staff of the Committee of Three, Colonel Putin had come aboard the emergency aircraft late last night. From out of Chkalovsky air base, the Ilyushin-80 aircraft had rapidly climbed into the sky with two of the trio that made up the Soviet Union’s new leadership aboard along with others who had been involved in the coup d’état. There had been an urgent rush when the news had come in of the initiation of nuclear warfare with United States military forces to get airborne and others had been left behind.
Putin wished now that he had been one of those; anything would be better than to be aboard this aircraft with all of the crazy events going on in the sky.
Circling high above the clouds this morning, the Il-80 was being kept away from locations thought to be targets in a nuclear exchange. Il-78 airborne tankers had met with it several times to refuel the emergency command post so that there was no need yet to land. There were also a pair of MiG-31 interceptors always nearby, just in case.
Putin was feeling air sick and knew he needed to be back on the ground. The air he and everyone else was breathing was terrible. There was no natural light inside the aircraft either with the Il-80 (a military version of the civilian Ilyushin-86) having no windows apart from those up in the cockpit. Since being aboard, he had been party to many briefings and strategy meetings though cut out of many others too as those who were more important than he discussed matters to which he wasn’t privy. There were fellow spooks like himself aboard as well as military officers; no civilians, politicians or not, had flown out of Chkalovsky. Sleep was needed by him and so many others yet the geo-political situation remained tense and there was concern that something would be missed by those who slept.
News continued to be sent to the aircraft from the ground of events pertaining to that tense situation. There had been no more nuclear explosions but there were warning signs everywhere that more were about to occur unless the diplomacy employed worked to avert that. There was no news yet to be received here on the effects of that diplomacy and so everyone was waiting impatiently for communication from the ground to come.
Putin waited like the rest of them, eager to hear something, anything to say whether or not the world wasn’t about to end.
The nuclear explosions in the Baltic Sea and the Barents Sea had thrown all Soviet plans for bringing an end to the war to a satisfactory conclusion into sudden disarray. From out of nowhere, two submarines in the service of the Soviet Navy had opened fire with nuclear weapons against American naval forces. Details were only forthcoming on why the first one (the submarine off Kaliningrad) had done so with word having not yet come from the second. Each had attacked the US Navy due to standing orders to defend the shores of the country against an amphibious invasion; such orders had been put into place by Kryuchkov and the Soviet Navy had taken far too long to see them confirmed as retracted.
Amazingly, but also alarmingly, the Americans had yet to make a retaliation.
Putin didn’t believe that they had been cowed and were frightened like some aboard this aircraft had asserted that they were. Yet, neither did he believe that they were waiting ready to retaliate with a massive strike once they had marshaled all of their forces and lulled the Soviet Union into a false sense of security as others were so sure of. His belief, his personal feeling based upon what he knew of the West, was that they were still trying to figure out what had gone on and were also debating the wisdom of retaliating as they feared nuclear war like his country’s new leaders did too. He had been part of the effort to remove the threat of nuclear war by getting rid of Kryuchkov who the Committee of Three and supporters such as himself believed was about to cause that: no one here wanted to see that occur and he joined them in hoping that the Americans saw things in the same light.
From multiple sources of intelligence, there were signs coming from all over the place that American and other Western nuclear forces – those of Britain, France and Israel – were on alert and ready to attack. They had missiles, aircraft and submarines all with nuclear weapons pointed at the Soviet Union. Again though, the interpretation of that could be either that they were making ready to strike either first or if there was another use of nuclear weapons against them by Soviet forces unauthorized like before or deliberate. Chess with hand grenades, Putin had heard the current stand-off with nuclear forces described: both sides trying to gain an advantage while holding explosive pieces. His country had been forced to do the same and he had been briefed on the moves to ready their own missiles, aircraft and submarines too.
Averting that nuclear war was what was wanted though and so the diplomacy employed had been contacting the Americans several times over night and through the early hours of this morning.
Making use of the Hot Line – the facsimile system which had recently replaced the teletype system: there was no ‘red phone’ – to establish contact from the system’s location at the Communist Party headquarters building in Moscow near to the Kremlin to the Pentagon outside Washington, messages had been sent to the Americans. They were told that both firing of nuclear weapons had been unauthorized (no exact details given) and there was no intention to have that repeated. Putin had been present when it was explained aboard the aircraft that it would take time for a reply as there would be confusion and panic in the United States among their leadership though not all had understood that and there had bene concerns over the delay in getting a first response. When that had come, the Americans had said that they would respond in kind to any nuclear attack upon them as had been the case with the attack in the Baltic Sea; they hadn’t mentioned the Barents Sea. They had also queried the meaning of ‘unauthorized usage’.
Back to the Americans, the reply had been that the Soviet Union would too respond in kind yet there was no desire to see any more nuclear attacks take place. With regards to the issue of authorization, after much debate here on the aircraft over whether it was wise to admit what many saw as weakness, the Americans were told that there were some orders wrongly issued to individual Soviet forces that were urgently being corrected. There was another delay before the next Hot Line message from the Americans asked whether Soviet forces in Cuba armed with nuclear weapons were under Soviet national control or answerable to either Cuban forces or local commanders there.
An event fiercer argument had raged aboard the aircraft about how to answer such questions. Putin had been on the side of those who wanted to tell the truth – well… some of it anyway – to the Americans. Others though were alarmed at the knowledge that the Americans had about what weapons had been sent to Cuba in secret and the implications of the Americans asking about them to assert who controlled them: the belief was that they wanted to know what would be the effects of attacking those weapons before their use. What decision was eventually reached was sort of a compromise and the reply sent to the Americans told them that issues concerning control over Soviet nuclear weapons deployed for defensive-only purposes abroad were being urgently addressed. The thinking was that to admit that there were nuclear weapons in Cuba would be too much yet it was hinted at so that if those weapons were used without authorization then the Americans would already be aware of control issues. No one was happy with this compromise… including the Americans who responded that if those weapons there, or anywhere else, were used against their own military forces or their homeland then they would respond and the Soviet Union should be in do doubt about that.
Following that last message received from the Americans, there had been a decision not to send another reply for now. There had come no more messages from the Americans either and talks had commenced aboard this aircraft about what to do. Putin hadn’t been party to them but had been told afterwards that it was decided that ever-so-slowly certain Soviet strategic nuclear forces – those which the Americans were known to monitor – would be stood down from the very highest alert to the status that they were before the attacks had taken place. It was hoped that the Americans would do the same, actions which could be observed, and things would revert to how they were yesterday where both sides were ready to annihilate the other though not with fingers on triggers.
Confirmation had yet to come that the Americans were shadowing Soviet de-escalation moves yet neither had they fired off their nuclear arsenal either. Putin had been tasked that while he was still on the aircraft with others appointed to support the leadership, he should return to the duties he was preforming before the evacuation from Moscow. There would be challenges as the aircraft remained in the sky but he was to make do for now.
The Committee of Three consisted of the new heads of the KGB, the GRU and STAVKA. The two spooks had brought down Kryuchkov while the military officer had been appointed by them to temporarily co-rule with them to placate the Soviet Armed Forces. They had all made a firm pact to end the war and hand over rule of the country to a new civilian leader, one who was amenable to the West but also under their control behind the scenes so that he wouldn’t sell out them, their organisations of their nation when dealing with a victorious West. Putin was one of many junior people assisting them in helping to achieve this goal and his duty – before being taken aboard the aircraft – had been to address issues which would work against the desired peace with the West when his country was in a position internally to bring that forth: he had been working on the matter of POWs held by the Soviet Union.
The paperwork he had brought with him (he had grabbed what he had in front of him when ordered to evacuate Moscow) concerned three numbers. The first was how many NATO prisoners had been taken by Soviet military forces into captivity, the second was how many had been turned over to the custody of MVD paramilitary forces who ran detention facilities inside the Soviet Union and the third was how many were currently alive in confinement. There were differences between those numbers, real large ones and they were going to cause immense problems with ending the war in a manner which his country wanted… that being if the current nuclear-ceasefire with the West didn’t suddenly fall apart.
March 31st 1990 Sperenberg Airbase, Brandenburg, East Germany
Yesterday afternoon, General Schwarzkopf had left his headquarters at Kaserne Husterhoeh and flown into East Germany. It had been a temporary move with the majority of his staff left back near the West German–French border and SACEUR only planning to stay at a forward command post at Sperenberg ready and waiting for him for less than twenty-four hours… such had been the plan.
The move into occupied territory had been done so that Schwarzkopf would be in a position to easily go forward and make an arrangement in person with the Soviets when they would surrender their remaining forces in East Germany. That expectation had come about due to the surrenders of major pockets of resistance cut off behind the lines and then the collapse of enemy forces in Berlin too. Initially, SACEUR had been planning to send his deputy but word had come from Powell and the NSC back home that he should go himself to make any deal with the Soviets.
Sperenberg Airbase had been heavily-damaged during the war with repeated NATO air attacks made against the large facility yet again and again the Soviets had made improvised repairs. However, they had abandoned it a couple of days ago and French tanks had swept through the area afterwards. It had been regarded as a good location for Schwarzkopf to operate from as it was close to Berlin as well as Soviet forces away to the east in addition to being located in an isolated area where there was protection against enemy activity was offered. There had been some consideration given to using the military facilities at Wünsdorf (near Zossen) instead yet there were still NATO intelligence teams all over that area along with specialist engineers disarming demolition charges which failed to go off. Sperenberg had been considered safer.
SACEUR was still here after the nuclear incidents last night, though eager to get back to Husterhoeh soon enough.
Whilst he remained inside East Germany waiting for either the Soviets to go all-out with a massive nuclear attack or to surrender their troops – he didn’t know which way it would go –, Schwarzkopf had been busy.
A planned halt order to the continuing offensives to complete Operation Eastern Storm had been fought off; there had been the same panic among certain politicians at home and in Europe just like there had been after the blast at Deest. Thankfully, there were more voices of intelligence than stupidity on that matter. To stop moving forward in East Germany and Czechoslovakia would have been foolish and maybe what the Soviets had wanted if their attack against the USS Iowa had been planned rather than an apparent ‘accident’. SACEUR had the US Third Army and NORTHAG start to move some of their troops out of Berlin – those no longer needed to deal with security and securing prisoners – and eastwards while re-arranging other troops ready to make that final push on the Polish border. More of the US Third Army, plus the US Marines and some British amphibious forces too, were in the northern part of East Germany while there was the US Seventh Army pushing through Saxony in the south. In addition, there were French and West German forces in Bohemia who were pushing for Prague; in Austria, the multi-national forces there were liberating more of that country with an aim for twin advances east to Vienna and the Hungarian border.
Schwarzkopf hadn’t wanted to see any of their advances brought to a halt. The enemy was defeated and the front was opened right up. If things changed, then any halt would be extremely detrimental to the conduct of the war. SACEUR had been told who exactly had voiced the idea for a halt order, especially the main proponent back in the United States, and wasn’t happy. Just who was this Jim Webb character who had been made Vice President and kept having ideas such as this that were taken seriously?
Schwarzkopf had his staff give him a briefing on the latest news on where the Soviet forces left in East Germany were positioned and their capabilities. He also wanted to see if there was any more intelligence on Marshal Gromov, the Soviet commander who he intended to take the surrender of. There was little additional information on that latter issue though and he made sure that his displeasure was shown. He needed a further understanding of the man, especially his personal character, if he was going to have dealings with him.
There had been a media event which SACEUR had done too. Selected elements of the press, those who had come with him the last time he was in East Germany along with a couple of others, all of whom were vetted for security purposes but mainly with him because they were ‘friendly’, were given a walk-around by Schwarzkopf of Sperenberg and then briefed by him on some of the latest war news. He told them how Berlin had fallen easily and there had been a return to West Berlin of NATO forces. Civilians had been liberated there while in East Berlin there was an effort underway to work with locals too in the form of feeding and giving medical attention to those in need. Some East German forces, led by the Stasi, were holding out in Potsdam, he told the media, but they had no hope of lasting very long. In addition, SACEUR spoke of how earlier this morning US national guardsmen had gone into the town of Brandenburg an der Havel and taken it against heavy resistance again from Stasi-led forces. There was information of mass shootings of political prisoners at the Brandenburg-Görden Prison (which his staff would be making them aware of) included in the final bloody events yet the town was now liberated.
None of those talks with the media had been done for live broadcast and would all have to go through censorship scrutiny first. The information security issue was still a big deal and none of that was going to change. Physical security was also something which demanded attention, especially since Schwarzkopf was this deep inside East Germany. At Sperenberg with him was his usual team of bodyguards though now reinforced by extra men. SACEUR had spoken with Major McChrystal, one of those additions, and learnt about the special forces missions he had made deep into enemy territory during the war. One of those had been to assassinate a Soviet field army commander and Schwarzkopf was informed how – hypothetically! – McChrystal kill him in such a manner too. The Soviets would do so if they could, SACEUR was informed, and keeping him safe so he continued to lead NATO forces in Europe was of vital importance.
General Hans Henning von Sandrart arrived at Sperenberg just before midday. He commander Allied Forces Central Europe (AFCENT) and was one of Schwarzkopf’s principle subordinates as all those fighting through both Germanys and into Czechoslovakia were under his command, those on the ground and in the air. A British general and a US Navy admiral led Allied Forces Northern Europe and Allied Forces Southern Europe, but von Sandrart’s position was superior due to the larger number of assigned forces plus the geographic factor as well. The previous SACEUR, General Galvin, had had a better relationship with von Sandrart than Schwarzkopf currently did. The man had overseen the collapse of large parts of the West German Army last month and then been resistant to efforts to bring reorganized parts of the Bundeswehr back into battle claiming that they had needed more time. These had aggravated the current SACEUR to a great degree but due to political needs he had been unable to get rid of the man. Instead of relieving him of his duties, Schwarzkopf had appointed people to his staff who he believed were more responsible than some of those (from many nations, not just West Germans) previously serving under von Sandrart for the role they needed to perform there in AFCENT’s headquarters.
Speaking with his subordinate, SACEUR made sure that von Sandrart was fully up to speed on the current plans for continuing operations going forward to rid East Germany of Stasi hold-outs leading groups of paramilitary troops at Potsdam and in the north as well as defeating the last of the Soviets here. In addition, Schwarzkopf told him how important operations in Czechoslovakia were too. There was no intention yet to go over into Poland due to political wishes, but if the need did come, then SACEUR wanted to be ready to do that. There was also a reminder given to make sure that there was sufficient measures being taken to make sure that NATO units weren’t bunched up too tight when not in combat: if the worst happened and the Soviets started using tactical nuclear weapons, then NATO forces didn’t want to be in a position where it was made easy for such targeting to get the most bang-per-buck.
After that discussion, von Sandrart joined Schwarzkopf in a closed meeting (away from their staffs) about some of the latest intelligence coming out of Poland. Warning signs of something big about to occur there, which would more than just throw the enemy into disarray in their defensive efforts but have big political effects, were becoming more and more visible. If what looked like was about to happen did happen, then NATO needed to be ready for that.
March 31st 1990 MacDill AFB, Florida, the United States
At 21:04 local time a OTR-21 Tochka (NATO designation SS-21 Scarab) short-range ballistic missile was fired from outside of Mariel on Cuba’s northern coast. Less than thirty seconds later it exploded just above the ground outside of the town of Guanajay where there was ongoing fighting.
A second OTR-21 missile was fired by another mobile launcher which had rolled out of a sheltered position at 21:07 local time. Two minutes later the warhead detonated over the Marianao district of Havana, high ground southwest of the city centre.
There was a firing of a third missile at 21:09 by another launcher also from near Mariel which raced eastwards like the others. The warhead atop the OTR-21 failed to detonate when it was meant to over the Havana district of Arroyo Naranjo.
Between 21:11 and 21:14 – again local time in Cuba – six Tomahawk cruise missiles were fired by the US Navy cruiser USS Arkansas from the Straits of Florida against targets on land. Each Tomahawk exploded soon after a short flight across the wider Mariel area; the firing of three more OTR-21s was halted by the arriving Tomahawks as they made their own detonations.
Each missile, the OTR-21s and the Tomahawks alike, carried a thermonuclear warhead with yields of one hundred kilotons for the former and between sixty and seventy-five kilotons for the latter. The explosions in Cuba were nuclear blast numbers #29 to #36 of the war: most of which had occurred in Cuba.
The thirty-first of March 1990 would be known in Cuba afterwards as ‘la noche de los misiles sin misericordia’.
Dick Armitage was at MacDill during the night of the merciless missiles. As the president’s special envoy for Cuba and at SOUTHCOM’s forward headquarters in Florida, he had no role in making the decision to instigate Operation Sudden Fury. He supported the immediate counterstrike against Soviet forces which had fired on the Cubans yet that decision was made aboard the Doomsday Plane with President Bush and his top people.
Information flooded in here at MacDill when it came to the first blast which hit Cuban forces who’d just overrun Guanajay pushing the Soviets out of there and blowing their defensive plans into disarray. There had then come the explosion over Havana followed too the reports that a third missile observed heading for Havana didn’t appear to have detonated. Afterwards, Armitage was party to the reports concerning the effects of the Arkansas’ missiles as they hit the Soviet missile-launchers. Those Tomahawks which the cruiser had sent against Cuba were part of Sudden Fury, an operation which had been on hold throughout the day. From what he understood, those Soviet missiles had been recently detected where they were hidden and there had been a lot of urging on the part of some at the highest levels of the Bush Administration to hit them first while at the same time other voices urged caution. The SS-21s didn’t have the range to hit the United States and they were Soviet-manned, something which Armitage understood had been confirmed in recent Hot Line communications with the Soviets in a nod-wink fashion.
But then the missiles had been fired.
Planning for Sudden Fury had first been in the form of a counter-strike against them (wherever they were targeted against with use) using other United States military platforms in the form of ICBMs or SLBMs but eventually a naval option using a warship off Havana had been settled upon. The other two means of attack were believed to increase the chance of a Soviet retaliation from their homeland when they observed those launches taking place; they shouldn’t be able to see the Arkansas opening fire like it did. With the aim of the mission, Sudden Fury had been drawn up and then executed because it was believed that the missiles in Cuba were not under central Soviet control. They didn’t threaten the United States directly nor American military interests in the area due to their short-range yet there was no scenario where it was thought that it would be in the long-term interests of the United States to see them used. They might be used to threaten a peace deal between the United States and Cuba or against American forces which might move into Cuba after such a possible agreement. There was a belief too that should the Cubans be attacked by them as they turned against the Soviets inside their country that would too effect the United States in the long-run as well with an end to the war desired in Cuba only possible by having someone in charge in Cuba to talk to; less of a concern was on Cuban casualties, especially since Cuba had occupied United States territory and taken so many lives in doing so.
Soviet communications with their forces on Cuba had first been intercepted before being jammed. The United States knew where those missiles were and understood that they were not under direct control from Moscow. The local commander had orders which they weren’t able to discover and so when the jamming had commenced there had been concern expressed by some – Armitage later included along with SOUTHCOM’s commander – that perhaps that wasn’t a good idea; that line of thinking had been discounted by above as not reasonable.
Once the firings of them had taken place, first those by the Soviets against the Cubans and then the United States striking the Soviets, it was clear who had been in the wrong and who had been in the right with regard to those arguments over whether or not to strike and also if it had been a good idea to cut communications for the Soviets in Cuba.
The Cuban people paid with their lives for the decisions made by others.
A couple of hours later, as midnight approached, Armitage was preparing to leave MacDill and go back to Andrews. The Secretary of State was there and he was to report to her to be briefed as to what the plan was now with regards to how to deal with the fallout from Sudden Fury and Cuba overall when everything else previously discussed had bene thrown into disarray. He had been told that she hadn’t joined Bush when he and others had evacuated yesterday following the destruction of the USS Iowa in the Baltic Sea and remained airborne since then. His relationship with Bush was far better than it was with Dole… one remarkably better than he had with the Vice President, the main opponent of acting against the Soviet missiles in Cuba before they had struck and even afterwards from his understanding of that situation.
General Thurman had him urgently called back from the flight-ramp as he prepared to board his aircraft. Alarmed at the haste shown by the aide to the commander of SOUTHCOM, Armitage asked what was going on. He was told that there was something on the television which he had to see.
ABC’s Ted Koppel was reporting from Moscow. It was early in the morning of April 1st there in the Soviet capital and the host of Nightline was with his production crew filming on Moscow’s streets. Armitage recalled (before another of General Thurman’s aides informed him of the fact) that Koppel and his crew had been in West Berlin at the beginning of February filming a special edition of their show when the air corridors had been closed and contact had been lost with them – along with so many others: soldiers, diplomats, civilians and the media – when war erupted. Clearly, he and those with him had been held prisoner since then but now they were broadcasting from Moscow.
What they were showing was what Koppel declared was an uprising against Kryuchkov’s regime. The security services were nowhere to be seen and Koppel was claiming that the crowd was marching on Red Square. They were calling for an end to the war and declaring their support for Boris Yeltsin. There were thousands of them apparently, maybe tens of thousands.
Armitage wasn’t as stunned at the images as those around him but it was quite something to see. His thoughts were of looking at this in more than what was being shown though. The presence of a missing American media team broadcasting this to the world supposedly freely when they were meant to being held by the KGB (even feared dead) was one thing. Another was the lack of Soviet security forces everywhere right in the middle of Moscow. There was too the issue of this crowd suddenly urging for Yeltsin of all people: Boris Who? a lot of people would say. In addition, another matter of immediate suspicion as far as he was concerned was the timing.
This was happening now.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 15:57:15 GMT
Forty–Five – A Dagger On April Fool’s Day
April 1st 1990 Poland
With a sharpened dagger, the Poles stabbed their so-called fraternal allies the Soviets in the back on April Fool’s Day. The Soviets deserved it and had indications that it was coming, yet they really were hurt physically and emotionally by the betrayal. It wouldn’t be something forgotten by them. As to the Poles, they were fighting a just battle for freedom against an oppressor. If those Soviets who had hurt them for so long couldn’t accept it, if they didn’t have a sense of humour too, then it was their loss.
They were striking a blow for their country!
And the Poles struck everywhere. They attacked the Soviets along the East German–Polish border. They took on the Soviets in Warsaw and throughout cities across the country. They hit their enemy with vengeance along the Soviet–Polish border too. They wanted the Soviets who were outside Poland kept out and those who were already inside to be gotten rid of as quickly as possible.
What little of the Polish Third Army which had crossed over the Oder and into East Germany crossed back over into Poland this morning joining the rest which had been experiencing all of those delays and obstructions. The Polish reservists had been issued orders to do so and followed them. Soviet forces stood in their way and tried to stop them and shooting occurred. The Poles knew what they were doing – following orders to redeploy eastwards – while the Soviets were stunned at the withdrawal and also the vicious incidents of fraternal combat. The Poles took losses in these engagements, naturally, but so did the Soviet military police and traffic controllers who tried to stop the Poles moving just a few miles back to the bridges over which they had recently came.
Within a couple of hours, the Polish retreat had blown a gap thirty to forty miles wide in the Soviet defensive line strung along the border facing westward. There was a trail of bodies left behind and a lot of destruction done: one remaining agreement shared by old allies who were now enemies was that neither was upset at what had been destroyed as that had been in Germany.
In Warsaw, Polish paramilitary forces were issued orders by the WSW too. There was treason and treachery being undertaken by Soviet KGB detachments in Warsaw who were working with Polish traitors too. All of these people in the Polish capital were placing the whole country in danger and the paramilitary forces – ably led by the military intelligence officers from the WSW – had been entrusted to eliminate them as a threat. Yes… it might not have made sense but those were the orders issued.
Throughout Warsaw, there was chaos and shooting. Only a few people knew exactly what was going on while almost everyone else was just doing what they were told. Poland’s leaders and the KGB senior officers in the city controlling them either died in the fighting or were handed over to the WSW to be taken away to be shot. No one had come to rescue them like they should have because those striking against them had control of all communications.
In other cities, the same occurred. Local Polish forces were given false orders which came as a shock but upset none issued with them. There was a lot of bloodshed and not everything went as planned but general success was had. The WSW plotters would have liked to have used regular troops, even military reservists, but with none of those available they had to rely upon paramilitary forces who ‘only’ had patriotism as a strength: that turned out to be enough. These paramilitary forces had spent a long time fighting their own people under Soviet orders and when it came to moving against the Soviets instead, the outcome was a lot better than expected. The plotters realized afterwards that they had misunderstood how badly treated the paramilitaries had been too by the KGB when those who hadn’t obeyed orders had been shot by their own comrades after being forced to do so: that had bred resentment, anger and a thirst for revenge.
Poland had borders with the Soviet Union from the Baltic all the way down to the Carpathian Mountains. Those ran along the Kaliningrad Oblast (once the northern part of East Prussia), the Lithuanian SSR, the Belorussian SSR and the Ukrainian SSR: across further north and east in the latter trio were once territories part of Poland stolen when the Soviets were aligned with Hitler. There were road and rail connections which ran from the Soviet Union into Poland and further west all along the borders. NATO air attacks had barely touched them and arriving NATO special forces were along the northern coast and in the western part of the country. In recent days, since the WSW had been preparing for this while knowing that the longer they delayed the more their enemy became aware, they had been getting ready to strike at these connections. They weren’t aiming to do so to hurt the overall Soviet war effort, but rather to make sure that a Soviet reaction against them would have trouble getting at Poland.
Explosions and gunfire erupted along the border. Bridges were brought down and bogie exchange stations for freight trains (some inside the Soviet Union too at Bagrationovsk in the Kaliningrad Oblast and at Brest in the Belorussian SSR) were destroyed. Soviet border guards were shot at and there was an effort to kill transportation engineering crews as well. Polish border guards – complete with false orders telling them that those they were fighting were imposters – yes, not a perfect lie – were involved in this though again there were men from the WSW military intelligence service present.
The damage in these attacks didn’t fully meet expectations. The Poles weren’t able to achieve no more than half of their objectives and they also took a lot of loses. Yet, it was enough to shut down the border crossings for the time being as even where failure was met there came a reaction on the Soviet side where they readied for another attack making sure no rail or road traffic was moving.
The daggers were used inside Poland against Soviet military forces who were unwelcome guests.
Communications links were blown up in some places or cut elsewhere; this time there were no more ‘accidents’, just deliberate strikes. Airbases were shelled by mortars and in a couple of places even old artillery pieces. At the Soviet military headquarters at Legnica, bombs were planted though the security here managed to stop three quarters or so of the detonations: the ones which did go bang still killed many.
Military convoys were brought to a halt inside the country where orders were issued to Polish security forces to stop them looking for ‘traitors and bombs’. A few shooting incidents occurred when those orders were objected too yet, overall, there was a lot of success here where violence wasn't used in these actions. Something to be taken note of.
The plotters had managed to co-ordinate a nationwide strike against the Soviets. They had event struck outside Poland too, just inside both East Germany and the Soviet Union. Those they sent in action generally had no idea of the overall intention and where lives were lost, those killed often had no idea they were fighting for Polish freedom. For those behind the daggers, these were regretful but necessary.
A conspiracy couldn’t work if everyone knew about it.
They hadn’t just been planning their strike today in the build-up to April Fool’s Day. The Poles had been in contact with the West through their intelligence link with the Israeli Mossad to let them know – in general terms: no specifics – what was coming and to prepare to welcome NATO special forces (they hadn’t realized those had already started to arrive) to work with them. There was also contact made with the Polish Government-in-Exile based in London, something which had been in-place since the end of World War Two.
They were fighting for freedom and would like to do it on their own, would if they had to. However, if they could get help in doing so then that would be very welcome!
*
Marshal Gromov was at Trzebiel near the border with East Germany when his command column came under attack. Snipers and men armed with lightweight missile-launchers had struck all across the village. They killed dozens of members of his security team and headquarters staff. Some communications had been cut but not all and a rescue effort had been mounted from Soviet forces across the Oder who had flown in using armed helicopters to first lift him and a few of his key people out of Trzebiel and then combat the attackers.
Only afterwards, when arriving where he was now at Legnica, was here told that it was Polish forces who had tried to kill him and not NATO commandos.
Gromov hadn’t appreciated the dagger in his back and those of his men nor the ‘joke’ either. He had lost his temper and raged openly at the Polish betrayal. He had made threats of vengeance and issued immediate orders that he regretted afterwards concerning the punishment to be dealt out to any prisoners taken not just from Trzebiel but as news came in of more and more and more attacks all across Poland. His actions, he told himself, were just like what he had been furious at the KGB for doing beforehand elsewhere.
But what the Poles had done, and done now too, had tipped him over the edge… especially with those following recent events.
In Moscow, those in uniform at the top had all been killed. He had despised Rodionov the Slaughterman on a personal level for his brutality yet he was regarded by Gromov as an effective leader. Varennikov and Kalinin were dead as well as him with others below the STAVKA chief and the head of the Ground Forces killed too. New generals, those from the Soviet Army deployed in the Trans-Baikal and Far East Military Districts who had sat on their fat behinds during the war whispering plots about how they war was being fought ‘wrong’ and ‘without the necessary vigor’, had replaced those who Gromov was told were murdered when at the Ministry of Defence. Gromov had recalled when he had first been told to keep elite Airborne Troops units ready for an unspecified mission first at Berlin and then been ordered to have them moved into Poland; his suspicion was that those in Moscow had feared something yet they had been caught out by the KGB hitting them first.
Those generals had worked with the KGB and Gromov was certain that he would be replaced soon enough by one of them… his fellow military men would no doubt send the KGB to take care of him and he believed that they wouldn’t make a mess of it like the Poles had.
Straight after the coup, nuclear weapons had been used. Gromov hadn’t been officially briefed on what had happened in two engagements which took place at sea yet his intelligence staff had gathered from intercepted NATO reports that Soviet forces had twice attacked Americans warships without a response being given. He didn’t know why no response had yet been made but he was sure that when retaliation came, the Americans would strike against his forces spread along the Oder-Neisse Line. Without orders to do so, as Moscow told him nothing, Gromov had dispersed his troops to lessen the effects of nuclear weapons being used against them. The spreading out made the defensive line weaker yet it was necessary and still could have held.
Until the Poles had done what they had today.
NATO had taken Berlin and were already moving the troops who’d easily overrun that city back into position to advance east again. They had more forces either side of those coming out of Berlin: Gromov’s intelligence staff had placed the numbers available to NATO for operations against the Oder-Neisse at between three dozen and forty divisions. He had a third of that figure now that the Poles – positioned in the middle of the line! – had turned tail and abandoned him.
NATO had veteran troops who’d won battle after battle; he had untested and depleted men. Gromov’s redeployments to protect against nuclear attacks and the sudden Polish dagger in the back meant that he couldn’t defend the last areas of East Germany held and when his men were hit by NATO’s offensive, that would be the end of the last his forces. His country’s last hope of if not winning this war on the battlefield then making sure that NATO didn’t was gone with today’s actions by the Poles. All he could do was try to make this clear to those now in-charge back home in ways even those self-important fools could understand and then wait for NATO to pour forward. At least it was looking like they had the decency to wait until after midday: they weren’t playing any sort of lethal joke.
April 1st 1990 Near Kemmelbach, in the Danube Valley, Lower Austria, Austria
A couple of hours ago, there had come word to the 173d Airborne Brigade headquarters that the helicopter carrying the commanding officer of the 3-325 INF plus his S-3 too had gone down with all aboard killed. Twice in the war this had happened with the same battalion suffering crippling losses of its top people: the first time had been when fighting in the Alps on Day Two of the conflict. Additionally, the battalion XO had been reported seriously injured by a sniper during the fight to secure the crossings over the lower reaches of the Ybbs River where it met the Danube in the only serious incident of fighting along that river.
There were some who said that the 3-325 INF was an unlucky posting…
Told by the brigade commander that he was to take over, Major Petraeus had been a bit taken aback at the sudden news. No, it was not an April Fool’s Day prank: the 3-325 INF needed an experienced combat officer and he was it. Someone else would take his post on the brigade operations staff as Operation Dagger continued and would go lead that battalion in battle.
Petraeus arrived in the town of Kemmelbach just after his men had finished off clearing the last enemy hold-outs and securing prisoners here. The rear-area support troops attached to the Soviet Forth Combined Arms Army who had been retreating through the area had been extremely stubborn, he was told, and not wanting to give in. Those on the river, where pontoon bridges came over the Ybbs, had given in easily when hit by the men under his command but not those in and around Kemmelbach. The company commander he spoke with couldn’t explain why that had been the case and could only say that the enemy his men had overcome were idiots: they had lost this war and why couldn’t they understand that?
When on the brigade staff, Petraeus had been intimately involved in the planning for the joint American-Spanish air assault into the rear to cut off their line of retreat. The same had been done to the Hungarians weeks ago when they were pulling back and this second operation, with Dagger being far bigger and more ambitious, was to aim for the same success. The battle for Linz had been lost by the Forth Army and those troops a long way from their pre-war garrisons in the southern Caucasus were falling back in the general direction of Vienna and probably Hungary beyond. To do so, the retreat would take the Soviets not directly following the Danube all the way along the south side (they were moving along both banks) as a short-cut was made following the main east-west highway and smaller roads rather than the winding course of the valley. Where that short-cut would begin for those on the southern side, and also where the roads on the northern side came close to a meander in the Danube, was the location for the arrival of both US Army and Spanish forces arriving by air. The site had been chosen well as there were other terrain features including where the Ybbs reached the Danube to aid in halting the retreating Soviets as well as excellent transport links heading east which NATO forces themselves could use once they dealt with the Soviets here.
The war in Austria was far from won and there was still an intention Petraeus was aware that was coming from on high that Vienna was to be moved on ahead of the retreating enemy and then afterwards there was always Bratislava and Budapest too. Apparently, the war in Germany had already been won but here it was still going at full strength.
Moving up to the positions of the rest of his battalion along with those coming from their fight in Kemmelbach, he came to the riverbanks of the Ybbs where more fighting was due to take place. The Soviets were going to move against the attempt to cut their line of retreat, and Petraeus would be there to put a stop to that.
Information came from the 173d Brigade – still attached directly to the Spanish I Corps and not in any divisional-level command – that there was an enemy attack on the way to retake the crossings over the Ybbs. Radio intercepts were the source of the intelligence, Petraeus was told, no more than that due to worried over someone listening in on their communications despite all assurances about secure links. There was a makeshift battalion group of mechanised infantry and light tanks which the Soviets had been keeping as a ready reserve for flank security and that was on the move. The vehicles would be amphibious and the Ybbs was not a deep river.
This was expected though. In planning for Dagger such a reaction had been foreseen. The brigade headquarters staff were aware of the threat and so too had been the 3-325 INF as well. There had been an effort made to hit that enemy battalion with air strikes by US Air Force Reserve fighter-bombers in the form of F-4s right after the air assault / airmobile landings by American and Spanish forces (the Spanish were to the north of the Danube) had taken place and so Petraeus hoped that they would be significantly weakened. He prepared for the worst though, that the enemy was at full strength, because to not do so and rely upon the effects of air power would be foolish.
He had his heavy weapons teams right at the front. Everything the 3-325 INF had brought with them in their air-drop behind enemy lines was man-portable. The anti-tank missile-launchers (lightweight Dragons and heavyweight TOWs) were deployed with the riflemen and machine gun crews on the riverbanks. The heavy weapons were meant to take out the enemy vehicles while the Air Assault troopers hit the infantry, including those which would escape from hit vehicles. Looking at the site of the fast-approaching battle, Petraeus met quickly with his company commanders and told them how he foresaw this engagement.
There would be a scout element out front which may or may not get hit by another flight of F-4s incoming. The scouts would be PT-76 light tanks with some wheeled vehicles: BRDM-1s. Three mixed companies of armour and infantry would follow with more PT-76s and both wheeled BTR-60s & tracked MT-LBs. All vehicles would have to slow down to go down the riverbanks on the other side and would move slowly across the water too. Hit them before they got into the river if possible, he told his subordinates, and especially once they were in the water. If the Soviets managed to get out of the river on this side and form up into any appreciable number, then they would win this fight. They had to be hit before they got here. The 1-509 INF was on the way and there would be air support, but it was up to them to hold the line here. These security troops wouldn’t be veterans of any serious fighting and were rushing into action with no idea what they were facing. In comparison, the 3-325 INF had been readied to perform this mission just as they had done every other engagement of the war too.
It hadn’t been the best of speeches, but Petraeus believed he had done enough. He hoped so anyway.
When the Soviets came, they did just what was expected and so were beaten in battle.
F-4s in Spanish colours – the F-4C variant known to the Spanish Ejército del Aire as the C-12 and taken out of storage following last year’s retirement – came in extremely low, impossibly low even, with a ROAR from behind the Soviets and dropped US-built anti-armour cluster bombs all over the leading scouts. Several light tanks and other armoured vehicles were blown up and the others stopped as they prepared for another air attack with their light anti-aircraft weapons pointed upwards. The battalion commander instead ordered them forward so his whole command wouldn’t blunder into the unknown. The scouts reached the river, where they should have been paying attention because this was where their enemy was to be found, yet they had still been looking nervously skywards waiting for those F-4s to come back with another attack.
That had been a fatal mistake.
TOW missiles shot away from hastily-dug positions further back from the anti-tank teams assigned to Petraeus’ command. They were aimed at the PT-76s as they dipped down on the riverbank and then at the few BRDM-1s which hesitated afterwards. Each vehicle was hit and no one had been able to report much before they were killed by the blasts from firing positions they hadn’t seen.
Foolishly, the rest of the Soviet battalion came forward. In a fight between armour and lightly-armed paratroopers deep in the rear, the battalion commander saw it as one his men would win. He understood that there would be an ambush on the river but believed that the Americans would have rushed there ahead of his men. His belief was that whoever was there was few in numbers and wouldn’t be able to stop him before he overran them – literally under the treads of his armour if necessary – and charged on Kemmelbach to get in their rear.
Petraeus wasn’t able to observe the battle directly and only heard it over the radio. He and his tiny command post were hidden behind the river and sheltered against any mortar or artillery barrage. What he heard was just as expected. The TOWs fired again when the rest of the enemy started showing up, hitting the light tanks first. The Soviets blind fired east across the river and hit nothing at all: their shells flew over the heads of Air Assault troopers down on the ground. Dragon teams, closer to the river, engaged the enemy when enough of the PT-76s were disabled and hit their targets on the opposing riverbank and also in the water. More than a few enemy vehicles, all rated as amphibious, actually sunk and no one witnessing those occurrences was pleased with the images which filled their minds at that. Soviet infantry disembarked vehicles on the other side with the aim to give covering fire with machine guns, even rifles, from over there. The 3-325 INF’s mortars did some damage to them but so too did their M60 machine guns as well.
After less than ten minutes of a bloody and truly one-sided fight, the Soviets pulled back what little forces they had away from the riverbank. They gave up trying to cross and what was left of their troops were withdrawn. Petraeus had them shelled with mortars as they left the area and reported this to the 173d Brigade hoping that air support could hit them when they were in disarray.
With the battle here won, Petraeus received quick congratulations from his superior before being told to hold his position in case the last of the Soviets, or more of them from elsewhere, came back for another go. Dagger was still continuing and more US Army troops plus those national guardsmen from Vermont were arriving in the Kemmelbach area. This wasn’t over he was told, but he and his men had done very well.
His mind turned briefly to what was next. Would the war be over before they reached Vienna or were all those positive signs of an end to it that he had heard about – in roundabout terms – come about? He didn’t know and neither did them men he had just commanded to victory. Until those above them made the Big decisions, there would still be much fighting to do in further instances of combat like this one.
April 1st 1990 The banks of the River Neisse beside the East German–Polish border
There was a railway tunnel which went under the Neisse just a couple of miles to the north of the airbase at Rothenburg. The tunnel entrance this side had some time ago been targeted by NATO air power, Captain McMaster, had been told but not the other side across in Poland. The river crossing’s use for freight trains had been stopped by that bombing though there had been recent efforts to try to clear away some of the rubble and start the process of repairs.
East German military engineers and the civilian labourers present had either surrendered or fled when he brought Eagle Troop up to the tunnel entrance. The Abrams’ and Bradleys came ready for a fight yet there was none to be had. In addition to those throwing down their weapons and up their hands, there came someone who walked out of the tunnel entrance – complete with dirt all over his smart uniform – and called out a loud question in reasonable English to enquire whether McMaster and his men would like to come across with him to Poland to see the sights and maybe meet some friendly local girls.
The Polish military officer had brought his humour with him but it was far too late on April Fool’s Day for that to be valid. McMaster watched for a (metaphoric) dagger in the back from the major who walked up to him with a confident stride and then gave him a sharp salute. A bit taken aback by such a thing, McMaster almost saluted back… almost.
He asked for the major’s surrender instead.
Politely, but firmly, the Pole refused. He informed McMaster that they were allies, not enemies. Hadn’t the Americans heard? Poland had liberated herself and was fighting the Soviets as well! Come over the river, the major continued, come and join the party as we take care of the Soviets for good! You can help us and we’ll fight together.
One of McMaster’s platoon leaders was half-Polish and was left to talk with the Polish major about what had been going on over the river while McMaster was on the radio. If the Pole tried to remove his pistol from his holster or go back into the tunnel, then he was going to be stopped yet he didn’t look like he was going to do either. McMaster had to wait for a connection over the 2d Squadron network as there was a lot going on but he got his commander on the line soon enough. He told his superior that they had moved up from the airbase as ordered once 3rd Infantry Division units arrived there behind them and reached the rail tunnel entrance to secure it. Then the Polish major had arrived and declared that he and his country were allies now. McMaster told his commanding officer that the Pole was telling stories of his whole country in rebellion against the Soviets and if he was a liar, then he was a good one.
Information was coming in through various sources, McMaster was informed, that Poland was in rebellion. It had started this morning and looked to have taken place this side of the border too in East Germany. Many things needed confirmation as to how that was all going to play out. No other contact had yet been made with any Poles as elements of the regiment reached the Neisse here at the eastern edges of Saxony so this first instance of contact was going to have to be something which McMaster was going to have to use whatever skills he had at diplomacy for.
Someone from the 2d Armored Cavalry Regiment staff would be on the way – McMaster’s commander assured him he’d have someone sent – but until then, the Pole was to be kept occupied. Talk to him and find out what he knew in detail, came the instructions, but remember the standing order that there is to be no crossing of the river into Poland until direct permission is given.
McMaster broke the connection and went back over to where the Pole was. This time he saluted him and he started to make conversation. He asked the Pole to tell him what had happened over there. It wasn’t how he thought he would end the day when the big attack to reach the Neisse had started first thing this morning yet there had been a lot of surprises encountered since dawn.
There had been a pause through the previous night where the whole of the US VII Corps had conciliated their positions on the eastern side of the Elbe both sides of Dresden and half way across Saxony. The city itself had surrendered without a shot to light forces preparing to surround it (the East Germans were finished now) while the heavy divisions and the corps reconnaissance asset which was the Second Dragoons had avoided that urban area and got ready to charge towards the Polish frontier. What was left of the Soviet Ninth Army was retreating in panicked fight and there had been a desire to keep chasing them by many yet the corps commander rearranged his forces. The aim had been to sweep to the Neisse, getting around the Soviets and chopping them up into small, cut-off useless elements in Saxony rather than fighting through them and taking needless casualties this late in the war when it was clear that the end was almost here.
None of his men down the chain-of-command such as McMaster knew what reaction Lt.-General Fred Franks’ decision had come in the form of a verbal outburst from SACEUR.
Once going, the 2d Squadron – Eagle Troop included – had led the advance of the 3rd Mechanized Infantry Division, out ahead of their own divisional cavalry squadron and providing a pathway for the division to follow. It had been the 34th Motorised Rifle Division (34 MRD) which had stood in the way. McMaster had heard something about this Soviet formation having a glorious pre-war history and being considered an elite force. That history had meant nothing when the reality came of modern warfare. Those reservists hadn’t stood a chance in the few stand-up fights they had made. However, most of the 34 MRD had just given in. Again and again, McMaster had witnessed enemy units falling over themselves to surrender as soon as they could. These men were supposed to the ones making a stand to stop NATO from getting near to the Polish border but they had done little of that apart from in a few isolated spots.
Phase Line after Phase Line – lines drawn on maps for how far by what point the advance was supposed to be made – was raced through. The squadron radio network had been alive with reports of progress and McMaster had added to them with his own. Eagle Troop went past countless good defensive points where the enemy could have made a stand yet they didn’t: oddly, the Soviets who did fight made their few engagements at terrible places to make a stand from. Enemy air activity had utterly ceased too; no attacking aircraft had come across from their bases in Poland on desperate attack missions. From out of villages and small towns, delegations of civilian leaders (McMaster had been suspicious of such people) had tried to make contact as they feared that their homes were about to become battlefields. McMaster had seen such scenes before yet never so many and without any interference from the East German authorities or even the Soviets.
Throughout the advance – as at the end of it – there had come the continued reminders as the Neisse was closed in upon that the river wasn’t to be crossed. Units such as McMaster’s came close to the Polish frontier and were told to not go over it. There was to be no reconnaissance-in-force, no chasing the enemy and no navigational accidents with regard to the border. McMaster and his fellow officers had been told that this was a political decision and they didn’t have to agree with it, just obey.
Upon reaching the river next to where the airbase was, McMaster had been faced with an anti-climactic feeling. He and his men had raced to get here, ready to fight anyone who had got in their way, but without any major engagement apart from some long-distance shots on the way against menacing Soviet tanks who had no idea what happened, it hadn’t seemed real. There were some new men assigned to Eagle Troop in the form of those injured early on in the war who had recovered enough (many recoveries weren’t fully complete by signed-off on regardless) who spoke openly of the shock at how easy it had been. They had only seen the enemy on the attack in the war’s first weeks where the Soviets were unstoppable: now they were seeing the opposite in a beaten enemy. McMaster and the other veterans had seen both sides, and everything in between. In addition to those replacement men, there had also been some new equipment: a pair of shiny-new M-1A1 Abrams’ among them. Tanks such as these coming fresh out of factories back in the United States were being shipped freely across the North Atlantic and they replaced losses recently incurred… more were on their way too.
Once at the Neisse and on the way up to the railway tunnel entrance, McMaster had wondered over what would come next if they weren’t going east. Was it to be a drive north to link up with those who had liberated Berlin and McMaster had been told were already moving further east? Wasn’t that where the Polish forces in East Germany where located?
McMaster asked the Polish major about that whilst they talked.
How the Pole laughed! It was quite a sight to witness. He was rather animated and almost danced around as he wailed with laughter at the idea of Poles standing alongside the Soviets between Berlin and the Polish border. No, no, no. They were gone; his comrades had marched back home and he had heard that they had shot any Soviet – and German too! – who stood in their way.
The Poles wanted to be friends with the Americans and they had shown their friendship by stabbing the Soviets in the back. There was no shame in this from the Polish major and he was glad to have taken part in it even in the small role which he had. Now, would the Americans here come with him over the river and take a drive to Warsaw, please? The fighting part of the war was over, there was just the shouting left to do, and he wanted to show them his country.
Shaking his head at the crazy behaviour he witnessed, McMaster couldn’t wait for the officer from the regimental staff to show up. It’d be a spook and someone who could listen better to this man than he.
His thoughts turned to whether the Polish major was correct or not. Was it all over apart from the shouting?
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 16:00:06 GMT
Forty–Six – Dirty Tricks
April 2nd 1990 Camp David, Maryland, the United States
General Scowcroft had been foremost in wanting his president to stay mobile, on the E-4B – the Doomsday Plane – and circling high in the sky, so as to not be caught on the ground if there was a sudden Soviet nuclear strike on the mainland United States. Serving generals such as the head of SAC and some from the Joint Chiefs of Staff joined with the retired military officer who served as National Security Adviser in urging for this. They hadn’t been happy with their president being on the ground at any point during the war either though.
Bush had refused to stay airborne. The forty-first president didn’t want to remain onboard such an aircraft as the Doomsday Plane for any longer than he saw as necessary. He had wanted to go to the White House but had compromised on Camp David. He and the other senior people in his administration weren’t known to be here and if a strategic attack was made against the country, they could be airlifted out of here fast: the Secretary of State and the Treasury Secretary among them. Not everyone was at Camp David either. The Vice President remained on one of the four E-4Bs active in service and Defence Secretary Cheney was still at Bethesda. The Speaker of the House was at The Greenbrier and the Senate president pro tempore was elsewhere in West Virginia.
Worries over the line of succession – serious concerns during the war especially since the assassination first of Quayle then later of Baker – were eased by the gathering of not all the country’s leaders at Camp David though not fully solved in the opinion of many.
However, events in the past couple of hours, what those here were discussing, made the possibility of nuclear strike occurring now almost non-existent. The new Soviet General Secretary Boris Nikolayevich Yeltsin had just declared that peace was at hand after he publicly requested a ceasefire to bring to an end World War Three.
The time difference between the United States and Europe, gaining in length the further east the location, had been rather annoying all throughout the war. The US East Coast was five hours behind London, six hours behind most of Europe and eight hours behind Moscow. Events that happened there throughout early parts of the day occurred during the night for those reacting to them back here. It wasn’t much of a commiseration that for those who were in time zones ahead, they had the same problem with needing access to decisions from those either asleep or annoyed at being awoken.
Things had been different this time around. Yeltsin had made his televised appeal late last night from Moscow; it had been the early afternoon at Camp David so everyone had been fully awake. Decision-makers in Europe had wanted to get some rest and sleep a few hours later – Yeltsin had spoken at ten at night, eight o’clock in mainland Europe – but those with the president were fully awake. Their talking had gone on and on… and on. It was gone midnight now and finally Bush was able to start getting his people to make their positions on the matter final so he could make a decision. The plan was for afterwards everyone to get some sleep before the results of what had been decided here would be implemented.
That decision was on whether Yeltsin’s offer was genuine and whether too it should be one that the United States – therefore everyone else with the Allies by default – should accept.
*
Yeltsin had declared that he was the General Secretary of the Central Committee of the Communist Party of the Soviet Union (a mouthful indeed) and that made him the new leader of his nation as that position was the de facto head of state in the USSR. He hadn’t spoken of how he had risen to that post nor made any claim as to any legitimacy he had: Yeltsin spoke on Soviet state television and said that he was in-charge and that was that!
He stated afterwards that he wanted an immediate end to the war and said that that was the wish of all of his people, including the families of those who had lost their lives fighting for the Soviet Union. There was no blame apportioned to any one person or any country – his or another –, just an expressed desire to bring it to an end. At midday European time on April 2nd, Soviet military forces would stop fighting. There would only be combat met if the Soviet Union itself was attacked after that and such would only come in self-defense. The Allies were invited to abide by this ceasefire too but Soviet forces would stop fighting regardless: Yeltsin would like to see an agreement made between military leaders made soon after that ceasefire came into action but it wasn’t a condition of that ceasefire which he said several times was soon to happen.
There were to be no ‘dirty tricks’ by the Allies. Yeltsin promised that the Soviet Union would react to any harshly as it was being ‘gracious’ in calling for this ceasefire and stating a firm intention to abide by it. An end to the fighting is what he wanted. Still speaking in Russian while on live television, during the broadcast Yeltsin had appealed to the ‘ordinary people’ in the countries of the Allies (he said ‘Allies’, not NATO nor the West each time) to make sure that their national leaders didn’t betray this chance to stop the fighting and all the deaths that were coming with that. Each national leader was being sent urgent communications, he had added, signed in his name and on behalf of the Soviet people.
Throughout his speech, Yeltsin not once mentioned his own countries allies.
At the end of the broadcast, Yeltsin told his own people that he believed that the war would end tomorrow (today now) as the ceasefire was something everyone wanted. He promised them too that those who had committed ‘crimes’ and ‘betrayed the people’ across the Soviet Union would be punished: Kryuchkov was in custody and there would be an international-supervised trial of the man for all that he had done. There were negotiations underway between the heads of the leaders of the various Soviet republics concerning a new union agreement yet warned that there might be a situation where parts of the country on the edges undertook legal succession from the USSR. Domestic liberalizations would be coming very soon too, after the ceasefire and once the Allies signed a peace agreement that made sure that they wouldn’t restart the war again.
He asked for his countrymen and women to support him in ending the war and have faith that the coming ceasefire would hold in his parting comment.
This broadcast had been seen by the American public. Following on from the massive street protest covered by that previously-missing ABC news crew which had reported that they had been released by ‘Yeltsin loyalists’, they covered it for broadcast to the United States. There had been a warning that Yeltsin was to speak on Soviet television and Ted Koppel – who had a story to tell of his time in captivity – was going to be there with his crew. Bush and his advisers had considered whether getting the Federal Communications Commission (the FCC had been busy throughout the war overseeing voluntary censorship which the US media imposed upon themselves) to make sure that wasn’t carried live but had decided not to do so. There had been some indications that he was going to call for an end to the war though the details of what he ended up saying hadn’t been known. Canada and the Europeans, under stricter censorship, had made the decision not to allow for a live broadcast fearing what Yeltsin might say in the form of frightening their citizens into panic if Yeltsin had issued a direct nuclear threat.
Which decision had been the right one?
Those at the top of the Bush Administration were split on whether Yeltsin was genuine and whether the ceasefire should be accepted. There was a lot of suspicions on how he had suddenly ended up in charge and a clear recollection on what had happened with the last ceasefire.
Yeltsin was a drunk, it was said, and a nobody: he had no so-called ‘loyalists’ to stand with him or fight any cause of his. The sudden people-power revolution on the streets of Moscow which had preceded his announced assumption of leadership of the Soviet Union stunk of a deception. Only two weeks ago, he had been featured in that short-lived Russian newspaper which the CIA had gotten ahold of with a clear indication that he was being used by the Kryuchkov regime to aid Russian nationalism over Soviet unity. That regime had then suddenly disappeared overnight and here was Yeltsin in-charge. Rumours had been flowing out of the Soviet Union that there were those in the KGB who had wanted Kryuchkov to step aside peacefully and he was willing to accept that; then the CIA had been asked by plotters against him to assassinate him with an air or missile strike. Yeltsin, who had no position of power or influence until he took over in unclear circumstances, was now saying he was ready to hand him over to for an ‘international trial’.
The mid-February ceasefire had been arranged between the then West German government and the Soviets. The West German leadership had been forced into that through kidnappings of family members of senior people (the French had broken open this revelation) who had taken over and started dealing with those invading their country… ignoring how their allies had been assisting in their defence. That ceasefire had then been broken off in a nuclear strike against a civilian target in the form of Flensburg, a commando assault on NATO diplomats in Paris and a resumption of full-scale warfare everywhere.
This was all a KGB ploy, a very sophisticated act of maskirovka. There were declarations that Yeltsin was a puppet put in-place by them. Maybe they had his wife or one of his daughters in custody? Maybe they had fed him a whole load of lies… and passed him a bottle of vodka? Yeltsin didn’t have to know he was being used or even if he did he might not have a choice. There were puppet-masters behind the scenes pulling his strings and these were people who didn’t want to let all they had in terms of personal power go nor answer for their crimes in a scenario where the war was truly won by the Allies.
These remarks made by those at Camp David who were very opposed to the idea of going along with what Yeltsin was effectively demanding didn’t meet waves of hostile opposition in such opinions from others. Yes, there was some disagreement as to the scope of the falsehood which might have taken place, but no argument that there was unnecessary paranoia. Everyone was aware of what the KGB was capable of and what they had done already with their dirty tricks. They had subverted governments. They had killed so many innocents. They had committed organised acts of torture. They had been behind the war.
The KGB would do anything to escape the consequences of those actions.
But there was now an opportunity to end the war. It was argued that Yeltsin’s offer was genuine in the form that it would bring an end to the ongoing war. The Soviets were beaten on the battlefields of East Germany after previous disasters in West Germany, the Netherlands, Norway, Denmark, Greece and Turkey. Their troops in western parts of Czechoslovakia were pulling back and those in Austria were either surrounded already or soon to be. Their ability to operate in the air over Europe was almost non-existent and their sea power was gone. Poland’s rebellion and brewing trouble in Hungary meant that they couldn’t fight in Europe anymore. Elsewhere, the Soviets were surrounded by forces of the Allies in many regions around their country through the Barents Sea, in the Black Sea and along the Pacific. They had lost and they had finally understood it enough to make this move to end the war.
What would happen if the United States led the reaction to refuse it?
First, there was a good chance that some partner nations might drop out of the war. Their losses wouldn’t be fatal but still a blow to the cause of the Allies. Adding to this, military options for continued warfare either meant an ultimately very-costly air campaign operating aircraft very far forward over Soviet territory or an advance on land through Eastern Europe. Both of these ran the risk of nuclear warfare breaking out, either limited like it already had or going all the way. A fight to the finish meant sending tanks and infantry as far as Red Square… maybe all the way to and over the Ural Mountains.
Lastly, there was the issue of why had the war been fought. That had been to defend NATO nations in Europe and also to stop North Korea overrunning South Korea. Those two objectives had been achieved with parts of Eastern Europe under NATO occupation and a good chunk of North Korea too. Soviet military forces weren’t going to come back as they had been more than just defeated, but wholly destroyed in battle with those not killed otherwise in captivity. The war had been won so why continue fighting it even ignoring the nuclear dangers?
The Soviets weren’t going to easily recover from this war. They had no military capability left for external actions against their neighbours. Their international trade was over and would be stopped from taking place by the Allies unless the plans for reparations in any peace agreement were settled. If they wanted diplomatic relations and any form of relationship with the large chunk of the world they had been fighting – there were a lot of countries in the Allies – then they were going to have to pay damages and hand over wanted war criminals: Kryuchkov would only be one of many. Internally, their economy was in the toilet and they were already willing to admit they were going to lose parts of their empire. They were on their knees, they were finished for as a world power for the foreseeable future.
Something else was noted: Yeltsin had just promised his people ‘domestic liberalization’. Even if he or his puppet-masters didn’t mean much by that, the public statement was going to do a lot of damage to the dictatorship which was the Soviet Union. The United States could help in that making sure that if it didn’t get what it wanted in all the proposals already waiting to be presented come a peace agreement, or even if it did get them, the Soviet Union would eventually be brought down internally.
From the leading figures in uniform and from the Intelligence Community, there was caution about dealing with Yeltsin and his peace but a general agreement to go with the ceasefire proposal. They stated that before that deadline expired certain things needed to be done though and instructions should go to SACLANT, SACEUR and PACCOM to make sure that they happened. There was a last chance to destroy certain elements of the Soviet military and Soviet foreign domination in select places. Now, in the hours before midday arrived in Germany, those needed to happen there and elsewhere in the world.
As to the politicians and the president’s top advisers, there was some division.
Vice President Webb – calling in via teleconference like Cheney would – said that this was a bad idea. The Soviets were going to get away with this and the United States would pay in the long run for their short-term focus on stopping the fighting. He said he wanted the killing to stop and feared nuclear warfare like everyone else, but this was all wrong.
Secretary of State Dole, Treasury Secretary Brady and Defence Secretary Cheney were all in favour of the ceasefire. They shared the opinion that the war was won and there was the real risk of a nuclear apocalypse if it continued. The strike against the USS Iowa in the Baltic Sea and then the massacre of Cubans by the Soviets responding as they turned against them showed those very real dangers, especially with the Soviets not having full control over their nuclear weapons. Poland faced the same risk as Cuba if the war continued, but more so cities in the United States.
When asked his opinion, Scowcroft said that he didn’t like what had happened in Moscow and he was concerned about the long-term. Pressed for an answer by his president, he eventually settled on the position expressed by Dole, Brady and Cheney. His deputy Gates stated that he would have liked to have seen the Soviets beaten more than they already had and was worried that the last-minute actions to fully-exploit the scale of the victory the Allies were about to win wouldn’t be enough; he also remained firmly welded to the view that Yeltsin was nothing more than a puppet and the KGB had their hooks deep in him.
Deputy Defence Secretary Rumsfeld, here at Camp David, agreed with Webb (something quite different from how the two of them had previously clashed on other matters) that the Soviets were going to get away with this war. Rumsfeld said that United States forces needed to go up to the Soviet borders in Europe all through Poland and down into eastern Czechoslovakia, Hungary and even Romania. If not, in five years or maybe ten years, the Soviets would be back for another go because they wouldn’t have their defeat rubbed in their nose. Counter Yeltsin’s offer, he proposed, and while talks were happening drive through Eastern Europe will maintaining a full nuclear posture.
Bush listened to all the expressed ideas, even the ones he didn’t agree with. Then he made up his mind and decided to go with the consensus view: the war needed to be brought to a close. He issued instructions that the ceasefire was to be abided by and actions taken to first get an official agreement on that then move things forward to seeing where an eventual peace treaty would end up.
He told those with him and listening in through secure communications links from elsewhere that he didn’t want to end the world by keeping the fighting going.
World War Three was over bar the shouting.
April 2nd 1990 Sperenberg Airbase, Brandenburg, East Germany
SACEUR answered to the North Atlantic Council (NAC) now based in Luxembourg when it came to strategic decisions. It was the collection of permanent representatives – in effect ambassadors – who set out directives that were to be followed by the holder of the role of Supreme Allied Commander Europe. In theory, General Schwarzkopf did everything he did under their authority. In reality, he answered to General Powell and President Bush back home.
Some idiot on the NAC, some armchair strategist with a degree in international relations and real-world experience in nothing more than being foolish, had had his hair-brained thought listened to by part of the NAC late yesterday. After the Soviets declared they wanted a ceasefire, a suggestion had come from the NAC that SACEUR should consider allowing what Soviet forces were left along the East German–Polish border and inside western Czechoslovakia to retreat back east. They could take all of their equipment with them too and be allowed to fall back unmolested in the last hours of the war, probably down and across Czechoslovakia. It would stop further NATO casualties occurring when fighting them before the ceasefire would come into effect and show the Soviets that NATO wanted peace as much as them.
The outburst from Schwarzkopf would afterwards become legendary for the profanity expressed over a radio link which many people overheard when they shouldn’t have. In short: no fucking way was that happening!
The idea was squashed not by SACEUR alone. It had been an unauthorised action taken to send the suggestion on to his forward at headquarters at Sperenberg and not something agreed by the NAC as a whole: they countermanded the idea pretty damn fast. From Raven Rock and Bethesda back in the United States, the Joint Chiefs and the Defence Secretary were quick to tell Schwarzkopf that that was a no-go – they in fact wanted him to do the opposite – and they would act to cut out such silliness from happening again in the last hours of the war and afterwards.
SACEUR hadn’t even pretended to go through the motions of preparing to act on such a stupid idea. He’d already been issuing orders for those Soviet forces to be smashed apart before the fighting was to stop and when the instructions came from home to carry on with that and take selective other actions on a similar theme elsewhere he was already ahead of the curve on that.
Those Soviet forces still left combat-capable were being taken apart on the ground and from the air – did someone say ‘ARC LIGHT’? – in devastating fashion. There were the Third Guards & Ninth Guards Combined Arms Armys left in East Germany (the Ninth Combined Army was already destroyed) and north & east of Prague in Czechoslovakia the Thirty–Second & Forty–Sixth Combined Arms Armys were still there. The third one of the four consisted of regular troops from Central Asia (the Thirty–Second Army was a pre-war standing command) while the others were reservists from across the Carpathian, Volga and Siberian Military Districts. In addition, behind Berlin where Polish troops were meant to have been making a final stand before they withdrew in the manner they did, there were Soviet paratroopers and their Berlin Garrison (including those who had taken West Berlin at the beginning of the war; the 6th Guards Independent Motorised Rifle Brigade) in-place. This was the last of the enemy left standing as an effective fighting force…
…all of which Schwarzkopf was busy making sure was annihilated as best as he could do.
With the skies full of attacking aircraft – many flying from forward bases close to the frontlines to allow for larger bomb-loads and maintain a high turn-around rate – above them, NATO ground forces were pouring forward towards the Polish border in the last bits of East Germany which the enemy held. He had ordered the US Third Army and NORTHAG out of Berlin and used them alongside the US Seventh Army to attack head-on all through the night and right up until midday today. Forward, he had ordered, keep going forward and don’t stop until you either reach the Polish border or the ceasefire comes into effect. Free-fire rules were in effect and if you encounter anyone surrendering, go past them and keep moving.
Powell had told SACEUR that he was to also make sure that there were no more hasty evacuations made by air of select people out of East Germany. There were airfields still in enemy hands and between attacks against them, every effort was being made to get important people out. KGB personnel would be among them but so too military specialists who were very valuable to the Soviets. The order from Raven Rock came to Schwarzkopf telling them to use chemical weapons against them (if he wasn’t already) when it came to airheads out of reasonable reach of NATO airmobile troops; any that could be taken with light forces using helicopter assaults should be seized. On this matter, SACEUR had clashed with the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff – no profanity was used in these exchanges – because he did not like the idea at all of assaulting such places on-the-fly like Powell wanted. Impromptu airmobile missions without adequate reconnaissance of the ground and enemy forces was a recipe for utter disaster. Powell said he understood that and said that he wasn’t asking for the impossible, just for Schwarzkopf to do that where there was judged to be low risk to the attacking forces: there would be war criminals at such places who the Soviets were getting out before they could be captured and he would like to see them taken alive where possible.
If they couldn’t be captured, SACEUR was told, then make sure they are killed in repeated chemical strikes.
There had been a stream of incoming news about events in Poland since yesterday and much of that had been confusing and sometimes contradictory: corrections to reported events had come aplenty.
The Poles had rebelled in a coordinated nationwide fashion but their rebellion hadn’t overnight rid their country of the Soviets. They had struck in many places, including inside East Germany, with plenty of success though their attacks had been reversed in a couple of places. They had certainly shut off their country to access across it by the Soviets including any notion of a withdrawal being made through Poland. Where they had pulled back their little field army out of East Germany and over the Oder that had worked as well as closing many Soviet-operated airbases inside their country too. They hadn’t been able to take control of the Soviet headquarters complex at Legnica nor all of the river crossing sites along the border – many had been taken, just not all – with East Germany.
When it came to their status as a country in regard to whether they were a friend or foe, Schwarzkopf had been trying to get that clear in an official manner. He had issued instructions down the chain-of-command that Polish forces encountered were not to be fired upon unless they attacked NATO forces – the burden of proof on that would have to be high too, SACEUR made that clear – first and directly. In the other direction, to the NAC and also back home, Schwarzkopf had asked for clarity on the issue with Poland.
Had they joined the Allies? Were the Poles a co-belligerent in the war? Or, was the rebellion a revolt against the Polish government (and occupying Soviets) limited to just certain military personnel so the Allies were still at war with Poland?
What came back to SACEUR was that there was a rebellion underway, a bloody one too, and it was far from over. Poland remained part of the Warsaw Pact officially and a nation which a state of war with continued. How this would change in the long-run still wasn’t certain: the Polish rebels looked certain to win but there was an issue over what form that ‘win’ would be. Nothing really was going to change before the ceasefire anyway.
Schwarzkopf was to do as he was and make sure that there were no clashes with Polish forces unless they attacked NATO units first. He was to make an effort to reach the border and engage in dialogue with any Poles encountered, but not have his troops go across into Poland without explicit authorization. More information would follow including arrangements to send a diplomatic party with a heavy military escort to talk with the Poles at a high-level, but again that was something which would certainly occur after the ceasefire with the Soviets.
With more time to use before the war ended, orders would have come from SACEUR to have part of the US Seventh Army move out of Saxony after they had reached the River Neisse yesterday and cross the Ore Mountains heading south. Schwarzkopf would have liked to have seen the US VII Corps at the very least go down into Czechoslovakia (attaching them to the French First Army for ease of command) and go after those two Soviet field armies behind Prague. The distance and the geographic factors – passes through the Ore Mountains would have to be taken – involved made that impossible though.
Air power was thrown at the Thirty–Second & Forty–Sixth Armys instead, a lot of it including B-52s making daylight air attacks much to the chagrin of CINC-SAC again being in contact in his usual robust manner when word came back of losses incurred among those bombers. Still… a ground attack would have been better to truly eliminate them.
As to the French and West Germans inside Czechoslovakia, they held large parts of Bohemia west and south of Prague as well being in the progress of surrounding Prague when word came that there was to be a ceasefire implemented at midday on April 2nd. Powell had informed SACEUR that there was a desire to see Prague taken before that occurred. Maybe a nationwide rebellion would get going in Czechoslovakia in addition to the small-scale insurgency against the regime and Prague would eventually fall to rebels… but maybe it wouldn’t.
Prague was to be taken, Schwarzkopf had been told, and NATO forces needed to take it urgently.
The French First Army had attacked at first light and charged forward in multiple attacks using armour, mechanised infantry and airmobile units. They had had a tough fight on their hands as Czechoslovak resistance – stiffened by some Soviet forces caught there – had occurred to hold the city. They took the centre of the city though, the historic heart of Prague was in French hands by the end of the morning. Yet, it came at a cost. There was a lot of destruction done as the French had been given free-fire rules on artillery and rocket strikes (no chemical weapons though) and a lot of bodies. Czechoslovakia casualties, military and civilian, were very high but so too were those incurred by the French. With not all of the city taken and ongoing fighting as the defenders weren’t giving up, it looked like no matter that there was a ceasefire coming, fighting would still continue in Prague even if NATO units didn’t want it to.
There would be many who would say that the assault on Prague, launched with haste and with such violence employed, was a mistake and even a war crime afterwards when the number of civilian losses were fully realized…
*
Midday fast approached and with that the ceasefire was about to come into effect.
Schwarzkopf had fought a hard fight to keep up the advance right before that with many subordinates sending word up the chain-of-command across Central Europe – in East Germany, Czechoslovakia and into Austria – that their men knew it was coming and there was an unofficial slowdown starting to occur as the hours and then minutes had ticked away. Keep going, he had ordered, destroy as much of the enemy as you can and push the rest back east as far as you can before then! He understood why so many had wanted to not take part in any more killing before then, risking their own lives too, but it was necessary. In their shoes, he might have wanted to do the same, yet it was imperative that the war be won.
When all that was over with and midday arrived, the fighting came to an end.
It was over.
Into SACEUR’s headquarters less than a minute later there came a message over open radio links from the commander of the Western TVD. There was a communique from Marshal Gromov which came from Legnica requesting a meeting to sign a ceasefire agreement.
Schwarzkopf’s immediate question to his staff was how the hell did the Soviets know he was here at Sperenberg? His second question was why was his opposite number at Legnica still? The thinking was that he had been at the Soviet military base outside Milovice in Czechoslovakia; if it was known that Gromov wasn’t there at the latter, that facility would have been flattened by bombs and then anyone left alive gassed. Powell had instructed him to leave someone alive to negotiate with so Milovice had been spared the rain of fire which SACEUR had wanted to pour atop it.
He was far from happy at that development even if his chief-of-staff’s explanation that intelligence like that matter which came from the CIA was often faulty.
Gromov invited Schwarzkopf to come to Legnica. He promised ‘no dirty tricks’, giving his word as an officer as to SACEUR’s safety.
No, thank you. Schwarzkopf sent back a demand dressed up as an invitation to Gromov that he should instead come to Sperenberg. He would guarantee the Soviet officer’s personal safety in the visit. Did Gromov know where the NATO-occupied Soviet airbase south of Berlin was?
An agreement for Gromov to come was sent and then acknowledged. Gromov said that he would come in a transport helicopter escorted by another half a dozen of them for security purposes. SACEUR told him that that couldn’t be done: three helicopters could come over the Neisse and NATO aircraft would escort them along an agreed flight path to Sperenberg. There would be no accidents, but if there were any accidents, Gromov had Schwarzkopf’s word as an officer that he would personally make sure they were dealt with in the proper fashion.
There was a short pause and then a final acknowledgement that Gromov would do what SACEUR wanted. He would be at Sperenberg by two o’clock and would turn the conversation over to one of his aides now so that details on flight arrangements could be made including radio codes and securing a no-fire zone in the sky.
Schwarzkopf told his opposite number he would see him at fourteen hundred hours.
There had been no intention of SACEUR going over into Poland to meet with Gromov. There were lots of reasons why ranging from Powell losing his famous cool and probably relieving him on the spot for being so stupid to the danger that elements of the KGB might not be fully onside with the ceasefire. Hell, the Polish rebels might even shoot down Schwarzkopf’s helicopter!
More than any of that, SACEUR’s wish – mirrored by those of his political masters – was that the Soviets come here to occupied territory for a meeting to discuss post-ceasefire terms for proper disengagement and how to resolve ongoing matters now that the fighting had stopped. They had to see how what was once theirs NATO now controlled. Sperenberg would certainly do for that purpose. It was a Soviet facility inside East Germany and one they had exclusive use of. It was right near the former headquarters complex at Wünsdorf as well: both places had been taken by NATO forces during the victory which was Operation Eastern Storm.
Going over to Poland, or down in Czechoslovakia where Gromov was thought to have been rather than at Legnica, would give the opposite message. Ram it home to them that they had been beaten, Schwarzkopf had been instructed to do when dealing with the Soviets, so that in the future when anyone had any silly ideas about a resumption of a fight they would recall just how badly they were beaten beforehand. Smashing apart the remaining Soviet forces right up until the last second before the ceasefire had been part of that: this was in addition to bringing Gromov to Sperenberg where SACEUR was going to be setting terms, not Gromov.
There were no accidents on the way and no dirty tricks pulled.
Gromov came in a Mil-8 transport helicopter with specialist antennas for communications and there were also two Mil-24 attack helicopters. NATO soldiers present trained weapons on all three, especially the pair of Hinds carrying external weapons, but no one opened fire despite many itchy trigger fingers. When they were on the ground, Major McChrystal went out to them with a mixed detachment of NATO personnel of several nationalities to provide ‘security’ around them while the Briton Lt.-General Peter de la Billière was sent to meet with Gromov as he got out of his helicopter.
DLB went in Schwarzkopf’s place as he was expendable (compared to SACEUR), a combat officer and held enough rank not to show disrespect but just not enough either: Gromov held the rank of Marshal of the Soviet Union while DLB had a three-star rank. SACEUR had put some thought into this and sending his special operations commander out to meet Gromov as he arrived hadn’t been an accident either for the man had led so many operations to hurt the Soviets.
Gromov and a couple of his aides came out of the Hip and were shadowed carefully by some of DLB’s men in the form of West German commandos (again a deliberate choice). They crossed the flight-ramp and were treated to a ‘perp walk’: there was a very select group of the media from the West present. This hadn’t been something Schwarzkopf wanted to have done but it’s inclusion had come direct from his president. SACEUR made sure the cameras were kept back and the press there weren’t able to shout any questions at Gromov in their usual fashion yet a perp walk it was.
Make them understand they were beaten, that was the instruction given, and the recording for historical purposes of this event would later show what many would see as a surrender just happened to be called a ceasefire.
Then Gromov was brought to see the man who led NATO’s victorious armies which had beaten his.
The meeting between Schwarzkopf and Gromov was a closed affair: they were no cameras there and only the minimum number of aides present. The negotiations were tough. The two men spoke through translators and a deal was thrashed out. Each kept making the other give their word on each matter agreed upon after suspicions were raised upon whether what they worked out would be abided to by others. There wasn’t any chance of any friendly relations between them beforehand though: not after all that had happened. The pair of them did avoid making accusations of past action taking place and have the other refute them leading to arguments. Still, it was a tense meeting.
Stopping a resumption of the fighting through misunderstandings was the first issue addressed. On the ground in East Germany, all Soviet forces – no matter what the uniform – were to turn themselves over to NATO custody along with all weapons. Any East German, even Polish, troops with the Soviets were to be included. There was to be an immediate effort to locate minefields and unexploded munitions. Casualties would be treated by both sides though with NATO having more medical units present they would take the lead. Weapons of mass destruction left in Soviet hands were at once to be handed over NATO: Gromov said there were only chemical agents left, no nuclear warheads after they had all been flown out several days ago.
In Czechoslovakia and Austria, Soviet forces were to withdraw if they were not surrounded by NATO units. They were to leave both countries and return to the Soviet Union with haste. Gromov explained that there were ‘problems’ with a full-scale rebellion in Poland and the start of one in Hungary too. SACEUR told him that those were Soviet problems, not ones for NATO or the Allies. Soviet forces needed to leave all of those countries: Czechoslovakia, Poland, Austria, Hungary and Bulgaria. If they didn’t, the war was going to have to continue. Schwarzkopf made Gromov aware that the Allies were committed to resuming the fighting if the Soviets didn’t leave Eastern Europe. In addition, when the Soviets pulled out of Austria, they were to leave all of their equipment behind: everything they had in terms of weapons, ammunition and transport. Austria had been invaded in an outright act of aggression despite being a neutral and everything Soviet forces brought into their country was to be left behind for them.
Prisoners of war. This issue was one that caused the meeting to go on for some time.
NATO held a lot of Soviet and Warsaw Pact POWs. They were taxing in terms of the need to secure them, feed them and treat them for countless medical conditions. The majority of them were not wanted by NATO apart from the ones guilty of war crimes or who had intimate knowledge of such acts. A lot of them didn’t want to go home either yet not as many did after some time in captivity as might have wanted to when they were first detained due to thoughts of the consequences of such an act. Now NATO was about to take a lot more of them too. When it came to those from non-Soviet nations, SACEUR would later deal with them when arrangements were made with whoever ended up in-charge of their countries apart from East Germany as the illegal regime there no longer existed and nothing was rising in its place. Schwarzkopf told Gromov that the Allies had no wish to keep the vast majority of those Soviet POWs and there should be an agreement made now for their return soon. How to get them home would be an issue but diplomats could later work that out. In exchange for those POWs, NATO and the Allies wanted all of theirs back too.
Everyone captured in uniform or not, military personnel & paramilitaries & civilians, were all to be returned. There would be no holding any of them and there would be no acceptance of any notion that they might wish to defect to the Soviet Union. Those who had died in Soviet custody should have their remains returned no matter where they were now: how their deaths had occurred would be dealt with later by diplomats and there would be war crimes trials before any peace agreement occurred, but with these post-ceasefire talks, SACEUR told Gromov that he wanted the POWs back without any excuse.
Those who were to be returned were the military personnel from each NATO country and Austria too. Missing diplomats from Moscow and the capitals of Eastern Europe and intelligence operatives as well. Then there were the civilians caught behind the lines and also those kidnapped for whatever purposes the Soviets had seen fit on this side of the frontlines.
If that didn’t happen, then the war was going to resume just as it would if the Soviets didn’t pull out of Eastern Europe. Diplomats could sort out the results of war crime allegations as well as matters like economic reparations and restoration of diplomatic relations, but those prisoners were to be given back.
An official document was signed by Schwarzkopf and Gromov at the end. There had been a handshake, an awkward one, but that was in private between the two men where they gave their word on abiding by the terms of the agreement they agreed to. When the media recorded images of the two military officers who’d ended the fighting, they didn’t have any images of a handshake.
The war had been won by one side and lost by the other: which was which was clear by the terms of the Sperenberg Agreement.
Would those terms, the ones on POWs especially, be upheld though?
That question was one for later. Meanwhile, celebrations already underway concerning the passing of declared midday ceasefire had already begun when news was spread that the war really was over. The peace had yet to be won by diplomats, yet ordinary people were celebrating everywhere.
Some later news was to dampen those celebrations though among those at the highest-levels who received validation on something they could only suspect before they received unpleasant intelligence confirmation of it: they’d been had.
April 2nd 1990 Beneath Whitehall, London, Great Britain
With the war over with, there were celebrations ongoing across London. Up above and across the city – throughout Britain and most of the world too – there was an outpouring of relief that it was over with and the end hadn’t come in the form of nuclear apocalypse. There was singing and dancing. There was alcohol consumed and some baby-making starting.
This wasn’t universal though. There were no celebrations among those family members grieving for the loss of loved ones and those missing & feared dead.
In addition, the British War Cabinet wasn’t celebrating tonight either.
Foreign Secretary Hurd was still in Luxembourg – he’d be flying home during the early hours – though almost all of the War Cabinet met with the Prime Minister tonight. There was one notable absence though and that had been brought about by a very disturbing recent event: Neil Kinnock wasn’t here because he had been poisoned like others had been.
Several British and European political figures had been poisoned by an unknown agent and source. Both the First Secretary of State (a member of the War Cabinet) and the Labour Party’s health spokesman (who wasn’t) were each on death’s door in London hospitals. Tom King, the Defence Secretary, another victim of suspected KGB poisoning like Kinnock and Robin Cook – plus others in Western Europe like the Dutch Prime Minister and the Danish opposition leader foremost among the targets –, had survived an attack against him with little overall effects apart from initially being violently ill but his fellow National Government members hadn’t been so fortunate. There was still little intelligence on such an event, especially the ultimate motive behind it, and there were plenty of personal concerns among the War Cabinet members about that. They meet tonight all in good health yet all would have liked to have answers on that. However, there were none forthcoming on that matter as a major investigation was still underway. When or if answers would come was an unknown and attention at the moment was on something else which might or might not have been related to that: further dirty tricks done before the ceasefire.
The MI-6 Director-General Colin McColl was briefing them all on what his organisation had found out from their intelligence source within the KGB who had just been exfiltrated from the Soviet Union following his request for an urgent defection. He didn’t use the code-name ‘Carronade’ to them to not give anything away even to those in such positions of authority as he was talking to, but it was the source from the KGB’s First Chief Directorate office in Leningrad who had provided so much intelligence throughout the war whose information he passed on.
When he’d spoken with the MI-6 men who’d gotten him to Stockholm, Carronade said that the West had been had. They had been tricked by his colleagues who he’d ran from to save his own life. There had been a regime change in Moscow but it wasn’t the one which they had seen. Kryuchkov had been deposed by the KGB and the GRU working together and then they had put Yeltsin, who they wholly controlled, into power afterwards. He would do exactly what they wanted at home in the Soviet Union while saying all the right things to the West.
It was a maskirovka, the biggest maskirovka ever pulled upon the West.
McColl said that his defector – who came with a wealth of knowledge in his head – had spoken of something called Plan 0008-6/86. This initially came from the East German Stasi, a plan of theirs drawn up four years ago. They drew up a concept as to how to maintain power if the situation in East Germany ever became dire for them – not a NATO invasion as such as had just happened but a domestic revolt – where they would step into the shadows and control a government of their puppets to put a public face on a change. The KGB knew about this and one of their top people who had escaped from near capture in the Netherlands had come home with such an idea as workable to sell to his colleagues. MI-6’s defector had been working with another opposition group against Kryuchkov and those such as him were being ‘dealt with’ by the KGB who were on-side with 0008-6/86. The puppet-masters had too much to lose and chose maskirovka rather than allowing their country to fall the way it appeared to have done.
It might have all been fanciful, McColl told those with open mouths and doubting looks, but there was evidence now to back what a lot of people had thought might have happened. He introduced a British Army officer he had brought with him to the War Cabinet meeting: Brigadier Mike Jackson, the man who’d been heading up the interrogation of senior Soviet and Warsaw Pact POWs held in Britain (those who’d been high-up in command and intelligence roles). Jackson, who those in the War Cabinet had heard about and been recommended by Tom King for that role despite his wartime injuries, told the politicians that independent of McColl’s defector, he’d spoken with a pair of POWs who had separately told him of 0008-6/86. One had been a Stasi man caught in West Germany very early in the war; another was a KGB officer named Ivanov who his colleagues had been about to shoot before a Dutch guerilla attack had occurred. Ivanov had been hurt bad in a gunfight but the Dutch had handed him over after recognizing the uniform insignia with the knowledge that if he lived he would help the NATO war cause. Very upset at how he had nearly been executed by his own side, and stroked the right way to bring his cooperation as a defector in all but name, Ivanov had spilled his guts. He had put names to faces of KGB people who had got out of the Netherlands (he’d been more helpful than General Lebed of the Soviet Airborne Troops) including a friend of his, someone named Putin who despite having a low-rank was well-connected to the decision-makers at the top.
The Soviets really had done this, McColl told them. The KGB had pulled the wool over the eyes of the West in showing them what they wanted to see. Yeltsin was a man of strings, a sock who others were elbow deep inside. The maskirovka had been planned and executed just at the KGB had wanted with the West swallowing the lie.
The War Cabinet hadn’t met tonight to talk about the maskirovka they were informed about.
Prime Minister Thatcher and John Smith (who was now acting in the stead of Kinnock) had asked for the others to come to the meeting to discuss matters such as the Sperenberg Agreement signed earlier in the day as well as matter such as British military casualties, the state of the country with regards to the economy & social affairs, what decisions should be made when it came to how to punish traitors and some other important world events such as the recent falls of Baghdad & Pyongyang. In addition, there was too the issue of whether it was wise to bring to an end to the War Cabinet and the wider National Government now that the conflict was over but there was no peace treaty yet. These were serious issues that needed attention and decisions to be made upon them.
The terms of the Sperenberg Agreement – where Schwarzkopf had met with Gromov – affected Britain in many different ways when it came to military matters and POWs.
When and how to release the numbers in terms of casualties – dead, missing / presumed dead and seriously injured – inflicted to the British people as an overall number was a hot potato issue.
Starting to fix economic and social damage nationwide caused by direct and indirect war effects had to begin with earnest; none were going to be easy fixes either.
British nationals who were being detained after betraying their country – some even unintentionally – were going to have to start being punished beyond those few who were shot in wartime court martials as serving military personnel.
Baghdad had just fallen to Iran – therefore Iraq was no longer an active nation – and the North Korean capital was in the hands of the American & Chinese armies inside that country; this all affected British interests.
With World War Three ended, the national government was considered to be needed by some until there was a peace treaty with the Soviets; others wanted it dissolved and for politics to go back to how they had been before.
Britain’s political leaders were going to be engaged in these discussions throughout the night. There would be no celebrating the end of war for them as civilians and soldiers alike were doing. The war wasn’t technically over and none of these issues were going to be solved in a couple of hours like the talks at Sperenberg achieved with just ending the fighting.
Hanging over their heads too was the knowledge of the poisonings which had taken place in a deniable fashion by the KGB before the end came and so too the dirty trick of the maskirovka which they had been told now was real, not just suspected.
As they had done since the beginning of all of this, and now at the end, they argued among themselves and decisions didn’t come easy.
|
|
James G
Squadron vice admiral
Posts: 7,608
Likes: 8,833
|
Post by James G on Aug 9, 2018 16:02:47 GMT
Epilogue – World War Four?
Immediate post-war effects
It took more than six months until a final, definitive peace deal was signed the Allies and the reformed Soviet Union. There was a lot of interference made before the Helsinki Treaty would be signed on October 18th. There was political and civilian intrusion into the terms and conditions of the treaty. Everyone wanted their say and there was quite a bit of nefarious interference too as some wanted financial gain, revenge or just to make a name for themselves.
A deal was thrashed out in the end though. The negotiations to get to that final treaty were all about compromise and the two sides caved in in many of their so-called red lines when dealing with the others. Afterwards, even before the ink was dry on the documents that each side passed to the other and were released to the media, there was uproar in many quarters.
The West hadn’t gotten out of the Soviets all that they deserved ran one argument; the counter was that they had imposed too harsh of a peace on their wartime opponent. Those reparations demanded of the Soviets aren’t enough some said; others argued that the West imposed far too much. The memories of those who gave their lives for the West were being defiled came allegation; in response, there was the claim that the Soviet people were being punished for the actions of their former leaders. Those who were responsible for all of the death and destruction were getting away with what they had done; innocents were being framed for things they didn’t do ran the response.
No one was happy with the Helsinki Treaty and there were claims that it would eventually lead to a Fourth World War years down the line.
The peace treaty brought World War Three to an end officially and allowed for the restoration of full, rather than partial and unofficial, diplomatic relations between the West and the Soviets. Ambassadors would be exchanged and agreements in all areas of country-to-country cooperation were to take place. This was done because the Soviets agreed with the West on the terms of the Helsinki Treaty.
They agreed to accept responsibility for the war in legal terms as long as it was specified that that had been the work of Kryuchkov as well as the East German leadership too. This was important in diplomatic terms for the future as there was to be no blame apportioned to NATO, the West and the Allies for World War Three. That blame ran too when it came to the cost of financial reparations to be paid to the West. Costs from war damage done to civilian property, no matter where it be, was to be paid by the Soviets. International courts would adjudge the value of loss inflicted and to the country which that was in the Soviets would send the cost of that damage so that it could be passed down. In effect, countries such as the United States were being paid for the damage done, but indirectly rather than directly. No one liked the legal fiction but it was a result of compromises made in the Finnish capital.
Kryuchkov was sent for a war crimes trial but there were unfortunately none of the East German leadership left for a trial related to the war being raged as they had all died in circumstances which the Soviets were at a loss to explain. The Soviets didn’t protest to the trials of Soviet military and KGB personnel the West already held in captivity though the Helsinki Treaty allowed for them to demand pre-trail evidence of the guilt of any of those the West wanted to extradite. Detractors of the treaty claimed that the Soviets were shielding such people and would either provide those defendants with that evidence beforehand or deny they existed or had ever been out of the country during the war.
There was a banning of Soviet military deployments outside of its borders anywhere in Europe for the next twenty-five years even if any future government requested such a thing one day for whatever reason. The West didn’t want to see a situation where Soviet land or air forces went back into Eastern Europe under any circumstances. When it came to naval restrictions, deployments on warships and submarines far away from the Soviet coast were banned for a period of five years with no exceptions made. There were no further military restrictions placed upon the Soviets in terms of conventional or unconventional weapons: their protestations and splits in the negotiation positions of those representing the West made this impossible. Many in the West were very unhappy at this, to put it mildly, and refused to accept the Soviet claims that they needed to defend their national sovereignty against ‘others’. There was a clause in the Helsinki Treaty for future talks on nuclear weapons, but that was an agreement to have talks… no more than that.
A state of effective civil war throughout the Baltic Republics – the Baltic States as they later became – affected the talks in Helsinki as Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania fought for their independence. The West Germans were seeking reunification with the almighty mess that had once been East Germany and the two matters were both linked together in the peace treaty. Some saw that as accidental and just convenient; to others it was deliberate. The Soviets had a legal responsibility as a victorious power of World War Two when it came to German Reunification (many argued they lost that with World War Three) and they leveraged a deal in the Helsinki Treaty where they absolved themselves of that so what happened in Germany was up to others as long as there was no NATO membership by the Baltic States. The Soviets let them go, declared they would pull out completely and would ‘encourage’ ethnic Russian citizens in them to leave as well, as long as neither joined NATO now or in the future. The whole of Eastern Europe would be an area where no outside power had military forces. That fate of Germany was to be for Germans to decide with no Soviet participation and that was the same through the Baltic States.
The peace treaty reaffirmed the fate of POWs not facing war crime allegations as free to be returned. So many had from both sides already, though the West had kept many senior officers and highly-skilled other military personnel in custody as a bargaining chip. How the Soviets had protested! They had said that those men were hostages and NATO had been doing what they said the KGB had been doing. The terms of the Helsinki Treaty were a return of them and an effort by NATO military investigators (unarmed) to travel through Soviet territory to visit the sites where they had been told after the Sperenberg Agreement that were the last known locations of missing POWs from the West. Those missing who had been in Soviet custody were now going to be searched for on Soviet territory after either KGB or MVD operatives – acting under illegal orders, the Soviets maintained – had done whatever they had to them and their remains.
Everything with the Helsinki Treaty upset someone.
East Germany was a military occupied zone for the next several years. Germany took a long time to reunify but did so eventually by August 1991: the occupying troops stayed on. NATO troops were spread across the country though several nations, Britain foremost among them, pulled most of theirs out apart from token forces due to the costs of such an occupation which incurred. NATO armies were trying to reorganize and rebuilt, occupation duty was a real burden on them. The Americans, the French and increasingly the West Germans had many men inside the country. They secured weapons, hunted for war criminals and tried to aid the civilian population as best they could. There were terrorist acts committed though against them and civilians who aided them. Intelligence agencies tried their best to hunt down the suspected Stasi operatives who were committing these acts; the terrorists turned to ‘soft’ targets as they bombed food distribution centers and medical clinics.
The files of the Stasi fell into the lap of the CIA. Those had been removed before the Stasi headquarters was bombed and hidden in the north of the country. For a small fee, they became the property of the CIA. Much of the domestic content on East German civilians was at first pushed aside as the Americans plowed through the information on HVA activities in the West. The Stasi’s foreign intelligence arm had been busy and had many people working for them: the CIA started to make use of this while later handing over to the West Germans the domestic-related stuff including some HVA material on West Germans.
Allegations surfaced through the West before and after the Helsinki Treaty that there had been a massive deception committed by the Soviets. It was believed first more in Europe than in the United States… though in later years those perceptions would reverse geographically. The new leadership in Moscow, Yeltsin the great reformer, were just puppets of KGB personnel who were involved in the war and had put him in power to save themselves: the idea gained currency slowly but spread wide eventually.
When Kryuchkov went on trial in Vienna – under the auspices of the United Nations – more of this belief in a deception came about. He was a nervous wreck and doctors who examined him said he had unexplainable memory loss and other health problems that they couldn’t identity. Fed by those who had an interest in making people see the ‘truth’, a picture emerged in the West of Kryuchkov having had something done to him to make him this way so he couldn’t spill his guts. This ran alongside the knowledge of the killed East German leadership (who couldn’t defend their actions) and the fact that there had been a lot of poisoning of so many politicians towards the end of the war by the Soviets as they were clearly trying to hide something: whatever that was no one could quite agree on. It was all a conspiracy theory many said; all conspiracy theories have elements of truth at the base of them said others.
As the trial in Vienna went on with the strangely-ill deposed Soviet leader, Europeans looked too at German Flu among their fellow civilians and also what military personnel afterwards would suffer from that was deemed ‘German War Syndrome’. There was information in the public eye about Soviet bio-weapons which would come out slowly over many years. Stories about Soviet politicians who left their country and went abroad suddenly with plenty of money also came out. Tales of the treatment of POWs who were released about their captivity were also made public. These latter issues caused upset among the American public as well, making this not a European-exclusive matter of grave concern, leading to furious anger from civilians and politicians alike raging against those in their own countries who’d signed the Helsinki Treaty.
The Soviets had gotten away with the war and hadn’t been properly punished!
Britain and the rest of Europe
Britain went to the polls in November 1990 in a general election. Thatcher called it under internal pressure from her party and the opposition too. She made a serious mistake thinking that she would win. There was no patriotic fever to give her and her party victory. The rationale for the election had been that the government’s economic measures in response to the war needed a public mandate and there would be five years before the next election where initial anger would die down by late 1995.
John Smith and the Labour Party won a victory. It was close and they had a majority of seventeen seats – they really needed more – but Thatcher had lost nonetheless. She was unhappy and blamed her own party, which was in some ways true yet she had gambled and lost. John Major, her Chancellor who had clashed with Smith during the war when they were both part of the National Government, took over the Conservative Party afterwards.
Britain was broke just like the rest of Western Europe. The war had cost them dear and the expense of the clean-up afterwards was extraordinary. Physical war damage was one thing but more so was everything else. People had fled their homes and jobs; they had spent their savings and paid no taxes will the war was on nor afterwards too when they had no job to return directly to. An American bailout was waited upon but when that came it really wasn’t enough.
West Germany, Denmark, Norway, the Netherlands and Austria had all been battlefields. Other nations had been hit by air attacks and damaging commando strikes. Transport and communications were smashed apart. Shipping had been sunk and refineries blown up. Nuclear power-plants needed major attention (the fear factor of radiation leaks was something to add to the fears of ordinary people) but so too did water and power supplies. People were living in tent cities because they couldn’t all go home: some wouldn’t even go home. So many more people were ill with natural and unnatural illnesses.
Who was going to pay to make all of this good again? The Americans said they would help but it really wasn’t all their responsibility overall. However, there were those gold reserves belonging to many European nations beneath New York… The Helsinki Treaty put some of the cost on the Soviets but that was something for the long-term and covered damage done to private property not what governments owned. Arguments ran that they should have been pushed harder, yet they were known to not have the money to pay for everything.
The doomsayers who wanted everyone to give up hope like they had were only listened to for a very short while. Governments started putting Western Europe back together. They sold their gold and they worked together under the European Community (EC) banner... which, as can be imagined, there were some who didn’t like that including many in Britain. They secured Arab and Japanese loans: the former for higher future costs on oil and with the latter for market access for imported Japanese goods. They started repairing and replacing what they could with plans to do more further down the line. Problems came and they were dealt with in the end. Economically and socially, Western Europe was put back together with people returning home and going back to work (including a big construction boom).
There were political issues though. West Germany was foremost among this as first they had to reorganize their own government after the events of February where the leaderships had first signed a ceasefire with the Soviets and then fallen apart afterwards. This delayed their goal of fully incorporating East Germany back into a unified country. That dream pushed the Germans on though. Knowledge of spies and traitors throughout West Germany and also in other countries of Western Europe affected politics as well. There were many exposures after the war which came alongside those caught during the conflict. Many innocents were falsely accused though at the same time many of the guilty got off. An example of the latter came in late 1990 when a West German traitor escaped judicial punishment on a technicality. He walked out of court as he celebrated… before he was butchered in a brutal revenge-slaying there in the street with the media witnessing this.
Across in Eastern Europe, everything wasn’t suddenly okay when the Soviets pulled out after the Sperenberg Agreement. The countries were technically free – a position made official by the Helsinki Treaty – but it wasn’t sunshine and flowers. Democracy and peace took some time to come to many and with others there was none of either to enjoy.
In Poland, they considered themselves to have rid their country of the Soviets. NATO troops hadn’t come in to liberate them and even if the Soviets hadn’t made an agreement with the West to leave Poland, that wouldn’t have mattered. They had risen up and expelled the occupier! The plotters in the WSW found themselves some political figures they trusted and who had no history of working with the Soviets: these people were put in-charge of the country despite having no real experience. The Poles learnt about democracy as they went on. They had experience of it from the past and plenty of those from the West who wanted to help them as exiles returned, but it was a shaky path they followed. Establishing a strong military force was seen as an urgent national goal far more important that fixing what war damage had come from bombing raids or engaging the Soviets. What was stolen from the Soviets who had been inside Poland and what afterwards the Poles managed to wrangle from NATO in terms of military equipment they had captured was fused with freed Polish POWs to form an army. If they had to, the Poles would take on all-comers: they had won their sovereignty and weren’t about to give it up ever again.
Czechoslovakia had been invaded by NATO towards the end of the war and then NATO troops had moved forward after the retreating Soviets who’d escaped destruction fast pulling out. The country split in two: the Czech-speaking part in the west and Slovakia in the east. The Czechs sought to build a democracy and be friends with the West – even Germany if that was needed to appease others – rather than focusing on their past. They locked up those they considered to be reminders of the old regime and moved forward. Slovakia had declared its independence in a manner which the Allies hadn’t liked right after the war ended: there was a suspicion of KGB involvement in that. A civil war started in Slovakia when the new regime lost control (the Soviets pulled out) and too many weapons were in the hands of people who had a grudge to hold against anyone who they didn’t like.
Across Hungary, the Soviets left and a new government emerged. There were contacts made with the West and there was no hint of Soviet involvement, yet there was no true democracy there. Hungarian soldiers had invaded Austria and been beaten; Hungarian civilians followed them after the end of the war. Austria faced a refugee crisis with Hungarians flooding in while the government in Budapest said it was unable to stop that and had more concern about Hungarian-speakers being ‘oppressed’ in Slovakia. There were soon shipments of Hungarian arms (old Soviet stocks) sent to Slovakia as well with the Hungarians saying officially they had no idea how that happened but in private claiming that people there in Slovakia of Hungarian origin needed to defend themselves.
The troubles in Romania which had kept the country out of the war continued. The rebels wouldn’t be beaten and they kept fighting the ruling regime no matter what. On and on the fighting went, taking lives though not at a rate to attract much outside attention. In neighboring Bulgaria, Turkey occupied most of the country… the Greeks were very unhappy at that! Everything of value was stripped out of Bulgaria by the Turks as they claimed they had a right to do it and there was no one to stop them from doing this.
Post-war Eastern Europe saw other troubles in the years following the war as there were many people out to take advantage as the old order collapsed. Criminal gangs tried to carve out domains and groups of former soldiers ran rampage too. The authorities slowly took control yet that was an ongoing process. Eastern European and Soviet intelligence officers who had connections with criminals and had defected or been fired were involved in a lot of this from people trafficking to weapons smuggling. The countries of the region eventually started to take notice and act, especially when Western Europe was affected by linked events with complaints made, but before then many would suffer.
The Reformed Soviet Union
Boris Yeltsin sought to reform the Soviet Union. He was the public face of this and the man who received all of the flak.
The Communist Party was dead in the water and stripped of its powers as the country experimented with democracy. The intelligence agencies were reformed and so too was the military. It was all presented to the people – and the West as well – as a break from the past. There was a new union treaty signed between the various republics and the name of the country as a whole changed. The Soviet Union was dead. Long live the Eurasian Union!
This Eurasian Union (EU) was a very different beast to what it replaced, especially in its public face. There were eleven republics in the EU whereas the previous union was made up of fifteen. The three Baltic Republics left and so too did the trio in the Caucasus; two more came into establishment as the Tartar and Siberian Republics. The Russian Republic took the lead, but the Belorussian, Ukrainian and Kazakh Republics had plenty of influence. Ethnic Russians ‘returned home’ from those parts of the old nation which were allowed to leave after violence ripped them apart, but the EU held onto Moldovia and parts of Central Asia with a lot of violence. There were even border corrections internally with the Crimea rejoining the Russian Republic and through Central Asia changes were made too.
President Yeltsin became an embarrassment to his nation.
He was a drunk and everyone, at home and abroad, knew it. He went through prime ministers serving under him as heads of the republics at an amazing rate: they didn’t last long and complained that he listened to his advisers rather than them and their needs for their people. Those advisers were retired KGB and GRU people who were always with him. Viktor Chernomyrdin who served for some time as Russian Prime Minister and the Kazakh Prime Minister Nursultan Nazarbayev clashed with him many times and ‘outed’ his advisers as the ones controlling him.
Chernomyrdin later fell down three flights of stairs (quite an achievement) to his death.
Nazarbayev became violently ill and screamed ‘poison’ before he died a painful death.
There were those in governments and intelligence services in the West who first had their suspicions and then later proof that the regime change in the Soviet Union was a fraud. The EU leadership by Yeltsin was seen for what it was and that information slowly became public knowledge.
Vladimir Bukovsky was an exile from the EU based in London and he often called Yeltsin a fraud. He spoke of the so-called former KGB advisers who controlled Yeltsin. There were defectors who had left the Soviet Union before it had died; some with money from Communist Party coffers too. These people said that the country was a dictatorship and nothing had changed apart from the name. Added to this, a self-promoting figure named Eduard Limonov who spent his time in Switzerland would often declare that ‘minorities’ had lost the war for the Soviet Union and with those gone, the EU was in fact a Russian nation now which would one day seek ‘vengeance’.
The poet Yevgeny Yevtushenko and the chess player Garry Kasparov formed a somewhat government-in-exile based in Paris. They called for democracy in their homeland and also tried to expose the corruption. There were a lot of people back in the EU with connections who got very rich and flaunted that wealth as their country suffered.
The name Eurasian Union worried others in the West. What did that mean? Did it signal some other intention? What would happen to when Yeltsin’s liver gave in?
The Baltic States had fought for their freedom and were determined to keep it. Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania were each damaged by post-war fighting as the civil and ethnic strife had caused much pain but they were free. Their governments were recognised by the West and the EU did so after the Helsinki Treaty.
Living on the edge of the EU was tough for them though. They were unable to trade with their massive neighbour and lacked the ability to do so with other countries near and far. Men who had served in the Soviet Army as prisoners came home but there was no military equipment that that West would send their way (captured from the Soviet Army) as happened with Poland. Defending themselves with what little they had against a neighbour who they were sure would come back after them became national priorities for each of them.
There was political freedom and democracy within each country and they did start to gain some support in the West too for them. The bear was at their front door though, staring them down. There was an issue with the Kaliningrad Oblast as well. That region which sat between Lithuania and Poland remained part of the Russian Republic within the EU. The Poles had cast envious eyes at it while the Baltic States wished it would fall into the sea. The EU wanted access via air and land from the Belorussian Republic and in later years, from the renamed St. Petersburg there were ships which went there on a regular basis. There was a worry that the EU was rearming and turning Kaliningrad into a major military base.
If tensions ever rose between the West and the EU again, and a fourth world war looked possible, those in Tallinn, Riga and Vilnius feared that they would be sacrificed to stop another war.
The Middle East, East Asia, Cuba & the United States
Fighting continued in Iraq for another two months in the conflict which wasn’t regarded as properly being part of World War Three. The fight to the finish there wasn’t covered by any peace treaty either. Iran conquered the country and had no intention of pulling out its troops nor losing its complete control.
The Iranians quickly got busy. They hadn’t managed to get their hands on Qusay Hussein before he fled but there were plenty of people from the old regime left behind. These were all enemies to be dealt with. The Iraqi people were invited to watch their executions and told how these were the people who had oppressed them.
There were plenty of others matters for the Iranians to be getting on with too. They were looking ahead into the future now that they controlled Iraq. There were opportunities to the south to bring others into their sphere of enlightenment, those who needed freedom from oppression down there. They also glanced west towards traditional friends in Syria and Lebanon.
It didn’t take long for Israel to realize that the change in the situation in Iraq wasn’t good for them at all. They still had their military intact, even nuclear weapons, and could always count on the Americans in the end if the situation was dire, but they feared another war again in the future. They had beaten Syria, smashed apart Iraq’s armies in Jordan, secured a semi-friendship with the Jordanians and knew that the Egyptians were busy with their army in Saudi Arabia facing down the Iranians. But…
Real Iranian influence in Syria and Lebanon frightened them though, especially as instead of a conventional war which they would win they might have to fight a war fought by irregulars well-supplied.
Israel too wondered whether there was some way in which Soviet Jews were ever going to be able to leave the EU.
The division of North Korea went without a hiccup. China and the United States split the country down the 39th Parallel with a bend in that line through Pyongyang. They cooperated to defeat the last of the resistance in the country and remove the mass stockpiles of arms & ammunition.
For the future, there was a plan for a reunification on the Korean Peninsula. That was going to be complicated as while there were no Chinese objections to South Korean military forces near their border they didn’t like the idea of American troops moving any further north than they were. The Americans wanted to pull out and didn’t understand Chinese fears. They eased those as they removed their troops and South Korean forces moved forward. The United Nations was to be involved in the long-term reunification process though the South Koreans were going to push for that to be sped up.
Down in their own country, parts of South Korea were a wreck. There were battlefields, cities including Seoul hit with long-range weapons and then the ground-zeros where nuclear weapons had detonated. There was a massive clean-up needed and that wouldn’t be easy. South Korea expected some American financial aid but sought more from Japan and even China: the latter so that it would be easier to complete all of those trade deals made to bring China into the war to crush the North Koreans.
Poor Cuba.
The country had suffered much in the war. It had been bombed repeatedly from the air and then seen all of those nuclear strikes occurring: twenty-three of the war’s total of thirty-six were in and around Cuba. When Havana had been attacked by the Soviets as punishment for the Cubans turning on them – which Yeltsin and the EU took no responsibility for – the near-miss only meant that many in the city suffered a slow death rather than a quick one. Fallout swept over the heart of the city very quickly and long before there could have been an evacuation made. No one started one anyway due to the ongoing chaos of the situation.
The casualties were horrendous.
US troops started landing a few days later. The Cubans didn’t invite them in but nor did they stop them. The horrors of Havana overawed the Cubans and they paid little attention. US Army troops landed near Havana and tried to help out with the humanitarian crisis as people fled the city that was on fire behind them: those troops, including many national guardsmen, made request after request for medical care to come to Cuba and said that they couldn’t march on Havana for the cameras as planned until that happened.
Down in the south of the country, US Marines (reservists waiting a long time for this) went into Guantanamo Bay without a shot being fired. The Cubans there just watched them move it. It was all rather odd and unnerving in some ways for the Americans but the Cubans had had enough fighting. In addition, those in the south had been attacked by the Americans with nuclear weapons before and feared a repeat of that too. If the norteamericanos wanted Guantanamo Bay that bad, they could have it.
The United States celebrated the end of the war as a clear victory. The American people saw that their nation had won a war against a strong and evil regime. The Soviet Union had lost and admitted defeat. Taking down other nations like East Germany, North Korea and Cuba too (especially Cuba) had just been a side benefit of that.
During the war, there had come assassinations of political figures and terrorist actions undertaken on American soil. There had been news that in the fighting abroad had taken lives, many lives, but no details had been forthcoming as an overall number.
When the totals came after the Sperenberg Agreement there was utter shock at the figures given of dead and wounded. Stories came afterwards of mistreated prisoners – real horrible tales were told – and also the fact that a lot of American servicemen were missing & presumed killed while in enemy custody. There was widespread revulsion at all of this and calls afterwards for further action to be taken ceasefire or not.
The Bush Administration worked hard to try to temper some of this anger. The message went out that the war was over with. The Soviets had been defeated. Western Europe had been defended and Eastern Europe freed of foreign domination. Both North Korea and the Cuba had attacked the United States and paid the price for that too. Short of invading the Soviet Union / Eurasian Union and seeing a full-scale nuclear war unleashed there was no more to be done.
It was over with.
A recession was certain to come due to wartime economic destruction and that needed to be dealt with. The country would bury its dead and try to punish those responsible as best as possible. Western Europe asked for financial aid and that could help boost the economy especially as they spent it on American goods (a condition of that aid) but America was not in the mood to, nor able to, give money away. There needed to be a reorganization of the military as it was deployed all over the place and national guardsmen brought home along with the injured and returned POWs.
As criticism came to the Bush Administration, reactions were made and not always the best ones. National security concerns were the excuse for not revealing all information requested from those who had questions about what had happened before, during and after the war. Later there would come concerns over the deception pulled by the KGB with allegations leaking to the public of a fake regime change but before those there was a big issue with missing POWs which caught the public’s attention. There were efforts to search for them, dead or even alive, by all sorts of people: the controversial businessman Ross Perot first went to Poland and later to Slovakia in that search, where he was later killed apparently by ‘bandits’. With regards to Cuba, Bush himself ended up being seen in the media as a humanitarian as well as a warrior. The story ran that he had saved the whole of Havana from Soviet nuclear weapons (true) before then sending in troops to save the rest of the civilians from that poor city (false).
Congress, retiring military personnel and civilian families had a lot of questions about the war and didn’t get the answers they wanted in some cases nor any at all in others. The war was over, came the oft repeated message, and what had happened had happened
Will there be a World War Four?
In early 1992, pest invasions among crops devastated the Ukrainian Republic and parts of the southern Russian Republic. Statements from the EU’s leader, the visibly-ailing Yeltsin, blamed the West for this entomological warfare they claimed had been unleashed upon them. They feared for their harvest later that year and a resulting famine.
Yeltsin raged against this and claimed that the agro-terrorism launched his nation wouldn’t be tolerated: the EU would respond. There was already a backlog of financial claims against the Soviets where the money being paid was being held up: it came to a stop as the EU announced it was going to have to spend that money on foreign imports of food instead.
There were springtime military maneuvers which took place afterwards in the western part of the Russian Republic (including Kaliningrad) and both the Belorussian & Ukrainian Republics too. The EU military had been reformed and while having nowhere near the strength it once had – in so many ways – it was still a force to be reckoned with if it didn’t have to face the full might of NATO’s armies.
The Baltic States and Poland were all greatly alarmed and a war scare gripped Eastern Europe. They started moving their troops towards their borders and calling for NATO to make troop deployments into their nations, the Helsinki Treaty be dammed. Those didn’t come though.
This slow-but-steady growth crisis took place against the backdrop of the 1992 US Presidential Election.
Bush was always going to run in 1992. There had been talk, speculation that he might not. Names had been floated to run for the Republicans in the form of Jim Webb, Elizabeth Dole or Dick Cheney if he didn’t – maybe even Donald Rumsfeld or Mitch McConnell might do if he didn’t. But he was running and that was all either silly media talk or a strategy by others to force him out of the race. Why wouldn’t he run? He was the sitting president and the man who had just led his country to a victorious global war which it had won hands-down. Rumours and scandals about events during the war weren’t enough to stop him. A recession had been fought off and he had even brought in tax breaks as well where possible despite economic woes.
He was running and running to win!
It was brought to Bush’s attention that Webb had been involved in trying to get his president to not run using media means. The Vice President even seriously considered challenging him directly… though fast backed out of that idea. Bush met with him, questioned him and didn’t get answers he liked. He dropped him from the ticket with an official announcement to come later when he’d found a replacement. No one dared make a serious public challenge from his own party and Bush looked forward to the campaign and the search for a running mate who he could trust.
The Democrats had firmly supported the war and afterwards been firm supporters of the Helsinki Treaty too. There wasn’t an isolationist drive nor any cowardice in the face of any foreign aggression which might rise its head to dare challenge the United States: Iran foremost among those who gave mean looks which were fast returned. They had fierce primaries among them and several candidates fell by the wayside including the Governor of Arkansas Bill Clinton. Another serving governor, Mario Cuomo from New York, secured the Democrat nomination. A surprise came not long afterwards when Cuomo chose Clinton to run with him.
Republican strategists and election operatives allegedly had a wild party that very night they heard Clinton was on Cuomo’s ticket. They couldn’t believe that Cuomo had chosen Clinton of all people! It didn’t make sense at all with what had happened in the campaign between the two of them. The Democratic primaries had thrown up more dirt that could be used then on the Arkansas politician but there was now a chance to use that in the election. All the mud they could sling would stick to Clinton, naturally, but Cuomo for choosing him too.
Senator John McCain eventually ran with Bush against Cuomo-Clinton. It was a dirty campaign, far more brutal than the election race of 1988 or this year’s primaries. Everything the Democrats used as a line of attack, from how the war was fought to decisions to hide casualty numbers until after the war to the allegations that there remained missing POWs – all and everything –, was countered with sexual and financial allegations (some true, others not) back at Clinton. Cuomo didn’t look as bad as Bush’s team hoped, but Clinton did.
The election was tight.
The Republicans had been in the White House for twelve years: would sixteen be seen as far too many? Clinton was clearly a man with personal failings but he had personality! Bush was seen as a rather cold fish but McCain worked crowds, especially military veterans of past conflicts. The election went right down to the wire with pollsters on the verge of mental breakdowns as the media bugged them for accurate forecasts. No one got the right result though.
Cuomo-Clinton won the popular vote by almost seven hundred thousand votes.
Bush-McCain won the electoral college vote 270-268.
On February 4th 1991 – the first anniversary of the war –, President Bush had been at Arlington and then thirteen days later (the anniversary of the Cuban landing) he went to Key West. A year later it was the memorial to assassinated Vice President Dan Quayle in Indianapolis he went to before a visit two weeks afterwards to Key West again.
Following his second inauguration, for the third anniversary of the war starting, in early February 1993 Bush went to Berlin. He spoke at a ceremony near the Brandenburg Gate and was to watch the unveiling of a memorial to American (as well as British and French) soldiers who’d died defending West Berlin at the beginning of World War Three. Bush spoke about the war and all of the deaths incurred and pointed to a bright future for a reunited Germany; he announced too that a major pullout from East Germany of American military forces was to begin very soon now that the former country was fully part of a reunited Germany and the security issue had been solved. The rest of his speech was to cover warning over a renewed threat to European peace from the KGB-controlled EU trying to take over the Baltic States and Poland.
Gunshots rang out and Bush fell down.
Were they the first shots fired of World War Four?
THE END
|
|
lordroel
Administrator
Posts: 67,973
Likes: 49,378
|
Post by lordroel on Aug 9, 2018 17:04:49 GMT
Deleted the post, so my post would not be drowned out by the your updates James, nice and as mentioned before, you start making me feel like a liker to much, having to like your post here, i start to believe you are working on being the first person on this forum to reach 1,000 likes.
|
|